JP7380798B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

These gaming machines are equipped with a control device , and the control device is equipped with a control board. A control board is configured by mounting electronic components such as an IC, a resistor, and a connector on a printed wiring board (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2013-56284A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the structure of the control device needs to be suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the structure of the control device can be made suitable .

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a control board that performs control related to a game,
a board box that accommodates the control board;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A predetermined connector is mounted on a predetermined board surface of the control board,
The board box is formed with a connection opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted to enable connection of a signal transmission means to the predetermined connector;
The distance between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral edge opposite to the predetermined side surface of the connection opening is on the opposite side of the predetermined side surface across the main body of the predetermined connector. The positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance is shorter than the distance between the existing specific side surface and a specific peripheral portion facing the specific side surface in the connection opening. has been
The predetermined connector is provided on the predetermined side surface so as to be located closer to the free end of the predetermined connector than the area facing the connection opening, and when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector, the predetermined connector comprising engagement means for engaging the signal transmission means;
The board box is
a predetermined portion in which the connection opening is formed;
a blocking means for preventing relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined portion while the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined portion is set as the mounting position;
Equipped with
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is a configuration that is a distance,
The board box includes a facing portion facing the predetermined board surface,
The engaging means is characterized in that the engaging means is located on a side closer to the predetermined plate surface than a portion of the opposing portion that is farthest from the predetermined plate surface.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the structure of the control device suitable .

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the symbol display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the display content on the display surface of a pattern display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the inner frame. (a) It is a front view of the main control device, (b) It is a front view of the main control device showing the fifth connector in an enlarged manner, and (c) It is a front view of the main control device showing the sixth connector in an enlarged manner. (d) is a front view of the main control device showing an enlarged view of the seventh connector; (a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface of the main control board, and (b) is a plan view of the main control board showing an enlarged view of the connector group mounting area. (a) It is a top view of a 1st connector, (b) It is a top view of a 2nd connector, (c) It is a top view of a 3rd connector, and (d) It is a top view of a 4th connector. (a) A sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector, and (b) BB of FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector. FIG. (a) A cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector, and (b) DD of FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main controller as seen from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller as seen from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller as seen from the back side. (a) It is a front view of a front case body, and (b) It is a front view of a back case body. (a) It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device when cut along a cutting plane passing through the first connector and the sixth connector (line EE in FIG. 8(a)), and (b) the first guide part is enlarged. (c) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device showing an enlarged view of the second guide portion. (a), (b) A vertical cross-sectional view of the main control device taken along a cutting plane passing through the first connector and the sixth connector (line EE in FIG. 8(a)) in the process of assembling the main control device. be. (a) Explain the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the first case fixing boss on the front side and the screw hole formed in the first case fixing boss on the back side before the front case body is guided upward by the second guide part (b) After the front case body is guided upward by the second guide part, the through hole formed in the first case fixing boss on the front side and the first case fixing boss on the back side are It is an explanatory view for explaining a positional relationship with a screw hole. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing how the MPU and various electronic devices are connected. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting contents of each terminal of the first connector. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting content of each terminal of the second connector, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting content of each terminal of the third connector, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting content of each terminal of the third connector. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting contents of each terminal. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the 1st special figure, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the 2nd special figure. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart showing payout side timer interrupt processing in the payout side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows payout state reception processing in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows payout output processing in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing in main side CPU. (a) It is a front view of the main control device in a second embodiment, (b) It is a front view of the main control device showing the fifth connector in an enlarged manner, and (c) It is a front view of the main control device showing the sixth connector in an enlarged manner. It is a front view of a control device, and (d) is a front view of the main control device showing a seventh connector in an enlarged manner. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller as seen from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller as seen from the back side. (a) A sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector, and (b) BB of FIG. 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector. FIG. (a) A cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector, and (b) DD of FIG. 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector. FIG. FIG. 34 is a longitudinal sectional view of the main control device taken along a cutting plane passing through the first connector and the sixth connector (line EE in FIG. 34(a)). (a) It is a front view of the main control device in a third embodiment, and (b) It is a front view of the main control device showing the periphery of the first to fourth connectors in an enlarged manner. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller as seen from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller as seen from the back side. (a) A sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector, and (b) BB of FIG. 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector. FIG. (a) A cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector, and (b) DD of FIG. 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector. FIG. (a) It is a front view of a front case body, and (b) It is a front view of a back case body. (a) Explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the first case fixing boss on the front side and the screw hole formed in the first case fixing boss on the back side before the front case body is slid upward. (b) To explain the positional relationship between the through hole formed in the first case fixing boss on the front side and the screw hole formed in the first case fixing boss on the back side after the front case body is slid upward. FIG. (a) It is a top view which shows the element mounting surface of the main control board in 4th Embodiment, (b) It is a top view of the main control board which shows a part of MPU in enlargement. 48(a) is a plan view showing the soldering surface of the main control board, and FIG. 48(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 48(a). 3 is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing executed by the main CPU. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration for monitoring fraudulent activity in a power-off state in a fifth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a power-on setting process executed by the main CPU. (a) It is a top view which shows the element mounting surface of the main control board in 6th Embodiment, (b) It is a top view of the main control board which shows a part of MPU in enlargement. 53(a) is a plan view showing the back surface of the main control board, and FIG. 53(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 53(a). (a) It is a top view which shows the element mounting surface of the main control board in 7th Embodiment, (b) It is a top view of the main control board which shows the center vicinity enlarged. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how processing during a power outage is executed. (a) It is a top view which shows the element mounting surface of the main control board in 8th Embodiment, (b) It is a top view of the main control board which shows the center vicinity enlarged.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening includes a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a common drawing unit 38, and a round display section 39. etc. are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, with respect to the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, when a ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33, three prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. In this case, one prize ball is paid out, and when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, ten prize balls are paid out and a ball enters the special electric winning device 32. In this case, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Note that the number of prize balls mentioned above is arbitrary; for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, but the specific number of prize balls may be different from the above. Often, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may have the same number of prize balls, or the second operating port 34 may have a larger number of prize balls than the first operating port 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

In detail about the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b. The display area of the first special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special figure display section 37b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the total area of the display area of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b is also smaller than the display surface 41a.

In the first special figure display section 37a, a winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first actuation port 33 as a trigger, and thereby a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is carried out. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display section 37b, a winning lottery is performed using winning in the second actuation port 34 as a trigger, and thereby a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed.

Note that the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b are constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but they are not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed on the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration in which , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls entered into the first actuation port 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed on the first special symbol display section 37a based on a winning in the first operating port 33, a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols is performed in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol. At the same time, when a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed on the second special symbol display section 37b based on a prize entered into the second operating port 34, a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol is performed in accordance with that. . In addition, the symbol display device 41 not only displays a display effect triggered by winning the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also displays a display effect during the opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, which will be shifted to after winning. will be held.

Display contents when symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. 4(a) to (j) are diagrams individually showing the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b) are the display contents on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining.

As shown in Figures 4(a) to (j), the pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine main patterns each numbered from ``1'' to ``9'' and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set as a plurality of display areas: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), on the display surface 41a, three symbols are displayed in a stopped state for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It looks like this. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5(a), five effective lines are set on the display surface 41a, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. .

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display surface 41a based on winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts as follows. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined symbols statically displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display ends, if the result of the internal lottery is the 4R high certainty jackpot result, 8R high certainty jackpot result, 12R high certainty jackpot result A or 16R high certainty jackpot result, any The same combination of odd symbols or the same combination of even symbols is formed on the active line, and the result of the internal lottery is 8R low probability jackpot result, 12R low probability jackpot result or 12R high probability jackpot result B, which will be described later. In this case, the same combination of even symbols is formed on any active line. Additionally, if the result of the internal lottery is a 5R high-probability jackpot result or small win result, which will be described later, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1") will be formed on any active line. Ru.

In addition, based on a winning to either of the actuating ports 33, 34, the display starts on either of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, until the display ends after displaying a predetermined result. corresponds to one game round. Further, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

If a jackpot or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the prize entered into the first operation port 33, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible. Similarly, when a jackpot or small win is won in the winning lottery based on a prize entered into the second actuating port 34, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, but if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it can be switched to the open state in which game balls can win prizes. It has become. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

The round display section 39 displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode. Here, the opening/closing execution mode includes a round number regulation mode that occurs when a jackpot is won, and an opening/closing number regulation mode that occurs when a small hit is won. The round number regulation mode is an opening/closing execution mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as the upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the special electric winning device 32. That's true. The number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 displays the number of times the round game is played or a display corresponding thereto. Further, the display on the round display section 39 is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and is ended when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game round is started. On the other hand, in the opening/closing number regulation mode, the round game is not set, the number of openings and closings of the special electric winning device 32 becomes the upper limit number, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 32. The contract will be terminated based on either one of the conditions being met. In the opening/closing number regulation mode, the round display section 39 is maintained in a non-display state.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flown down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball ejected from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the ball will be ejected from the gaming area PA. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 flow down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and then to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharged ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls. The discharge passage sections 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be explained below. As described above, there are four general winning openings 31, so there are discharge passages 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage part 42, and the detection range exists in the middle of the second discharge passage part 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that entered the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 31 on the right side The ball is detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning ports 31 so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an inlet side area corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side area by merging the inlet side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage section 44. A game ball that enters one of the two general winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

A fourth discharge passage section 45 is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage part 45, and the game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is on the way to pass through the fourth discharge passage part 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided corresponding to the first operating port 33 . A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball that enters the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. While passing, it is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided corresponding to the second operating port 34 . A second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball that enters the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. While passing, it is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and the game ball that enters the out-port 24a is on the way to pass through the seventh discharge passage section 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

Note that a game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the gaming area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Although electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 configured as described above is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window 51 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained. 7 is a rear view of the inner frame 13, FIG. 8(a) is a front view of the main controller 60, and FIG. 8(b) is an enlarged view of the fifth connector CN5 included in the main controller 60. FIG. 8(c) is a front view of the main controller 60 showing an enlarged view of the sixth connector CN6 included in the main controller 60, and FIG. 8(d) is a front view of the main controller 60 shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the main control device 60 showing an enlarged view of a seventh connector CN7 included in the main control device 60. FIG. Note that details of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 7, a main control device 60 and a sound emission control device 70 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). As shown in FIG. 8(a), the main control device 60 has a function that controls the main control of the game (specifically, an MPU 63 described below), and a function that monitors the power supply (specifically, a function that monitors the power outage described below). The main control board 61 has a circuit 201). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 62. Note that the specific configuration of the main controller 60 will be explained in detail later.

The audio light emission control device 70 (FIG. 7) controls the sound output of the speaker section 54 (FIG. 1), the light emission control of the display light emission section 53 (FIG. 1), and the display control device described later, according to instructions from the main control device 60. It is equipped with a sound emission control board (not shown) that performs control. The sound emission control device 70 includes a sound emission control board housed in a board box 70a (FIG. 7).

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls put out by the payout device 76 are delivered to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. Note that the dispensing mechanism section 73 is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and turning off the power.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply/launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal board 79 in addition to the dispensing mechanism section 73 and the control device assembly unit 74. The external terminal board 79 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 at the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15 and at an upper corner portion. The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize the status of the pachinko machine 10, and for inputting a predetermined signal from the gaming hall management computer to the pachinko machine 10. It is. The management computer receives various information from the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal board 79.

<Configuration of main controller 60>
Next, the configuration of the main controller 60 will be explained. First, the specific configuration of the main control board 61 will be explained. FIG. 9A is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Note that in FIG. 9A, illustration of the wiring pattern formed on the surface of the main control board 61 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the main control board 61 is formed into a horizontally long rectangle, and has a pair of long sides 61a, 61b and a pair of short sides 61c, 61d. The main control board 61 is an insulating board, specifically a paper phenol board manufactured by impregnating paper with phenolic resin, but is not limited to this as long as it is an insulating board; for example, it can be made of glass cloth. It may also be a glass epoxy substrate manufactured by impregnating it with an epoxy resin.

One side of the main control board 61 is an element mounting surface 61e on which the MPU 63, first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7, and various elements 91 to 94 are mounted. The main control board 61 is a double-sided board in which a wiring pattern is formed on an element mounting surface 61e and a back surface of the main control board 61, which is a board surface on the opposite side of the element mounting surface 61e. Note that the main control board 61 is not limited to a double-sided board, and may be a single-sided board in which a wiring pattern is formed only on one plate surface of the main control board 61.

A connector group including a first connector CN1, a second connector CN2, a third connector CN3, and a fourth connector CN4 is mounted on one long side 61a side of the main control board 61 (upper side in FIG. 9(a)). A region 88 is provided. FIG. 9B is a plan view of the main control board 61 showing an enlarged view of the connector group mounting area 88. The first connector CN1 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61, the dispensing control device 77, the power supply/firing control device 78, and the external terminal board 79, and the second connector CN2 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61 and The third connector CN3 is a connector for electrically connecting the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and the third connector CN3 is a connector for electrically connecting the main control board 61 and the second operating port detection sensor 47a. The fourth connector CN4 is connected to the main control board 61, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, the out opening detection sensor 48a, and the gate detection sensor 49a. It is a connector for electrically connecting electronic components such as. Note that details of how the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and various electronic components are connected will be described later.

The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are arranged in a line along one long side 61a of the main control board 61, and the connector group mounting area 88 extends along the long side 61a. As shown in FIG. 9(a), on the other long side 61b side of the main control board 61 (lower side in FIG. 9(a)), there is a A fifth connector mounting area 85a in which a fifth connector CN5 connected to a sight-firing test device (not shown) which is an external device in a sight-firing test is mounted, and various display parts (specifically, the first special figure display part 37a) , the second special figure display section 37b, the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the round display section 39). A seventh connector mounting area 87a in which a seventh connector CN7 is mounted is provided.

In addition to the connector group mounting area 88 and the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a, the main control board 61 has many surface-mounted components mounted thereon, such as a resistor 91, a capacitor 92, a transistor 93, and an IC 94. A mounting area 89 is provided. Although not shown, on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, there are wiring patterns for electrically connecting the connectors CN1 to CN4 and the various elements 91 to 94, and wiring patterns for electrically connecting the various elements 91 to 94 to each other. A wiring pattern is formed to connect to. These wiring patterns are made of copper and are covered with an insulating resist so that they are not exposed to the surface. Note that these wiring patterns are not limited to being made of copper as long as they have conductivity, and may be made of other metals such as gold.

Next, the configurations of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 will be explained. 10(a) is a plan view of the first connector CN1, FIG. 10(b) is a plan view of the second connector CN2, FIG. 10(c) is a plan view of the third connector CN3, and FIG. (d) is a plan view of the fourth connector CN4. Further, FIG. 11(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector CN1, and FIG. 11(b) is an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2. FIG. 12(a) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector CN3; 8(b) is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 8(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are female connectors, and corresponding male connectors (not shown) are connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. As shown in FIGS. 10(a) to (d), FIGS. 11(a) and (b), and FIGS. 12(a) and (b), the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 have a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The housing includes housings 101 to 104 made of resin and terminals 111 to 116 which are bent metal pieces formed into an L shape. The housings 101 to 104 are electrically insulating, and the terminals 111 to 116 are electrically conductive.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) to 10(d), the first to fourth housings 101 to 104 have rectangular bottom plate portions 101a to 104a, and upper and lower edges of the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a. upper standing wall parts 101b to 104b, lower standing wall parts 101c to 104c, and left standing wall parts 101d to 104d, which are integrally formed by vertically standing up the left edge and right edge from the bottom plate parts 101a to 104a. and right side standing wall portions 101e to 104e. The first to fourth housings 101 to 104 correspond to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 by the bottom plate parts 101a to 104a and the standing wall parts 101b to 104b, 101c to 104c, 101d to 104d, and 101e to 104e. Receiving portions 101f to 104f are formed that can receive male connectors (not shown). As shown in FIGS. 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the receiving portions 101f to 104f are arranged in the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces (FIGS. 11(a), ( b) and the right side in FIGS. 12(a) and (b)). The housings 101 to 104 as a whole have a rectangular box shape that is open in the direction toward which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces.

Insertion holes 101g to 104g, through which terminals 111 to 116 are inserted, are formed in the bottom plate parts 101a to 104a. One end of each of the L-shaped terminals 111 to 116 is a contact portion 111a to 116a that electrically contacts a terminal (not shown) of a male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. In addition, the other end of the L-shape is a fixing part 111b to 116b for fixing the terminals 111 to 116 to the main control board 61.

The contact portions 111a to 116a extend vertically from the bottom plate portions 101a to 104a to positions near the free ends of the receiving portions 101f to 104f. The fixing parts 111b to 116b exist between the bottom plate parts 101a to 104a and the main control board 61, and have a predetermined length (specifically, a length of approximately 2 mm).

The fixing parts 111b to 116b are substantially entirely fixed to the main control board 61 by being soldered to a metal (specifically, copper) land 98 provided on the element mounting surface 61e. Thereby, each of the terminals 111 to 116 is electrically connected to a wiring pattern (not shown) formed on the element mounting surface 61e. The fixing parts 111b to 116b are soldered using a surface mounting technique such as reflow soldering.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the first connector CN1 has contact portions 111a arranged at equal intervals (specifically, the distance between the centers of adjacent contact portions 111a) with the longitudinal direction of the first connector CN1 as the arrangement direction. The 17 one-end terminals 111 are lined up in a row at an interval of 2.54 mm), and the contact parts 112a are arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction as the arrangement direction (specifically, the centers of the adjacent contact parts 112a 17 other end side terminals 112 are arranged in a row with a distance of 2.54 mm between them. The row of terminals 111 on one end and the row of terminals 112 on the other end are arranged at a predetermined interval in the lateral direction of the first connector CN1 (specifically, the distance between the centers of the contact portions 111a and 112a is 2.54 mm). The row of terminals 111 on one end side is arranged on the one end side (lower upright wall portion 101c side) in the transverse direction, and the row of terminals 112 on the other end side is arranged on the side of the transverse direction. It is arranged on the other end side in the lateral direction (upper standing wall portion 101b side).

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the fixing portion 111b of the one-end terminal 111 is connected downward (first direction D1), and extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower standing wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral edge portion 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156, which will be described later. are doing. As shown in FIGS. 11(a), (b) and FIGS. 12(a), (b), the first direction D1 is the upper upstanding wall portion 101b to the lateral direction of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The direction is from 104b to the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the fixing portion 112b of the other end terminal 112 is connected upward ( The element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 extends between the upper standing wall 101b and the upper peripheral edge 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156, which will be described later. It extends along astride.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), the second connector CN2 includes two terminals 113 arranged at the center in the lateral direction of the second connector CN2. These two terminals 113 are arranged at a predetermined distance in the longitudinal direction of the second connector CN2 (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the centers of the contact portions 113a is 2.54 mm). As shown in FIG. 11(b), the fixing portions 113b of these two terminals 113 extend downward (in the first direction D1) from the center position in the lateral direction of the second housing 102, and It extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the wall portion 102c and a lower peripheral edge portion 157b of a second connector insertion hole 157, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 10(c), the third connector CN3 includes two terminals 114 arranged at the center in the width direction of the third connector CN3. These two terminals 114 are arranged at a predetermined distance in the longitudinal direction of the third connector CN3 (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the centers of the contact portions 114a is 2.54 mm). As shown in FIG. 12(a), the fixing portions 114b of these two terminals 114 extend downward (in the first direction D1) from the center position in the width direction of the third housing 103, and It extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the wall portion 103c and a lower peripheral edge portion 158b of a third connector insertion hole 158, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 10(d), the fourth connector CN4 has contact portions 115a arranged at equal intervals (specifically, the distance between the centers of adjacent contact portions 115a) with the longitudinal direction of the fourth connector CN4 as the arrangement direction. The ten end-side terminals 115 are lined up in a row at intervals of 2.54 mm), and the contact portions 116a are arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction as the arrangement direction (specifically, the centers of the adjacent contact portions 116a The other end side terminals 116 are arranged in a row with a distance of 2.54 mm between them. The row of terminals 115 on one end and the row of terminals 116 on the other end are arranged at a predetermined interval in the lateral direction of the fourth connector CN4 (specifically, the distance between the centers of contact portions 115a and 116a is 2.54 mm). The row of one end side terminals 115 is arranged at one end side in the short direction (the end side in the first direction D1 in FIG. The row of terminals 116 is arranged on the other end side in the lateral direction (the end side in the second direction D2 in FIG. 10(d)).

As shown in FIG. 12(b), the fixing portion 115b of the one-end terminal 115 is fixed downward (first direction D1), and extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower standing wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159, which will be described later. are doing. On the other hand, the fixing part 116b of the other end terminal 116 extends upward (in the second direction D2) from a position above the center of the fourth housing 104 in the lateral direction (close to the upper standing wall part 104b), It extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the upper standing wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral edge portion 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159, which will be described later.

As already described, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted in the connector group mounting area 88 in a manner that they are lined up in a line along one long side 61a of the main control board 61. As shown in FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b), in a state where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted in the connector group mounting area 88, one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the second The fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 113 of the connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 are directed toward the first direction D1 (downward in FIG. 9(b)). It is extending. Furthermore, the fixing portions 112b and 116b of the other end side terminals 112 and 116 of the first connector CN1 and the fourth connector CN4 are arranged in a second direction D2 (upward direction in FIG. 9(b)) opposite to the first direction D1. extending towards. Note that the fixed portions 111b, 113b, 114b, and 115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 are the same. As long as the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are arranged in one row on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are arranged in one row. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be arranged in two or more rows.

As shown in FIG. 10(a) to FIG. 10(d), the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c have the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. When a corresponding male connector (not shown) is connected, locking receivers 101h to 104h are integrated to prevent the male connector from coming off and maintain the connected state. It is formed. The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided near the center in the longitudinal direction of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are located on the upright end side (free end side) of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c. It is formed over a predetermined range. On the other hand, the locking receiving parts 101h to 104h are not present on the proximal end sides (bottom plate parts 101a to 104a side) of the lower upstanding wall parts 101c to 104c, and the proximal ends thereof are smooth planes. . The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h protrude downward by approximately 1 mm from the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c. When the male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, It includes a locking protrusion (not shown) that engages with the portions 101h to 104h, and a release operation piece (not shown) that is operated to release the engaged state. By operating the release operation piece, the locking protrusion is displaced in a direction away from the locking receivers 101h to 104h, and the engagement between the locking protrusion and the locking receivers 101h to 104h is released. This makes it possible to pull out the male connectors from the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

As shown in FIGS. 8(b) to 8(d), the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are made of resin formed into a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, similar to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The housing includes fifth to seventh housings 95a to 97a made of metal, and terminals 95b to 97b, which are L-shaped metal bent pieces.

The fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are female connectors, and corresponding male connectors (not shown) are connected to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. The fifth to seventh housings 95a to 97a, like the first to fourth housings 101 to 104 described above, have bottom plate parts 95c to 97c, upper standing wall parts 95d to 97d, lower standing wall parts 95e to 97e, and left side It is provided with standing wall portions 95f to 97f and right side standing wall portions 95g to 97g, and these bottom plate portions 95c to 97c and standing wall portions 95d to 97d, 95e to 97e, 95f to 97f, and 95g to 97g, Receiving portions 95h to 97h are formed that can receive male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the 7 connectors CN5 to CN7. The receiving portions 95h to 97h are open toward the direction in which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces. The housings 95a to 97a as a whole have a square box shape that is open in the direction toward which the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 faces.

Male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are connected to the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e. Lock receiving portions 95j to 97j are integrally formed to prevent the male connector from coming off and maintain the connected state when the male connector is disconnected. The locking receiving portions 95j to 97j are provided near the center in the longitudinal direction of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. The locking receiving portions 95j to 97j are formed over a predetermined range on the rising end side of the lower standing wall portions 95e to 97e. On the other hand, the locking receiving parts 95j to 97j are not present on the proximal end sides (bottom plate parts 95c to 97c side) of the lower upstanding wall parts 95e to 97e, and the proximal ends thereof are smooth planes. . The locking receiving portions 95j to 97j protrude downward by approximately 1 mm from the lower standing wall portions 95e to 97e.

When the male connectors corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 and connected to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7, It includes a locking protrusion (not shown) that engages with the portions 95j to 97j, and a release operation piece (not shown) that is operated to release the engaged state. By operating the release operation piece, the locking protrusion is displaced in a direction away from the locking receivers 95j to 97j, and the engagement between the locking protrusion and the locking receivers 95j to 97j is released. This makes it possible to pull out the male connectors from the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7.

Next, the configuration of the board box 62 that houses the main control board 61 will be described. 13 is a perspective view of the main controller 60 seen from the front side, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller 60 seen from the front side, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller 60 seen from the back side. It is an exploded perspective view. Note that in FIGS. 14 and 15, illustrations of electronic components such as the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted on the main control board 61 are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the board box 62 includes a front case body 121 that covers the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14) of the main control board 61, and a side of the main control board 61 opposite to the element mounting surface 61e. The back case body 122 covers the board back surface 61f (FIG. 15) side, which is the plate surface of the board. These front case body 121 and back case body 122 are made of colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. Thereby, the element mounting surface 61e and the substrate back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 62 can be visually recognized from outside the board box 62. Note that the material forming the front case body 121 and the back case body 122 is not limited to transparent polycarbonate resin, and may be a transparent acrylic resin or even colored transparent resin.

16(a) is a front view of the front case body 121, and FIG. 16(b) is a front view of the back case body 122. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16(b), the back case body 122 has a back side opposing plate portion 123 formed in a horizontally long rectangular and substantially plate shape, facing the board back surface 61f (FIG. 15) of the main control board 61. We are prepared. The back side facing plate portion 123 has a board facing surface 123a that faces the main control board 61. A pair of upper and lower partition walls 124 and 125 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate part 123, with the upper and lower long sides of the board facing surface 123a protruding toward the main control board 61 side. In addition, a first left partition wall 126 and a second left partition wall 127 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate portion 123, with the upper and lower parts of the left short side of the board facing surface 123a protruding toward the main control board 61 side. At the same time, the upper and lower parts of the right short side of the substrate facing surface 123a are made to protrude toward the main control board 61 side, and a right side first partition wall 128 and a right side second partition wall 129 are integrally formed.

The upper partition wall 124 and the lower partition wall 125 face each other with a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the first left partition wall 126 and the second left partition wall 127 and the first right partition wall 128 and the second right partition wall 129 face each other with a predetermined interval in the lateral direction. The back case body 122 is provided with a back side accommodating portion 131 that can accommodate a part of the back side of the front case body 121 using the back side opposing plate portion 123 and these partition walls 124 to 129.

The back side facing plate part 123 has cylindrical board fixing bosses 132 to 132, which are used for fixing the main control board 61 to the back case body 122, at the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the board facing surface 123a. 135 is integrally formed. The board fixing bosses 132 to 135 protrude from the board facing surface 123a toward the main control board 61, and the free ends of the board fixing bosses 132 to 135 have screw holes 132a to 135a that allow the main control board 61 to be fixed with screws. (FIG. 16(b)) is formed. Further, board fixing through holes 136 to 139 are provided at the upper left, lower left, lower right, and upper right sides of the main control board 61 when viewed from the front, so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the board fixing bosses 132 to 135. It is formed. These four board fixing through holes 136 to 139 are provided in one-to-one correspondence to the four board fixing bosses 132 to 135 described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the back case body 122 by being screwed to the board fixing bosses 132 to 135 from the element mounting surface 61e side. This brings the main control board 61 into a state where it is integrated with the back case body 122. In this state, the substrate back surface 61f (FIG. 15) of the main control board 61 faces the substrate facing surface 123a with a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-back direction).

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16(a), the front case body 121 includes the MPU 63 (FIG. 9(a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9(a)). A horizontally long rectangular front facing plate portion 141 is provided, which faces the element mounting surface 61e with (a) in between. As shown in FIG. 15, the front facing plate portion 141 has an element facing surface 141a facing the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14). A pair of upper and lower standing walls 142 and 143 are integrally formed on the front facing plate portion 141, with the upper and lower long sides of the element facing surface 141a standing up on the back side (back case body 122 side). At the same time, a pair of left and right standing walls 144 and 145 are integrally formed with the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 141a standing up on the back side (back case body 122 side). The upper standing wall 142 and the lower standing wall 143 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the left standing wall 144 and the right standing wall 145 face each other at a prescribed interval in the horizontal direction. The front case body 121 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped board accommodating part 146 that is opened to the back side by the front facing plate part 141 and these upstanding walls 142 to 145, and can accommodate the main control board 61. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16(a), first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 9(b) )) is formed on the surface of the main controller 60. As shown in FIG. 14, the connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the connector group corresponding recess 155 has a horizontally long rectangular connector group facing the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 (FIG. 9(a)) at the bottom of the connector group corresponding recess 155. A corresponding plate portion 155a is provided. The connector group corresponding plate portion 155a covers almost the entire connector group mounting area 88 (FIG. 9(a)) in which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 9(a)) are mounted on the element mounting surface 61e. cover. As shown in FIGS. 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a is connected to the element mounting surface 61e in the front-back direction (FIGS. 11(a), (b) and The main control board 61 and the connector group corresponding plate part 155a face each other at a predetermined interval (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm interval) in the horizontal direction in FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b). Fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present between them. There is some play between these fixing parts 111b to 116b and the connector group corresponding plate part 155a.

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) to 8(d) and FIG. 16(a), the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a is penetrated in the thickness direction so that the first connector A first connector insertion hole 156, a second connector insertion hole 157, a third connector insertion hole 158, and a fourth connector insertion hole 159 are formed, into which the CN1, second connector CN2, third connector CN3, and fourth connector CN4 are inserted. ing. These first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are horizontally long rectangular through holes. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are exposed to the surface of the main control device 60 by being inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, and correspond to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. A male connector (not shown) can be accepted.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), from the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a to the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The vertical dimension is set to be approximately 1 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b to the lower end of the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Therefore, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The vertical dimension of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b to the lower end of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Approximately 2 mm larger than the previous size. Therefore, when the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159 A play of about 2 mm in total occurs between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16(a), a fifth connector CN5, a sixth connector A fifth connector corresponding recess 161, a sixth connector corresponding recess 162, and a seventh connector corresponding recess 163 are formed to expose the CN6 and the seventh connector CN7 on the surface of the main control device 60. As shown in FIG. 13, these fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163 are formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. The fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163 have a horizontally long rectangular fifth connector facing the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14) of the main control board 61 at the bottom of the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163. It includes a corresponding plate part 161a, a sixth connector corresponding plate part 162a, and a seventh connector corresponding plate part 163a.

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) to 8(d) and FIG. 16(a), the fifth connector corresponding plate portion 161a is penetrated in the thickness direction to form the fifth connector. A fifth connector insertion hole 164 is formed into which the CN5 is inserted, and the sixth connector CN6 is inserted into the sixth connector corresponding plate part 162a by passing through the sixth connector corresponding plate part 162a in the thickness direction. A sixth connector insertion hole 165 is formed in the seventh connector corresponding plate part 163a, and a seventh connector insertion hole into which the seventh connector CN7 is inserted by penetrating the seventh connector corresponding plate part 163a in the plate thickness direction. 166 is formed. These fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166 are horizontally long rectangular through holes. The fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are exposed to the surface of the main controller 60 by being inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166, and correspond to the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. A male connector (not shown) can be accepted.

As shown in FIGS. 8(b) to 8(d), the vertical dimensions of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166 are as follows: It is set approximately 2 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of 97d to the lower ends of locking receivers 95j to 97j. Therefore, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166. The vertical dimension of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166 is from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 95d to 97d to the lower end of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c in the corresponding fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. It is approximately 3 mm larger than the size of . Therefore, when the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 164 to 166, the upper upright wall portions 95d to 97d and the upper peripheral edge portions 164a to 166a of the connector insertion holes 164 to 166 There is a total play of about 3 mm between the connector insertion holes 164 and the lower peripheral edges 164b to 166b of the connector insertion holes 164 to 166.

As described above, the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 are formed one size larger than the corresponding connectors CN1 to CN7. This facilitates the work of inserting the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 in the process of assembling the main control device 60.

Next, a configuration for assembling the main controller 60 will be described. In the process of assembling the main control device 60, the main control board 61 is fixed to the back case body 122 with screws, as described above. Thereafter, the front case body 121 is combined with the back case body 122 so as to cover the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16(a), the front case body 121 is attached to the main control board at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the element facing surface 141a. Position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are integrally formed, which are used to adjust the position when assembling the case body 122 with the back case body 122. As shown in FIG. 15, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the element facing surface 141a in the direction toward the main control board 61. Boss insertion holes 175 to 178 through which the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 can be inserted are formed at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the main control board 61.

In the process of assembling the main control device 60, after the main control board 61 is screwed to the back case body 122, the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 of the main control board 61 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. The free ends of the position adjustment bosses 171-174 are inserted. Thereafter, the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. As a result, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 penetrate the main control board 61 and protrude toward the back case body 122 side. As already explained, a predetermined distance is provided between the main control board 61 and the back side facing plate portion 123 in a state where the main control board 61 is screwed to the board fixing bosses 132 to 135. Therefore, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 can be made to protrude further toward the back side facing plate portion 123 than the main control board 61.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the lateral dimensions of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are such that the front case body 121 cannot be moved in the lateral direction when the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. The diameter is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 so as to be regulated. The boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are long holes that extend vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimensions of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are such that the front case body 121 is allowed to move approximately 1 mm in the vertical direction when the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. , is set approximately 1 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174.

FIG. 17(a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the main controller 60 taken along a cutting plane passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6 (line EE in FIG. 8(a)). As shown in FIG. 17(a), on the upper partition wall 124 of the back case body 122, the front case body 121, which is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174, is mounted downward. A first guide portion 181 for guiding is integrally formed. The first guide portion 181 is provided on the side opposite to the back side facing plate portion 123 in the upper partition wall 124 and protrudes downward from the lower plane of the upper partition wall 124 . As already explained, the upper standing wall 142 of the front case body 121 stands up from the front facing plate portion 141 toward the back case body 122. An upper outer edge portion 151 is integrally formed on the upper upright wall 142, with the end thereof protruding upward.

FIG. 17(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the main controller 60 showing the first guide part 181 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 17(b), the first guide part 181 contacts the upper outer edge part 151 of the front case body 121 that is slid toward the back side facing plate part 123, and gradually moves the front case body 121 downward. A first guide surface 181a that guides the front case body 121 downward, and a second guide surface 181b that maintains the state in which the front case body 121 is guided downward. The first guide surface 181a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the rear (back side facing plate portion 123 side). The front case body 121 is guided approximately 1 mm downward by the first guide surface 181a. The second guide surface 181b is a horizontal surface that is located approximately 1 mm below the lower plane of the upper partition wall 124. While the upper outer edge portion 151 is in contact with the second guide surface 181b, the front case body 121 is maintained in a state where it is guided approximately 2 mm below the lower plane of the upper partition wall 124.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the lower partition wall 125 of the back case body 122 has the front case body 121 upwardly slidable toward the back side facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. A second guide portion 182 is integrally formed. The second guide part 182 is provided closer to the back side facing plate part 123 than the first guide part 181 in order to guide upward the front case body 121 which is guided downward by the first guide part 181. It protrudes upward from the upper plane of the lower partition wall 125. As already explained, the lower standing wall 143 stands up from the front facing plate portion 141 toward the back case body 122. A lower outer edge portion 152 is integrally formed on the lower standing wall 143, with the end thereof protruding downward.

FIG. 17(c) is a longitudinal sectional view of the main controller 60 showing the second guide part 182 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the second guide portion 182 contacts the lower outer edge portion 152 of the front case body 121 that is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123, and gradually moves the front case body 121. A first guide surface 182a that guides upward and maintains a state in which the front case body 121 is guided upward to enable fixing the front case body 121 to the back case body 122 while being guided upward. A second guide surface 182b is provided. The first guide surface 182a is an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the rear (back side facing plate portion 123 side). The front case body 121 is guided upward by approximately 1 mm by the first guide surface 182a. The second guide surface 182b is a horizontal surface that is located approximately 1 mm above the upper plane of the lower partition wall 125. The front case body 121 is maintained in a state where it is guided approximately 1 mm above the upper plane of the lower partition wall 125 while the lower outer edge portion 152 is in contact with the second guide surface 182b.

The second guide portion 182 is provided at a position where it comes into contact with the lower outer edge portion 152 of the front case body 121 after the upper outer edge portion 151 of the front case body 121 is no longer in contact with the first guide portion 181. It is being Therefore, after being guided downward by the first guide section 181, the front case body 121 is in a state where it is not in contact with either the first guide section 181 or the second guide section 182, and then the second guide section 182.

Here, the flow of the process of combining and fixing the front case body 121 to the back case body 122 in which the main control board 61 is integrated is shown in FIGS. 17(a) to 17(c) and FIG. 18(a). This will be explained with reference to FIG. 18(b). FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b) show the case where the main controller 60 is cut along a cutting plane passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6 (line EE in FIG. 8(a)). FIG. 6 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the main controller 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), when the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 (FIG. 15) are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (FIG. 15), the front case body 121 is attached to the back side facing plate portion 123. By sliding the front case body 121 toward the rear case body 122, the main control board 61 is integrated with the front case body 121 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. In the process of sliding the front case body 121 toward the back facing plate 123, the upper upright wall 142, the upper outer edge 151, the lower upright wall 143, the lower outer edge 152, the left upright wall 144 of the front case body 121 (FIG. 15) and the right standing wall 145 (FIG. 15) include the main control board 61, the upper partition wall 124 of the back case body 122, the lower partition wall 125, the first left partition wall 126 (FIG. 14), and the left side partition wall 124 (FIG. 15). It enters between the two partition walls 127 (FIG. 14), the first right partition wall 128 (FIG. 14), and the second right partition wall 129 (FIG. 14). Then, the upper outer edge portion 151 of the front case body 121 contacts the first guide portion 181 provided on the upper partition wall 124 of the back case body 122.

Thereafter, the front case body 121 is gradually guided downward along the first guide surface 181a of the first guide portion 181, and is maintained in the state of being guided downward by the second guide surface 181b. As already explained, the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are formed as long holes extending in the lateral direction of the main control board 61. Therefore, by sliding the front case body 121 toward the back facing plate portion 123 while the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the front case body 121 can be moved in the lateral direction. The front case body 121 can be guided downward by the first guide portion 181 within a range allowed by the shapes of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 while regulating the

By guiding the front case body 121 downward by the first guide portion 181, the position of the main control board 61 relative to the front case body 121 moves upward, and the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, The positions of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8(a)) relative to 164 to 166 (FIG. 8(a)) move upward. As shown in FIG. 18(b), when the front case body 121 is guided downward by the first guide portion 181, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8(a)) are connected to the corresponding connectors. It is located at the center in the vertical direction of the insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166 (FIG. 8(a)).

As shown in FIG. 18(b), in a state where the front case body 121 is guided downward by the second guide surface 181b (FIG. 17(b)) of the first guide part 181, the front case body 121 is further moved to the back side. When sliding toward the opposing plate part 123, the state in which the front case body 121 is guided downward by the second guide surface 181b is maintained, that is, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 (see FIG. 8(a) ) are located at the vertical center of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 (FIG. 8(a)), and then insert one of the free ends of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7. The parts can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166.

In this state, the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is dimensions, and the play that exists between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The dimension is approximately 1 mm. Furthermore, the size of the play that exists between the upper upstanding wall portions 95d to 97d of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 and the upper peripheral edge portions 164a to 166a of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166, and the size of the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 95e to 97e of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 and the lower peripheral edges 164b to 166b of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166. is approximately 1.5 mm.

In this way, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178, which are long holes extending in the transverse direction of the main control board 61, to restrict the lateral movement of the front case body 121, and to By adjusting the vertical position of the front case body 121 using the first guide portion 181, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are located at the center in the vertical direction of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166. In addition, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in this state.

In a configuration that does not include position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 and boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the main control board is used to insert seven connectors CN1 to CN7 into corresponding seven connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166. It is necessary to appropriately adjust the position of the front case body 121 with respect to the main control board 61, which reduces the efficiency of the work of assembling the front case body 121 with the back case body 122 into which the main control board 61 is integrated. On the other hand, in this embodiment, after inserting the four position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 into the corresponding four boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the front case body 121 is moved along the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 so that the front case body 121 faces the back side. By sliding it toward the plate part 123, the connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to which the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 correspond can be removed while eliminating the need to finely adjust the position of the front case body 121 with respect to the main control board 61. 166. The seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are located at the center in the vertical direction of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, and the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, the locking receivers 101h to 104h of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIGS. 10(a) to 10(d)) and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are The lower peripheral edge portion 156b of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 (FIGS. 8(a) to 8(d)) to which the receiving portions 95j to 97j (FIGS. 8(b) to 8(d)) correspond 159b and 164b to 166b can be prevented. This simplifies the work of inserting the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 into the corresponding seven connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the process of assembling the main controller 60, thereby improving the efficiency of the work. be able to.

After the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, as shown in FIGS. 17(a) to 17(c), When the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate part 123, the lower outer edge 152 of the front case body 121 comes into contact with the second guide part 182 provided on the lower partition wall 125 of the back case body 122. do. The front case body 121 that is slid toward the back side facing plate section 123 is gradually guided upward along the first guide surface 182a of the second guide section 182, and then guided upward by the second guide surface 182b. The state is maintained. As already explained, the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 are formed as long holes extending in the lateral direction of the main control board 61. Therefore, by sliding the front case body 121 toward the back facing plate portion 123 while the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the front case body 121 can be moved in the lateral direction. It is possible to guide the front case body 121 upwardly by the second guide portion 182 within a range allowed by the shapes of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 while regulating the shape of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178.

In a state where the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide part 182, the first to fourth connectors are inserted as shown in FIGS. The lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the holes 156 to 159 are in a state close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Dimension of the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is determined from the size of the upper play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. It's also small. Note that details of the play on the lower side will be described later.

As already explained, in a state where a part of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion hole 156 to 159, 164 to 166, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 The dimensions of the play that exists between the lower upstanding wall portions 95e to 97e and the lower peripheral edges 164b to 166b of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 164 to 166 are as follows: This is larger than the size of the play that exists between the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Therefore, when the front case body 121 is guided by the second guide part 182 and moves upward, the lower upright wall parts 95e to 97e of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes. The upward movement of the front case body 121 is not hindered by contact with the lower peripheral edges 164b to 166b of 164 to 166. As a result, the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are guided by the second guide portion 182 to the lower upstanding wall portion 101c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is now possible to approach 104c.

As already explained, the locking receiving parts 101h to 104h are formed over a predetermined range on the upright end side (free end side) of the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c. On the other hand, the locking receiving parts 101h to 104h are not present on the proximal end sides (bottom plate parts 101a to 104a side) of the lower upstanding wall parts 101c to 104c, and the proximal ends thereof are smooth planes. . 11(a), (b) and FIG. 12(a), (b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a of the front case body 121 is arranged so that the front case body 121 is moved upward by the second guide portion 182. By being guided, it gets under the locking receivers 101h to 104h and approaches the smooth surface. As a result, the second guide is rotated until the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 sufficiently approach the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The portion 182 allows the front case body 121 to be guided upward.

Thereafter, when the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate part 123 along the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174, the free ends of the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 come into contact with the back side facing plate part 123. As a result, the front case body 121 cannot be slid any further toward the back side facing plate portion 123, and the sliding for assembling the front case body 121 with the back case body 122 is completed. The front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122 in a state where the sliding is completed.

Next, a configuration for fixing the front case body 121 to the back case body 122 will be described. As already explained, the left standing wall 144 and the right standing wall 145 stand up from the front facing plate portion 141 toward the back case body 122. As shown in FIG. 16(a), the left side upright wall 144 is integrally formed with a front side first case fixing boss 183 at the end of the upright end of the left side upright wall 144, and the right side upright wall 145 is integrally formed with a front side first case fixing boss 183. A second front case fixing boss 184 and a third front case fixing boss 185 are integrally formed at the end of the right side standing wall 145 at the end thereof. The front-side first case fixing boss 183 is provided approximately at the center of the left standing wall 144 in the vertical direction, and protrudes leftward from the left standing wall 144 . The second front case fixing boss 184 and the third front case fixing boss 185 are provided at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and protrude rightward from the right side upright wall 145. These case fixing bosses 183 to 185 are formed with through holes 183a to 185a through which screws 179 for fixing the front case body 121 to the back case body 122 are inserted.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the back side facing plate part 123 of the back case body 122 is integrally formed with a back side first case fixing boss 186 on the left short side of the back side facing plate part 123. A second back case fixing boss 187 and a third back case fixing boss 188 are integrally formed on the right short side of the back side facing plate portion 123. The back side first case fixing boss 186 corresponds to the front side first case fixing boss 183, the back side second case fixing boss 187 corresponds to the front side second case fixing boss 184, and the back side third case fixing boss 188 corresponds to the front side first case fixing boss 186. It corresponds to the third case fixing boss 185 on the front side. The back side first case fixing boss 186 is provided at a position between the left side first partition wall 126 and the left side second partition wall 127 in the vertical direction, and protrudes leftward from the back side opposing plate portion 123. Further, the second back case fixing boss 187 and the third back case fixing boss 188 are provided at a predetermined interval between the first right partition wall 128 and the second right partition wall 129 in the vertical direction. , protrudes to the right from the back side facing plate portion 123. Screw holes 186a to 188a are formed in these case fixing bosses 186 to 188 so that the front case body 121 can be fixed with screws.

FIG. 19(a) shows a through hole 183a formed in the first case fixing boss 183 on the front side and a first case fixing boss 186 on the back side before the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide part 182. 19(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship with the screw hole 186a, and FIG. 19(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship with the screw hole 186a. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the through hole 183a formed in the first case and the screw hole 186a formed in the first case fixing boss 186 on the back side. Before the front case body 121 is guided upward, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the through hole 183a of the first case fixing boss 183 on the front side and the screw hole 186a of the first case fixing boss 186 on the back side are , vertically shifted. Although not shown, similarly, the through holes 184a, 185a (FIG. 16(a)) of the second case fixing boss 184 on the front side and the third case fixing boss 185 on the front side, the second case fixing boss 187 on the back side and the third case fixing boss 187 on the back side The screw holes 187a and 188a (FIG. 16(b)) of the case fixing boss 188 are shifted in the vertical direction. For this reason, it is in a state where it cannot be fixed with screws as it is.

After the front case body 121 is guided upward, as shown in FIG. is resolved, and the through hole 183a and the screw hole 186a are in communication with each other. Although not shown, similarly, the through holes 184a, 185a (FIG. 16(a)) of the second case fixing boss 184 on the front side and the third case fixing boss 185 on the front side, the second case fixing boss 187 on the back side and the third case fixing boss 187 on the back side The screw holes 187a and 188a (FIG. 16(b)) of the case fixing boss 188 are in communication with each other. This makes it possible to fix the front case body 121 and the back case body 122 with screws. Due to the configuration in which the front case body 121 and the back case body 122 cannot be fixed with screws unless the front case body 121 is guided upward, the front case body 121 may be in a state where it is not guided upwardly. This prevents the front case body 121 and the back case body 122 from being fixed together while the upward guidance is only halfway performed.

The front case body 121 has a first front case fixing boss 183, a second front case fixing boss 184, and a third front case fixing boss 185 (FIG. 16(a)) that fix the first case on the back side from the front side of the front case body 121. It is fixed to the back case body 122 by being screwed to the boss 186, the second back case fixing boss 187, and the third back case fixing boss 188 (FIG. 16(b)). As a result, a rectangular box-shaped (substantially rectangular parallelepiped) board box 62 having a predetermined internal space is formed, and the main control board 61 is housed in the internal space of the board box 62. .

In a state where the front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122, the upper upright wall 142, the upper outer edge 151, the lower upright wall 143, the lower outer edge 152, the left upright wall 144, and the right upright wall of the front case body 121 are shown. The wall 145 is inserted between the partition walls 124 to 129 of the back case body 122 and the main control board 61. Various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9(a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 are housed between the main control board 61 and the front case body 121, and The seven connectors CN1 to CN7 (FIG. 8(a)) are inserted into corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 (FIG. 8(a)) and exposed on the surface side of the front case body 121. As shown in FIG. 8(a), the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 14) of the main control board 61 is covered by the front case body 121, except for the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7. Further, a substrate back surface 61f (FIG. 15) of the main control board 61 faces the back side opposing plate portion 123 with a predetermined interval therebetween.

Here, details of the play occurring around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are shown in FIGS. 8(a) to (d), FIGS. 11(a) and (b), and FIGS. I will explain while referring to it.

As already explained with reference to FIGS. 11(a), (b) and FIGS. 12(a) and (b), the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, and the third connector CN3 The fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 114 and one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 are the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159 of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. 159b along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Furthermore, as already explained with reference to FIGS. 11(a) and 12(b), the fixing portions 112b and 116b of the other end terminal 112 of the first connector CN1 and the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4 are , extending along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. There is.

As described above, the lower side existing between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 The dimension of the play is determined by the size of the play between the upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. smaller than the play dimension. Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a tampering jig such as a wire into the lower play and illicitly manipulating the signal. One end side of the first connector CN1 where the fixing portions 111b, 113b to 115b extend along the element mounting surface 61e between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b. The signal lines set to the terminal 111, the terminal 113 in the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 in the third connector CN3, and the one-end terminal 115 in the fourth connector CN4 can be protected preferentially from the fraudulent act.

The dimension of the lower play is preferably 0.8 mm or less, more preferably 0.5 mm or less. By setting the dimension of the play on the one end side to 0.8 mm or less, a conductive tampering jig such as a wire can be inserted through the play on the lower side to ensure that the fixed parts 111b, 113b to 115b are the lower standing wall part. 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b along the element mounting surface 61e so as to straddle the terminals 111, 113 to 115. It can be prevented. By setting the dimension of the lower play to 0.5 mm or less, it is difficult to insert a tampering jig into the lower play, and the effect of preventing the fraudulent act can be enhanced. Note that details of the signal lines assigned to the respective terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 will be described later.

As already explained, the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 have locking receiving parts 101h to 104h on the lower side surfaces of the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c. It is formed. As shown in FIGS. 11(a), (b) and 12(a), (b), the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are connected to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the first to fourth connector insertion holes. The lower play exists on the upright tip side (free end side) of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c than the lower play that exists between the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the lower upright wall portions 156 to 159. For this reason, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13, unauthorized use can be made from the front facing plate section 141 side, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the main control board 61, due to the play on the lower side. Insert the jig and electrically connect the tampering jig to one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. In the case of a fraudulent attempt to contact the user, the insertion of the fraudulent jig can be prevented by the locking receivers 101h to 104h. This can make the fraudulent act even more difficult.

In a state where a part of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion hole 156 to 159, 164 to 166 (see FIG. 18(b)), the lower upstanding wall portion 101c 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b, there is play of a common size in the vertical direction. The vertical direction is the direction in which the front case body 121 is guided by the second guide portion 182. Therefore, when the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide part 182 while the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the corresponding boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the first to fourth connectors This prevents variations in the play between the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b in CN1 to CN4. This allows the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b to uniformly approach the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a.

As already explained, the connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 13, the side surface 155b of the connector group corresponding recess 155 stands approximately perpendicularly from the connector group corresponding plate 155a toward the direction opposite to the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to insert conductive tampering tools such as wires into the gaps between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a. As already explained, the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163 are formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 13, the side surfaces 161b to 163b of the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 161 to 163 extend in the direction opposite to the main control board 61 from the fifth to seventh connector corresponding plate parts 161a to 163a. It stands almost vertically. This creates a gap between the fifth connector CN5 and the fifth connector corresponding plate part 161a, a gap between the sixth connector CN6 and the sixth connector corresponding plate part 162a, and a gap between the seventh connector CN7 and the seventh connector corresponding plate part 163a. The structure makes it difficult to insert conductive tampering tools such as wire into the gaps.

Next, the seal 191 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 14, the back case body 122 has a back side sticking plate part 192 between the second back case fixing boss 187 and the third back case fixing boss 188 on the right short side of the back side facing plate part 123. It is integrally formed. Further, a front side sticking plate part 193 is integrally formed in the front case body 121 at a position overlapping the back side sticking plate part 192 and the board box 62 in the thickness direction on the right short side of the front side facing plate part 141.

A plurality of sets of mutually communicating screw holes are formed in these two pasting plate parts 192 and 193, and screws (not shown) are screwed into these screw holes. Note that a well-known screw that is detachable is used as the screw. By screwing the screws as described above, the two attachment plate parts 192 and 193 are fixed. As shown in FIG. 13, a seal 191 is pasted on the pasting plate parts 192 and 193 so as to straddle the boundary between the two. When the sealing sticker 191 is peeled off after pasting, the adhesive layer remains on the pasting plate portions 192 and 193, making it impossible to re-stick. By providing the seal 191, if the substrate box 62 is opened illegally, it becomes possible to discover it.

As shown in FIG. 13, a pasting part cover 194 is fixed to the two pasting plate parts 192 and 193 (FIG. 14) so as to cover the pasted seal 191 from the outside. The pasting section cover 194 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the seal 191 is visible through the pasting section cover 194. Note that the pasting section cover 194 may be provided as a defect.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the main controller 60 having the above configuration, the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the edge on the side where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are exposed on the surface. is located on the upper side, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are mounted so that their exposed edges are located on the lower side. Incidentally, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 when installed in a gaming hall, the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 becomes visible. In this case, since the main control device 60 constitutes the back side of the gaming machine main body 12, and the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the gaming machine main body 12 cannot be removed. By opening the frame 11, the surface of the front case body 121 becomes visible. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which all or part of the main control device 60 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. Even in this case, since the back pack 72 is transparent, the surface of the front case body 121 becomes visible when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

As already explained, the main control device 60 includes the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 20, the above-mentioned MPU 63 and a power failure monitoring circuit 201 are mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 63 includes a main CPU 64, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a main ROM 65 and a main RAM 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 63 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the main ROM 65 and the main RAM 66 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 63, and each may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The main ROM 65 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to maintain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The main ROM 65 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 64 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 66 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The main side RAM 66 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the main side ROM 65. The main RAM 66 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 65.

The MPU 63 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring circuit 201 is connected to the input side of the MPU 63. The power outage monitoring circuit 201 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 78, and monitors the voltage of DC36V, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, an AC 100V commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the necessary operating power (specifically, DC36V, DC24V, DC12V, and DC5V) is generated for the main control board 61, payout control device 77, etc. At the same time, the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

A special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39 are connected to the output side of the MPU 63. By the way, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a, a second special figure display section 37b, a first special figure reservation display section 37c, and a second special figure reservation display section 37d. are all connected to the output side of the MPU 63. Similarly, the general drawing unit 38 is provided with a general drawing display section 38a and a general drawing holding display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 63. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 63 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 63 executes drive control of the special electric drive unit 32c (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the general electricity accessory 34a is won, the MPU 63 executes drive control of the general electricity drive unit 34c (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, so that the general electricity accessory 34a is opened and closed. be done. Furthermore, during the game round and the opening/closing execution mode, display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed by the MPU 63. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not the general electric accessory object 34a is to be opened, the display control of the ordinary electric figure unit 38 is executed in the MPU 63. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, display control of the round display section 39 is executed in the MPU 63.

An audio light emission control device 70 is connected to the output side of the MPU 63. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 70 via the seventh connector CN7. Details of these various commands will be explained later. The audio light emission control device 70 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 90. It is. The display control device 90 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 70.

A payout control device 77 is connected to the input side and output side of the MPU 63. The payout control device 77 includes a payout side MPU 221. The payout side MPU 221 includes a payout side CPU 222 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control section and a calculation section, a payout side ROM 223, a payout side RAM 224, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. .

The payout side ROM 223 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The payout side ROM 223 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 222.

The payout side RAM 224 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 224 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the payout side ROM 223. The payout side RAM 224 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 223.

The payout side MPU 221 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The payout side CPU 222 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 64. The payout control device 77 includes, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball entry section (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and through gate 35). Various prize ball commands such as a 1 prize ball command, a 10 prize ball command, and a 15 prize ball command are output. The 1 prize ball command is a command for making the payout side CPU 222 recognize that the payout of 1 game ball should be executed, and the 10 prize ball command is a command for making the payout side CPU 222 recognize that the payout of 1 game ball should be executed. This is a command for making the payout side CPU 222 recognize, and the 15 prize balls command is a command for making the payout side CPU 222 recognize that 15 game balls should be paid out. The payout side CPU 222 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 64 and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out.

The payout side CPU 222 monitors whether or not the state is such that it is possible to pay out game balls normally, and if it is determined that the state is such that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, the payout side CPU 222 stores the unpaid balls in the payout side RAM 224. A putout device 76 is stopped even in a situation where information on the number of prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 222 transmits a payout restriction command to the main side CPU 64 indicating that it is not possible to pay out normally. When the main CPU 64 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 issue a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out game balls. A notification command is sent to the audio emission control device 70 so that the notification is performed. The states in which it is not possible to normally pay out game balls include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is filled with game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a state in which the payout device 76 is not filled with game balls. There is an abnormal payout state in which the game machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the payout device 76 (FIG. 2) to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. . The payout side CPU 222 specifies that the tank is in a full state when the game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game balls are continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is canceled. In this case, it is determined that the full tank state has been released. When the payout side CPU 222 identifies that the tank is full, it executes a process to stop the payout of game balls, and also sends a full tank command indicating that the ball is full to the main CPU 64. do. In addition, when the full tank state is canceled, a process to enable the payout of game balls is executed, and a full tank state cancellation command indicating that the full tank state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 64. . The main CPU 64 knows that the tank is full when it receives a full tank command, and that the tank is released when it receives a full tank release command.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the tank 75 (FIG. 2) to the payout device 76 (FIG. 2), and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. be done. The payout side CPU 222 identifies the no-ball state when no game balls are continuously detected by the no-ball detection sensor, and specifies that there is no ball when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls. Specify that the no-ball state has been released. When the payout side CPU 222 specifies that there is no ball state, it executes a process to stop the payout of game balls, and also sends a ball no state command indicating that there is no ball state to the main side CPU 64. do. In addition, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process to enable the payout of game balls is executed, and a no-ball state cancellation command indicating that the no-ball state has been canceled is sent to the main CPU 64. . When the main CPU 64 receives the no-ball state command, it recognizes that the no-ball state is present, and when it receives the no-ball state release command, it recognizes that the no-ball state has been canceled.

The payout device 76 (FIG. 2) is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 222. The payout side CPU 222 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, the payout side CPU 222 identifies that the payout abnormal state is occurring when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , when the state in which the game balls are not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is determined that the abnormal payout state has been canceled. When the payout side CPU 222 specifies that the payout is in an abnormal state, it executes a process of stopping the payout of game balls, and transmits a payout abnormal state command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state to the main side CPU 64. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process to enable the payout of game balls is executed, and a payout abnormal state cancellation command indicating that the abnormal payout state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 64. The main CPU 64 recognizes that the abnormal payout state is present when receiving the abnormal payout state command, and determines that the abnormal payout state has been canceled when receiving the abnormal payout state cancellation command.

As shown in FIG. 20, a front door open sensor 225 is connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 221, and the detection result of the front door open sensor 225 is inputted to the payout side CPU222. The front door open sensor 225 changes the detection signal outputted to the payout side CPU 222 from a LOW state to a HI state when the front door frame 14 (FIG. 2) is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 (FIG. 2). At the same time, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the detection signal outputted to the payout side CPU 222 is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. The dispensing side CPU 222 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225 is in the LOW state, and determines that the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225 is in the closed state. When the front door frame 14 is in the HI state, it is determined that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 222 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 64 at the timing when it specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is sent to the main CPU 64. These front door open command and front door close command are transmitted from the payout side CPU 222 to the main side CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. The main CPU 64 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door close command. .

As shown in FIG. 20, a main body open sensor 226 is connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 221, and the detection result of the main body open sensor 226 is inputted to the payout side CPU222. The main body open sensor 226 changes the detection signal outputted to the payout side CPU 222 from a LOW state to a HI state when the gaming machine main body 12 (FIG. 2) is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (FIG. 1). At the same time, when the game machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the detection signal outputted to the payout side CPU 222 is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. The payout side CPU 222 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the detection signal received from the main body opening sensor 226 is in the LOW state, and when the detection signal received from the main body opening sensor 226 is in the HI state. If this is the case, it is determined that the game machine main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 222 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 64 at the timing when it specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is sent to the main CPU 64 at the appropriate timing. The main side CPU 64 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

As shown in FIG. 20, an external terminal board 79 is connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 221. The information output from the payout side CPU 222 to the external terminal board 79 includes information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out. As already explained, the gaming hall management computer receives various information from the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal board 79. Then, according to the received various information, by calculating the ball payout rate (ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10), etc. , grasp the manner in which game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10, etc.

Next, see FIGS. 21, 22, and 23(a) to 23(c) for electronic devices connected to the input and output sides of the MPU 63 via the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. I will explain while doing so. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing how the MPU 63 and various electronic devices are connected. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of each terminal 111, 112 of the first connector CN1, and FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the settings of each terminal 113 of the second connector CN2. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting contents of each terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting contents of each terminal 115, 116 of the fourth connector CN4. It is an explanatory diagram for explanation.

First, the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 111, 112 of the first connector CN1 will be explained.

As already explained, the first connector CN1 includes 17 one-end terminals 111 and 17 other-end terminals 112. The fixing portion 111b of the one-end terminal 111 extends so as to straddle between the lower standing wall portion 101c and the lower peripheral edge portion 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. At the same time, the fixing part 112b of the other end side terminal 112 straddles between the upper standing wall part 101b and the upper peripheral edge part 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It extends like this. As already explained, the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portion 101c of the first connector CN1 and the lower peripheral edge 156b of the first connector insertion hole 156 is caused by the upper upright wall portion of the first connector CN1. 101b and the upper peripheral edge 156a of the first connector insertion hole 156. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13, conductive objects such as wires can be illegally used from the front facing plate section 141, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the main control board 61. The one-end terminal 111 is protected more preferentially than the other-end terminal 112 against fraudulent acts such as inserting a jig and illicitly manipulating signals.

As shown in FIG. 22, the 17 one-end terminals 111 included in the first connector CN1 are n-th terminals where n is an odd number from 1 to 33, and specifically, the first terminal , the third terminal, the fifth terminal, . . . the 33rd terminal. Further, the 17 other end side terminals 112 provided in the first connector CN1 are the m-th terminals where m is an even number from 2 to 34, and specifically, the second terminal, the fourth terminal, sixth terminal, ... thirty-fourth terminal.

As shown in FIG. 21, an external terminal board 79, a dispensing control device 77, and a power source/discharge control device 78 are electrically connected to the MPU 63 via a first relay board PB1.

An 11th connector CN11, a 21st connector CN21, a 22nd connector CN22, and a 23rd connector CN23 are mounted on the first relay board PB1. The 11th connector CN11 is electrically connected to the first connector CN1, the 21st connector CN21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 79, and the 22nd connector CN22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control device 77. The 23rd connector CN23 is electrically connected to the power supply/launch control device 78.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, signal lines are connected to the first to tenth terminals of the first connector CN1 to enable transmission of external signals from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79. ing. GND (ground) is set to the first terminal and the second terminal of the first connector CN1. A GND plane (not shown) is provided on the main control board 61 and the first relay board PB1, so that the signals on the main control board 61 and the signals on the first relay board PB1 are based on a common potential. It is set. A first terminal and a second terminal of the first connector CN1 are electrically connected to the GND plane of the main control board 61.

A signal line for transmitting external signals from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79 is connected to the third to tenth terminals of the first connector CN1. The external signals sent from the main CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79 via the third to tenth terminals include a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and a signal indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating that one game round has ended, a signal indicating that one game round has ended, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent to the output port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33. and a signal indicating that the game ball has been ejected from the gaming area PA through either of the second operating port 34, a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34. It includes a signal indicating that the ball has entered the ball.

Wiring for electrically connecting the main control board 61 and the payout control device 77 is connected to the 11th to 17th terminals and the 19th terminal of the first connector CN1. A signal line is connected to the 11th to 13th terminals of the first connector CN1 to enable serial communication between the main CPU 64 and the payout CPU 222. This serial communication is asynchronous communication (start-stop synchronous communication) in which data is sent and received at a predetermined communication speed without exchanging clocks between the sending and receiving sides. This is full-duplex communication with a transmission line for Note that a configuration may be adopted in which half-duplex communication is performed between the main side CPU 64 and the payout control device 77, in which data is sent and received while switching between transmission and reception using one transmission path, and the transmission side and the reception side A configuration may be adopted in which synchronous communication in which clocks are exchanged is performed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which parallel communication is performed between the main side CPU 64 and the payout control device 77.

A signal line serving as a transmission path for the main side CPU 64 to receive various payout reception commands from the payout side CPU 222 is connected to the eleventh terminal. GND (ground) is set to the 12th terminal, and the 12th terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61. A signal line serving as a transmission path for transmitting various payout transmission signals from the main side CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222 is connected to the 13th terminal.

The payout reception commands include the above-mentioned payout restriction command, front door open command, front door close command, main body open command, main body close command, full tank state command, full tank state release command, no ball state command, and no ball state release command. command, a payout abnormal state command, and a payout abnormal state cancellation command. The eleventh terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives various payout reception commands is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraud jig in the first connector CN1. By preventing unauthorized acts on the signal line of the payout reception command, the front door close command, main unit close command, full tank state release command, no ball state release command, or payout abnormal state release command is not sent illegally. It is possible to prevent the open state of the front door frame 14, the open state of the game machine main body 12, the full tank state, the no ball state, or the abnormal payout state from being canceled illegally.

The payout transmission command includes the various prize ball commands (1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball command, and 15 prize ball command) that have already been explained. The thirteenth terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives various payout transmission commands is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraud jig in the first connector CN1. By preventing illegal acts on the signal line of the payout transmission command, it is possible to prevent game balls from being illegally paid out due to an act of sending an illegal signal to the signal line. can.

GND (ground) is set to the 14th terminal, and the 14th terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61. A payout reset signal is set to the 15th terminal. The payout reset signal is a signal for causing the payout side CPU 222 to execute processing corresponding to the power cutoff when the main side CPU 64 identifies the occurrence of the power cutoff. The main CPU 64 monitors the power outage signal received from the power outage monitoring circuit 201, and lowers the payout reset signal from the HI state to the LOW state when the occurrence of power interruption is identified. The payout side CPU 222 executes a process for initializing the payout side RAM 224 when detecting a falling edge of the payout reset signal. By initializing the payout side RAM 224, the information stored in the payout side RAM 224 is cleared.

The fifteenth terminal from which the main CPU 64 receives the payout reset signal is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraud jig in the first connector CN1. By preventing fraudulent acts on the signal line of the payout reset signal, it is possible to prevent the payout side RAM 224 from being illegally reset due to an act of sending a fraudulent signal to the signal line. can. As already explained, the payout side CPU 222 transmits information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out to the gaming hall management computer via the external terminal board 79. By preventing the payout side RAM 224 from being reset illegally, it is possible to prevent the management computer from being unable to accurately grasp the number of game balls that have been paid out due to illegally blocking the transmission of the information. It can be prevented. In addition, by preventing the payout side RAM 224 from being reset illegally, information about the full tank state, no ball state, or payout abnormal state stored in the payout side RAM 224 can be prevented from being cleared illegally. It can be prevented.

A signal line is connected to the 16th terminal of the first connector CN1 for the main side CPU 64 to receive a firing status signal from the power supply/launch control device 78, and a signal line for the main side CPU 64 to receive the firing status signal from the power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to the 17th terminal. A signal line for transmitting a launch permission signal to the control device 78 is connected. The main CPU 64 transmits a launch permission signal to the power source/launch control device 78 on the condition that it has received the launch status signal from the power source/launch control device 78 . The firing state signal is a signal indicating that a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, and the firing permission signal is used to cause the power supply/launch control device 78 to execute a process of firing a game ball. This is the signal. By receiving the firing state signal from the power supply/launch control device 78, the main CPU 64 recognizes that a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, and executes firing control processing. In the launch control process, a launch permission signal is transmitted to the launch operating device 28 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined launch cycle, while the launch operation continues.

The seventeenth terminal to which the main CPU 64 transmits the firing permission signal is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraud jig in the first connector CN1. By preventing unauthorized acts on the signal line of the firing permission signal, an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line may occur and the game ball will not be fired within a predetermined firing cycle (specifically, 0. It is possible to prevent firing at a shorter period than the 6 second period).

A signal line for the main side CPU 64 to receive a prize ball permission signal from the payout side CPU 222 is connected to the 19th terminal of the first connector CN1. Is it possible for the prize ball permission signal to send a prize ball command (one of the 1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball command, and 15 prize ball command) from the main side CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222? This is a signal indicating whether or not. When the prize ball permission signal is in the HI state, it is possible to transmit the prize ball command, and when the prize ball permission signal is in the LOW state, the prize ball command cannot be transmitted. The prize ball permission signal is set to the HI state when the value of the unpaid counter provided in the payout side RAM 224 is "0", and is set to the LOW state when the value of the unpaid counter is 1 or more. be done. The unpaid counter is a counter for the payout side CPU 222 to grasp the number of game balls that have not been paid out.

The 19th terminal from which the main CPU 64 receives the winning ball permission signal is the one end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive tampering jig in the first connector CN1. Since fraudulent acts on the signal line of the prize ball permission signal are prevented, the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224 due to the fraudulent act of sending a fraudulent signal to the signal line. It is possible to prevent a situation from being created in which a prize ball command is fraudulently transmitted from the main side CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222 even though the value is not "0".

A signal line for electrically connecting the power supply/launch control device 78 and the main control device 60 is connected to the 18th terminal and the 20th to 34th terminals of the first connector CN1. Wiring for supplying an element drive voltage of DC5V is connected to the 18th terminal and the 20th terminal.

A signal line for the main side CPU 64 to receive a RAM erase signal from the power supply/launch control device 78 is connected to the 21st terminal. The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a RAM erase switch that is operated to initialize data stored in the main side RAM 66 when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall starts operating. The RAM erase signal is a signal sent from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the main CPU 64 when the RAM erase switch is pressed.

The 21st terminal from which the main CPU 64 receives the RAM erase signal is the one-end terminal 111 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive tampering jig in the first connector CN1. Since illegal acts on the signal line of the RAM erase signal are prevented, an act of sending an illegal signal to the signal line is performed and the data stored in the main side RAM 66 is illegally erased. This can be prevented.

GND (ground) is set to the 22nd terminal, the 24th terminal, the 26th terminal, the 28th terminal, the 30th terminal, the 33rd terminal, and the 34th terminal. These terminals are electrically connected to a GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

A signal line for supplying a backup power supply voltage (VBB) is connected to the 23rd terminal. Wiring for supplying a DC 12V power supply voltage is connected to the 25th terminal and the 27th terminal, a signal line for supplying a DC 24V power supply voltage is connected to the 29th terminal, and the 31st terminal is connected to a signal line for supplying a DC 24V power supply voltage. Electric wiring for supplying a DC 36V power supply voltage is connected to the 32nd terminal.

Next, the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 113 of the second connector CN2 will be explained.

As already explained, the second connector CN2 includes two terminals 113. The fixing portions 113b of these two terminals 113 extend along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower standing wall portion 102c and the lower peripheral edge portion 157b of the second connector insertion hole 157. Extending. As already explained, the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall part 102c of the second connector CN2 and the lower peripheral edge part 157b of the second connector insertion hole 157 is caused by the upper upright wall part of the second connector CN2. 102b and the upper peripheral edge 157a of the second connector insertion hole 157. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13, conductive objects such as wires can be illegally used from the front facing plate section 141, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 than the main control board 61. The terminal 113 is preferentially protected against fraudulent activities such as inserting a jig and illicitly manipulating signals.

As shown in FIG. 21, the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is electrically connected to the second connector CN2 of the main control board 61 via the second relay board PB2. A twelfth connector CN12 and a twenty-fourth connector CN24 are mounted on the second relay board PB2. The twelfth connector CN12 is electrically connected to the second connector CN2, and the twenty-fourth connector CN24 is electrically connected to the first operating port detection sensor 46a.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(a), the main CPU 64 and the first operating port detection sensor 46a are electrically connected to the first and second terminals, which are the terminals 113 of the second connector CN2. The wiring for this is connected.

GND (ground) is set to the first terminal of the second connector CN2. The second relay board PB2 is provided with a GND plane (not shown) similarly to the first relay board PB1 described above, so that the signals on the main control board 61 and the signals on the second relay board PB2 are at a common potential. is set as the standard. A first terminal of the second connector CN2 is electrically connected to a GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

Wiring for the main side CPU 64 to receive the detection signal of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is connected to the second terminal of the second connector CN2. The first operating port detection sensor 46a is a three-wire proximity sensor, and has a VCC terminal for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and a VCC terminal for outputting a detection signal. It has an OUT terminal and a GND terminal for reference potential. An operating voltage (specifically, DC 12V) is supplied to the VDD terminal from a fourth connector CN4, the details of which will be described later, via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminal is connected to the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 via the 24th connector CN24. As already explained, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are maintained at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is connected to the second terminal of the second connector CN2 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is a collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in a LOW state when a game ball is not detected, and is in a LOW state when a game ball is detected. becomes HI state.

As already explained, all the terminals 113 (first terminal and second terminal) of the second connector CN2 are preferentially protected from tampering using a conductive tampering jig. Since the signal line of the detection signal of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts, an act of transmitting a fraudulent signal to the signal line may be performed and the game ball will not be activated. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is won in the mouth 33 from being fraudulently created.

Next, the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 will be explained.

As already explained, the third connector CN3 includes two terminals 114. The fixing portions 114b of these two terminals 114 extend along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower standing wall portion 103c and the lower peripheral edge portion 158b of the third connector insertion hole 158. Extending. As already explained, the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portion 103c of the third connector CN3 and the lower peripheral edge portion 158b of the third connector insertion hole 158 is caused by the upper upright wall portion of the third connector CN3. 103b and the upper peripheral edge 158a of the third connector insertion hole 158. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13, conductive objects such as wires can be illegally used from the front facing plate section 141, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 than the main control board 61. The terminal 114 is preferentially protected against fraudulent activities such as inserting a jig and illicitly manipulating the signal.

As shown in FIG. 21, the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is electrically connected to the third connector CN3 of the main control board 61 via the second relay board PB2. A thirteenth connector CN13 and a twenty-fifth connector CN25 are mounted on the second relay board PB2. The thirteenth connector CN13 is electrically connected to the third connector CN3, and the twenty-fifth connector CN25 is electrically connected to the second operating port detection sensor 47a.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(b), the main CPU 64 and the second operating port detection sensor 47a are electrically connected to the first and second terminals, which are the terminals 114 of the third connector CN3. The wiring for this is connected.

GND (ground) is set to the first terminal of the third connector CN3. The second relay board PB2 is provided with a GND plane (not shown) similarly to the first relay board PB1 described above, so that the signals on the main control board 61 and the signals on the second relay board PB2 are at a common potential. is set as the standard. A first terminal of the third connector CN3 is electrically connected to a GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

A signal line for the main side CPU 64 to receive a detection signal from the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is connected to the second terminal of the third connector CN3. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is a three-wire proximity sensor, and has a VCC terminal for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) of the second operating port detection sensor 47a, and a VCC terminal for outputting a detection signal. It has an OUT terminal and a GND terminal for reference potential. An operating voltage (specifically, DC 12V) is supplied to the VDD terminal from a fourth connector CN4, the details of which will be described later, via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 via the 25th connector CN25. As already explained, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are maintained at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is electrically connected to the second terminal of the third connector CN3 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is a collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in a LOW state when a game ball is not detected, and is in a LOW state when a game ball is detected. becomes HI state.

As already explained, all the terminals 114 (first terminal and second terminal) of the third connector CN3 are preferentially protected from tampering using a conductive tampering jig. Since the signal line of the detection signal of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is preferentially protected from fraudulent acts, an act of transmitting a fraudulent signal to the signal line may be performed and the game ball will not be activated. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is won in the mouth 34 from being fraudulently created.

Next, the electrical wiring connected to each terminal 115, 116 of the fourth connector CN4 will be explained.

As already explained, the fourth connector CN4 includes ten terminals 115 on one end and ten terminals 116 on the other end. The fixing portion 115b of the one-end terminal 115 extends so as to straddle between the lower standing wall portion 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. At the same time, the fixing portion 116b of the other end side terminal 116 straddles between the upper standing wall portion 104b and the upper peripheral edge portion 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It extends like this. As already explained, the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portion 104c of the fourth connector CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portion 159b of the fourth connector insertion hole 159 is caused by the upper upright wall portion of the fourth connector CN4. 104b and the upper peripheral edge 159a of the fourth connector insertion hole 159. Therefore, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13, conductive objects such as wires can be illegally used from the front facing plate section 141, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the main control board 61. The one end terminal 115 is protected more preferentially than the other end terminal 116 against fraudulent acts such as inserting a jig and illicitly manipulating the signal.

As shown in FIG. 23(c), the ten one-end terminals 115 included in the fourth connector CN4 are p-th terminals where p is an odd number from 1 to 19, and specifically, These are the first terminal, the third terminal, the fifth terminal, ... the nineteenth terminal. Furthermore, the ten other end side terminals 116 included in the fourth connector CN4 are q-th terminals where q is an even number from 2 to 20, and specifically, the second terminal, the fourth Terminal, sixth terminal, ... 20th terminal.

As shown in FIG. 21, the fourth connector CN4 of the main control board 61 is connected via the second relay board PB2 to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, special electric detection sensor 45a, out Mouth detection sensor 48a, gate detection sensor 49a, radio wave detection sensor 202 for detecting unauthorized radio waves, magnetic detection sensor 203 for detecting unauthorized magnetism, and special telephone open detection sensor for detecting the open state of special telephone winning device 32. 32b, a general electric power open detection sensor 34b that detects the open state of the general electric utility object 34a, a special electric drive unit 32c that switches the special electric prize winning device 32 to an open state or a closed state according to the received drive signal, and a received drive signal. A drive unit 34c for general electric power is electrically connected to the general electric power drive unit 34c, which switches the general electric power accessory 34a to an open state or a closed state according to the situation. A fourteenth connector CN14 and twenty-sixth to thirty-seventh connectors CN26 to CN37 are mounted on the second relay board PB2. The fourteenth connector CN14 is electrically connected to the fourth connector CN4. The 26th connector CN26 is electrically connected to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the 27th connector CN27 is electrically connected to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the 28th connector CN28 is connected to the third winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is electrically connected to the mouth detection sensor 44a, the 29th connector CN29 is electrically connected to the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the 30th connector CN30 is electrically connected to the outlet detection sensor 48a, The 31st connector CN31 is electrically connected to the gate detection sensor 49a, the 32nd connector CN32 is electrically connected to the radio wave detection sensor 202, and the 33rd connector CN33 is electrically connected to the magnetic detection sensor 203. The 34th connector CN34 is electrically connected to the special power open detection sensor 32b, the 35th connector CN35 is electrically connected to the normal power open detection sensor 34b, and the 36th connector CN36 is the special power open detection sensor 32b. It is electrically connected to the drive section 32c, and the 37th connector CN37 is electrically connected to the normal power drive section 34c.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(c), wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is connected to the first terminal of the fourth connector CN4. , Wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is connected to the third terminal, and the wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the out opening detection sensor 48a is connected to the fourth terminal. Wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is connected to the fifth terminal, Wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the special electric detection sensor 45a is connected to the terminal, and a wire for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the gate detection sensor 49a is connected to the ninth terminal. wiring is connected.

These detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, and 49a are three-wire proximity sensors, and include a VCC terminal for supplying the operating voltage (specifically, DC12V) of the detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, and 49a; It has an OUT terminal for outputting a detection signal and a GND terminal for a reference potential. An operating voltage (specifically, DC 12V) is supplied to the VDD terminal from an eighth terminal of the fourth connector CN4, which will be described later, via the second relay board PB2. The GND terminal is electrically connected to the GND plane (not shown) of the second relay board PB2 via the 26th to 31st connectors CN26 to CN31. As already explained, the GND plane of the second relay board PB2 and the GND plane of the main control board 61 are maintained at a common reference potential. The OUT terminal is connected to the fourth connector CN4 via the second relay board PB2. The output format of these detection sensors 42a to 45a, 48a, and 49a is a collector output format, and the detection signal output from the OUT terminal is in a LOW state when a game ball is not detected, and when a game ball is detected. It becomes HI state in the state where it is set.

The first terminal, third terminal, and fifth terminal from which the main side CPU 64 receives the detection signals from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a are electrically conductive fraud jigs at the fourth connector CN4. This is the one end terminal 115 that is preferentially protected from unauthorized use. As already explained, when a ball enters any of the general winning holes 31, ten prize balls are paid out. Since the signal lines of the detection signals of these first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a are preferentially protected from fraudulent activities, the situation where a game ball is won into the general winning hole 31 can be prevented from being fraudulent. It is possible to prevent game balls from being created and being illegally paid out.

The seventh terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a is the one-end terminal 115 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraud jig in the fourth connector CN4. As already explained, when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Since the signal line of the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a is preferentially protected from fraudulent activities, a situation where game balls are won into the special electric winning device 32 is fraudulently created, and the payout of game balls is fraudulent. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

The ninth terminal from which the main CPU 64 receives the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a is the one-end terminal 115 that is preferentially protected from fraud using a conductive fraud jig in the fourth connector CN4. As already explained, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning the through gate 35, and if the result of the internal lottery is an electric winning prize, the ordinary electric utility object 34a becomes open in a predetermined manner. Transition to open state. Since the signal line of the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a is preferentially protected from fraudulent activities, a situation in which a game ball enters the through gate 35 is fraudulently created, and the internal lottery is fraudulently executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(c), wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the radio wave detection sensor 202 is connected to the 11th terminal of the fourth connector CN4. Wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the magnetic detection sensor 203 is connected to the 13 terminal. The detection signal output from the radio wave detection sensor 202 to the main controller 60 is in a LOW state when no unauthorized radio waves are detected, and is in a HI state when an unauthorized radio wave is detected. Further, the detection signal output from the magnetic detection sensor 203 to the main controller 60 is in the LOW state when no illegal magnetism is detected, and becomes the HI state when the illegal magnetism is detected.

An 11th terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives a detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor 202 and a 13th terminal through which the main CPU 64 receives a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 203 are connected to a conductive tampering jig at the fourth connector CN4. This is the one end terminal 115 that is preferentially protected from unauthorized use. By preferentially protecting the signal line of the detection signal of the radio wave detection sensor 202 from unauthorized use of conductive tampering tools, it is possible to prevent unauthorized creation of a situation in which unauthorized radio waves cannot be detected. be able to. In addition, since the signal line of the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 203 is preferentially protected from unauthorized use of conductive tampering tools, it is possible to prevent unauthorized creation of a situation in which unauthorized magnetism cannot be detected. It can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(c), wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the special voltage open detection sensor 32b is connected to the 15th terminal of the fourth connector CN4. , Wiring for electrically connecting the main controller 60 and the normal power open detection sensor 34b is connected to the 17th terminal.

The detection signal of the special electricity open detection sensor 32b rises from the LOW state to the HI state when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the open state, and the detection signal of the normal electricity open detection sensor 34b is generated when the general electricity accessory 34a is in the open state. rises from LOW state to HI state when The main CPU 64 monitors the states of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the general electric accessory 34a based on the states of the detection signals of these open detection sensors 32b and 34b.

The 15th terminal through which the main side CPU 64 receives the detection signal from the special power open detection sensor 32b and the 17th terminal through which the main side CPU 64 receives the detection signal from the normal power open detection sensor 34b are connected to the conductive unauthorized use in the fourth connector CN4. This is the one end terminal 115 that is preferentially protected from unauthorized use of a jig. By preferentially protecting the signal line of the detection signal of the special electric release detection sensor 32b from fraud, it is possible to prevent a situation from being created in which the main side CPU 64 cannot grasp the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32. can. In addition, since the signal line of the detection signal of the utility power open detection sensor 34b is preferentially protected from unauthorized use, a situation may be created in which the main CPU 64 cannot grasp the open state of the utility power accessory 34a. It can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(c), a signal line for transmitting a special electric drive signal from the main controller 60 to the special electric drive unit 32c is connected to the 12th terminal of the fourth connector CN4. A signal line for transmitting a general power drive signal from the main controller 60 to the general power drive unit 34c is connected to the fourteenth terminal.

The main side CPU 64 specifies whether the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state or not based on the detection signal of the special electric open detection sensor 32b. If it is specified that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state in a state where it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, a special electric power abnormality notification is performed, and a process for advancing the game (steps in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) to be described later) is performed. The processes in steps S208 to S219) are no longer executed. Therefore, if fraud is committed using a conductive tampering jig against the signal line of the special electric drive signal, the fraud can be detected by the special electric abnormality notification. As described above, the signal line for the special electric drive signal is arranged not at the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 but at the other end terminal 116. As a result, if a fraudulent act of illegally opening the special electric winning device 32 is performed, the administrator of the game hall can discover and respond to the fraudulent act, while allowing unauthorized use of the fourth connector CN4. The one end terminal 115, which is preferentially protected from fraud using a jig, can be used as a terminal for transmitting or receiving other information.

The main side CPU 64 specifies whether or not the general electric utility object 34a is in an open state based on the detection signal of the general electric power open detection sensor 34b. Open state of general electric utility object 34a If it is specified that general electric utility object 34a is in an open state in a state where no winning has occurred, general electric power abnormality notification is performed, and processing for advancing the game is performed. (Processing from step S208 to step S219 in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) to be described later) is no longer executed. Therefore, if fraud is committed using a conductive tampering jig against the signal line of the normal power drive signal, the fraud can be detected by the normal power abnormality notification. As described above, the signal line for the general power drive signal is arranged not at the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 but at the other end terminal 116. As a result, if a fraudulent act of illegally opening the special electric winning device 32 is performed, the administrator of the game hall can discover and respond to the fraudulent act, while allowing unauthorized use of the fourth connector CN4. The one end terminal 115, which is preferentially protected from fraud using a jig, can be used as a terminal for transmitting or receiving other information.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(c), wiring for supplying a DC 12V power supply voltage is connected to the 16th terminal of the fourth connector CN4, and a DC 36V power supply voltage is connected to the 18th terminal. Wiring for supply is set.

GND (ground) is set to the second, sixth, eighth, tenth, nineteenth, and twentieth terminals of the fourth connector CN4. These terminals are electrically connected to a GND plane (not shown) of the main control board 61.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU 64>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 64 will be described using FIG. 24.

The main CPU 64 uses various types of counter information during the game to determine the winning lottery, setting the display on the first special symbol display section 37a, setting the display on the second special symbol display section 37b, and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41. , the display settings of the common figure display section 38a, etc. are performed, and specifically, as shown in FIG. a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure. The display units 37a, 37b and a variation type counter CS that determines the display duration time on the symbol display device 41 are used. Furthermore, a general electricity random number counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electricity accessory 34a of the second actuating port 34 should be placed in the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 211 of the main RAM 66.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area 212 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. The special figure holding area 212 includes a first special figure holding area 215, a second special figure holding area 216, and a special figure execution area 217.

The first special figure holding area 215 includes a first area 215a, a second area 215b, a third area 215c, and a fourth area 215d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 215a to 215d as pending information on the special drawing side.

In this case, in the first area 215a to the fourth area 215d, if winnings to the first operating port 33 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 215a → second area 215b → third area 215c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 215d. By providing the four areas 215a to 215d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four.

In addition, the number that can be held and stored in the first special figure holding area 215 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure holding area 216 includes a first area 216a, a second area 216b, a third area 216c, and a fourth area 216d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 216a to 216d as pending information on the special drawing side.

In this case, in the first area 216a to the fourth area 216d, if winnings to the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 216a → second area 216b → third area 216c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 216d. By providing the four areas 216a to 216d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four.

The number that can be held and stored in the second special figure holding area 216 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The special figure execution area 217 stores pending information on objects for which special figure validity judgment, distribution judgment, etc. are to be performed when starting variable display on either of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b. area. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display section 37a, the pending information stored in the first area 215a of the first special figure holding area 215 is moved to the special figure execution area 217. be done. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display section 37b, the reservation information stored in the first area 216a of the second special figure reservation area 216 is moved to the special figure execution area 217.

The information corresponding to the general random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 213 when a winning in the through gate 35 occurs. The general drawing reservation area 213 includes a first area 218a, a second area 218b, a third area 218c, and a fourth area 218d, and the numerical information of the general drawing random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the winning history in the through gate 35. is stored in one of the areas 218a to 218d as pending information on the general figure side.

In this case, in the first area 218a to the fourth area 218d, if winnings to the through gate 35 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 218a → second area 218b → third area 218c → fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of 218d. By providing the four areas 218a to 218d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the through gate 35 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four.

In addition, the number that can be held and stored in the general drawing holding area 213 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other plurality such as two, three, or five or more; It may be.

The ordinary figure holding area 213 is provided with an execution area 219 for ordinary figures. The ordinary figure execution area 219 is an area in which pending information about objects to be determined for support when starting variable display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the general figure display section 38a, the reservation information stored in the first area 218a of the ordinary figure holding area 213 is moved to the ordinary figure execution area 219.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the standard random number counter C4 will be explained. The general random number counter C4 is configured such that, for example, the increment is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general random number counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the general drawing holding area 213 of the main side RAM 66 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support provided by the common electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner to the game area PA, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is increased per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity random number counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 for both), but In the frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric utility accessory 34a is in the open state when the general electric power open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is also set to be longer. There is. In this case, when the general power open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., The duration of one display on the display section 38a is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the power grid per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the power grid release lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the general power open state. In addition, the secured time period that is secured between the time when one general electricity lottery is held and the next general electricity distribution lottery is held (for example, the period of time that is secured on the general electricity map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35) is In configurations where multiple types of variable display times are available, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. Good too. In addition, the number of times the power grid is released, the length of time it is open, the amount of time secured between one general power grid release lottery and the next power grid release lottery is shortened, and such secured time. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying one or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning.

If the general electricity release state is won in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity random number counter C4, the general electricity release state will be established. The general electricity release state ends when the general electricity accessory 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the second actuating port 34. do. Specifically, the upper limit number is 10 in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of opening and closing times of the utility appliance 34a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, it is opened and closed multiple times, which is more than in the low-frequency support mode. It has been three times. Further, the duration of opening of the utility appliance 34a once is 1 second in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 seconds in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special pattern holding area 215 of the special pattern holding area 212, and the game ball enters the second operating port 34. The winning timing is stored in the second special figure holding area 216 of the special figure holding area 212. Then, a judgment is made using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that becomes the winning result in the determination of success or failure is stored in the main side ROM 65 as a success or failure table. In the win/fail table, a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set as the win/fail results. The jackpot result is a win/fail result that can trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, and can trigger a transition to at least one of the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. The small win result is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, but does not trigger a transition to both the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. A losing result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As the success/failure tables, there are a success/failure table for low probability mode and a success/failure table for high probability mode. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the same win/fail table is referred to for the reservation information acquired based on winnings to the first operating port 33 and the pending information acquired based on winnings to the second operating port 34. In addition, in any case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes in the lottery.

To explain each win/fail table in detail, in the low probability mode win/fail table, there are two random number values that will result in a jackpot (for example, "5" and "305"), and a random number value that will result in a small win. are three (for example, "55", "355", "555"). The other values are random number values that result in an outlier.

In the high probability mode winning/failure table, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set to be larger than in the winning/failure table for the low probability mode for the first special symbol, specifically 20. (For example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in a low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in a high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number that results in a small win is the same as in the case of the win/fail table for the low probability mode.

In addition, if the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in the winning mentioned above can be arbitrary, and in the situation where the low probability mode is used, it is not possible to get a jackpot result. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may be partially included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot in a high probability mode, or may not be included. .

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special pattern holding area 215 of the special pattern holding area 212, and the game ball enters the second operating port 34. The winning timing is stored in the second special figure holding area 216 of the special figure holding area 212. Then, a distribution determination is made using the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2.

Here, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set in this pachinko machine 10, and each of these jackpot results includes (1) the contents of the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode, ( 3) At least one of the three contents, ie, the contents of the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, is different.

The opening/closing execution mode that is executed when a jackpot is won is the round number regulation mode, as already explained. The round number regulation mode includes a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode so that the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. is set. Specifically, in this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of opening modes of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. There is. Specifically, there is a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds, and a short-time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.05 seconds, which is shorter than the long time. It is set. In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. controlled. Furthermore, the upper limit number of end conditions for the round game is set to 10. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the open duration is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. ing. Therefore, when the Tokuden prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the Tokuden prize winning device 32 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and in a short period of time. If the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in this manner, it is expected that no prizes will be won to the special electric winning device 32.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of pieces in one round game are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. is not limited to the above values and may be set arbitrarily if the frequency of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that of the low-frequency winning mode. It is.

As already explained, the opening/closing execution mode executed when a small hit is won is the opening/closing number regulation mode. In the opening/closing number regulation mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened five times in a short time mode. In this case, the upper limit number of opening/closing number regulation mode is set to 10, and the total opening duration of the opening/closing number regulation mode is a combination of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of opening/closing number regulation mode. The time is set to be shorter than the product. Therefore, in the opening/closing number regulation mode, the round game is not executed and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is the upper limit based on the total number of winnings in the opening/closing number regulation mode. The probability that opening/closing will be executed increases.

The distribution destinations of the types of jackpot results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main side ROM 65 as a distribution table. The contents of the distribution table will be explained using FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b).

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and (b), the distribution table includes 8R low-probability jackpot results, 12R low-probability jackpot results, 4R high-probability jackpot results, and 5R high-probability jackpot results as types of jackpot results. A jackpot result, an 8R high-probability jackpot result, a 12R high-probability jackpot result A, a 12R high-probability jackpot result B, and a 16R high-probability jackpot result are set.

In the 8R low-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which eight round games occur. In this opening/closing execution mode, 520 game balls can be expected to be paid out. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the low probability mode is set regardless of which winning/failure lottery mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered, regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode will transition to low-frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end standard number of times (specifically 15 times) set as 1 or more after the transition, and will change to high-frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode that is shifted to after the end of , continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the shift to the opening/closing execution mode occurs.

In the 12R low-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which 12 round games occur. In this opening/closing execution mode, 780 game balls can be expected to be paid out. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the low probability mode is set regardless of which winning/failure lottery mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the low-frequency support mode is entered, regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This low-frequency support mode continues at least until the next jackpot result and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

In the 4R high-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which four round games occur. In this opening/closing execution mode, you can expect to pay out 260 game balls. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until the next jackpot result and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

In the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a low-frequency winning mode in which five round games occur. In this opening/closing execution mode, it is not expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win a prize, so the number of game balls to be paid out will be substantially zero. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode if the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, while it becomes the low-frequency support mode if the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. These support modes continue at least until the next jackpot result and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

In the 8R high sure jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which eight round games occur. In this opening/closing execution mode, you can expect to pay out 520 game balls. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered, regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until the next jackpot result and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 12R high-probability jackpot result A, the opening/closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode in which 12 round games occur. In this open/close execution mode, you can expect to pay out 780 game balls. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is entered, regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until the next jackpot result and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 12R high-probability jackpot result B, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which 12 round games occur. In this open/close execution mode, you can expect to pay out 780 game balls. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode if the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, while it becomes the low-frequency support mode if the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. These support modes continue at least until the next jackpot result and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

In the 16R high-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which 16 round games occur. In this opening/closing execution mode, you can expect to pay out 1040 game balls. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until the next jackpot result and the transition to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b), the distribution table includes a distribution table for the first special symbol used when determining the distribution of the reservation information obtained based on winnings in the first operating port 33. A minute table and a distribution table for the second special drawing used when determining the distribution of reservation information acquired based on winnings to the second actuating port 34 are set.

To explain each distribution table in detail, as shown in FIG. 25(a), the distribution table for the first special symbol has 12R low-probability jackpot results, 12R low-probability jackpot results, and A 5R high-probability jackpot result, a 12R high-probability jackpot result A, a 12R high-probability jackpot result B, and a 16R high-probability jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the first special drawing, "0-19" corresponds to the 12R low-probability jackpot result, "20-39" corresponds to the 5R high-probability jackpot result, and "40-68" corresponds to the 5R high-probability jackpot result. ” corresponds to the 12R high-probability jackpot result A, “69-88” corresponds to the 12R high-probability jackpot result B, and “89-99” corresponds to the 16R high-probability jackpot result. In the case of the distribution table for the first special symbol, if a jackpot is won, the probability of a 12R low-probability jackpot result is 20%, the probability of a 5R high-probability jackpot result is 20%, and the 12R The probability of a high-probability jackpot result A is 29%, the probability of a 12R high-probability jackpot result B is 20%, and the probability of a 16R high-probability jackpot result is 11%.

Here, in the case of a small winning result, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by this, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed five times in a short time mode. On the other hand, in the 5R high sure jackpot result, the game shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with an upper limit of 5 times, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a short time mode. In other words, in the case of either a 5R high certainty jackpot result or a small win result, the operation mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game rounds with these game results, different stop results are displayed in the first special figure display section 37a, but the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display section 37a. The stop result is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops displaying a common symbol combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") on any active line. In addition, in the case of a 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by that, the opening/closing execution mode will be activated if a small hit is achieved based on the winning in the first operating port 33. The effect is executed in a manner that is indistinguishable from the above, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the effect clearly indicating that it is the high probability mode on the symbol display device 41 etc. is not executed, and the operation is performed to the first operating port 33. The performance is executed in the same manner as after the opening/closing execution mode when a small win result is obtained based on the prize winning. With the above configuration, if the opening/closing execution mode which becomes the low frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode which becomes the opening/closing number regulation mode occurs in a situation where the player is in the low probability mode or the low frequency support mode, for example, the player can , the player plays the game while expecting the transition to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, which increases the interest of the game.

In addition, if the winning result in the first operating port 33 results in a 12R low-probability jackpot result or a 12R high-probability jackpot result B, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with the upper limit of 12 times, and each round In the game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a long-time mode. In other words, in the case of either the 12R low-probability jackpot result or the 12R high-probability jackpot result B, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game rounds with these game results, different stop results are displayed in the first special figure display section 37a, but the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display section 37a. The stop result is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops displaying the same combination of even symbols on any active line. In addition, in the case of a 12R high-probability jackpot result B in the low-frequency support mode, during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by this, the mode is indistinguishable from the opening/closing execution mode when the 12R low-probability jackpot result occurs. After the opening/closing execution mode when the production is executed and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the production clearly indicating that it is the high probability mode on the symbol display device 41 etc. is not executed and the result is a 12R low probability jackpot. The performance is executed in the same manner. With the above configuration, if an opening/closing execution mode in which 12 round games are executed occurs in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, for example, the player can The player plays the game while expecting the transition to the high probability mode, which increases the interest of the game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the distribution table for the second special symbol includes 8R low-probability jackpot results, 4R high-probability jackpot results, and 8R high-probability jackpot results as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. A guaranteed jackpot result and a 16R high sure jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the second special symbol, "0-19" corresponds to the 8R low-probability jackpot result, "20-31" corresponds to the 4R high-probability jackpot result, and "32-55" corresponds to the 4R high-probability jackpot result. ” corresponds to the 8R high certainty jackpot result, and “56 to 99” corresponds to the 16R high certainty jackpot result. In the case of the distribution table for the second special symbol, when a jackpot is won, the probability of an 8R low-probability jackpot result is 20%, the probability of a 4R high-probability jackpot result is 12%, and the 8R The probability of a high-probability jackpot result is 24%, and the probability of a 16R high-probability jackpot result is 44%.

Here, if an 8R low-probability jackpot result or an 8R high-probability jackpot result is obtained based on the winning into the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with the upper limit of 8 times, and each round In the game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a long-time mode. In other words, in the case of either an 8R low-probability jackpot result or an 8R high-probability jackpot result, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode will be visually the same. In addition, in the game rounds with these game results, different stop results are displayed in the first special figure display section 37a, but the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display section 37a. The stop result is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops displaying the same combination of even symbols on any active line. In addition, in both the case of 8R low-probability jackpot result and the case of 8R high-probability jackpot result, it is impossible to distinguish which jackpot result it is during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by this. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the performance is performed in the same manner without performing the performance clearly indicating that it is the high probability mode on the symbol display device 41 or the like. Immediately after the opening/closing execution mode, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode in any case. With the above configuration, if an opening/closing execution mode in which 8 round games are executed occurs in a high probability mode or a high frequency support mode, for example, the player can The player plays the game with the expectation that the transition to the low probability mode will not occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Further, in the distribution table for the first special symbol and the distribution table for the second special symbol, the probability of entering the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the same in the case of a jackpot win. On the other hand, the probability of being in the high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special symbol than in the distribution table for the first special symbol. More specifically, while the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low-frequency winning mode, the distribution table for the second special figure cannot be in the low-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, in the distribution table for the first special drawing, the probability of a 16R high-probability jackpot result, which is the most advantageous jackpot result, is 11%, and compared to other jackpot results, the probability of distribution is the lowest. On the other hand, in the allocation table for the second special symbol, the probability of a 16R high-probability jackpot result, which is the most advantageous jackpot result, is 44%, and the allocation probability is the highest compared to other jackpot results. Therefore, as for the types of jackpot results that can be selected in the case of a jackpot win, a winning at the second operating port 34 occurs rather than a case where a winning occurs at the first operating port 33 and an internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player if an internal lottery is conducted.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. Expected production is a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that can display fluctuating symbols, and in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result. This refers to a display state that is made to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result after the start of fluctuating display of symbols and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, regarding the award correspondence result, combinations of symbols with the same number attached on any active line are stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making users expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a grant response result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the ready-to-reach display, the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed. This includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol row. In addition, while the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included.

The preview display may be performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of symbols has started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It also includes a case in which the background screen is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and a case in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a notice display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result or a small win result in which the same combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the winning result, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main side ROM 65 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Executed if

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main CPU 64 but by the audio emission control device 70. In this case, the sound emission control device 70 recognizes that a preview display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result or a small win result than a game round corresponding to a losing result, and that the occurrence rate is lower. A lottery process for displaying a preview is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition that a low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the symbol display device 41 performs a game repeat effect.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 64 to determine the display duration time on the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol display section 37b and the symbol display duration time on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is determined when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. be obtained.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 64>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 64 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main CPU 64 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 milliseconds).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until, for example, one second has elapsed since the main process was started. In the following step S102, access to the main RAM 66 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function registers of the main CPU 64 are set.

Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch is manually operated. As already explained, the RAM erase switch is provided in the power supply/launch control device 78, and when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. In the following step S105, it is determined whether the power failure flag in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1". In addition, in step S106, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum, and in the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

If the RAM erase switch is pressed (step S104: YES), the process moves to step S108. Furthermore, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not set (step S105: NO) or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum (step S107: NO), the process in step S108 is also performed. Transition. In step S108, the main RAM 66 is initialized by clearing the main RAM 66. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed (step S104: NO), the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S105: YES), and the checksum is normal (step S107). :YES), the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the process of step S108. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 66, such as initialization of a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is sent to the voice emission control device 70 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the main CPU 64 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S112, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 66, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. After executing the process in step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S201, a power outage information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring circuit 201, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, a power outage process is executed. In the power outage processing, the payout reset signal outputted from the main side CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222 is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state. As already explained, the payout side CPU 222 executes processing for initializing the payout side RAM 224 when detecting the fall of the payout reset signal.

In the following step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4, and performing a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Execute processing to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S112.

In the subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether or not the detection of unauthorized radio waves and the detection of unauthorized magnetism, which are set as monitoring targets for unauthorized use, are occurring. As already explained with reference to FIG. 21, the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the magnetic detection sensor 203 are connected to the input side of the MPU 63 via the second relay board PB2 and the fourth connector CN4. In the fraud detection process in step S205, the main CPU 64 monitors whether or not fraud has occurred in the monitored target based on the state of the detection signal received from the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the detection signal received from the magnetic detection sensor 203. do. As already explained, when the main CPU 64 detects the rising of the detection signal received from the radio wave detection sensor 202 from the LOW state to the HI state, the main CPU 64 identifies that an unauthorized radio wave has been detected, and also detects the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 203. When detecting a rise of the detection signal received from the LOW state to the HI state, it is determined that illegal magnetism has been detected. In the fraud detection process in step S205, a fraud detection notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70 when it is specified that any fraud has occurred. When the audio emission control device 70 receives the fraud detection notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker section 54 and controls the display control device 90 so that the fraud detection notification is performed. As a result, the speaker section 54 and the symbol display device 41 issue a notification indicating that fraud has occurred in the monitored object. Thereafter, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1". As a result, the processing for advancing the game (processing from step S208 to step S219) is no longer executed.

Thereafter, a special electric and general electric power monitoring process is executed (step S206). In the special electric/general electric power monitoring process, if it is not the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether the special electric power winning device 32 is in an open state based on the state of the detection signal received from the special electric power open detection sensor 32b. Then, when it is specified that the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, a special electric abnormality notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the sound emission control device 70 receives the special electric power abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker section 54 so that the special electric power abnormality notification is performed, and also controls the display control device 90. As a result, the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 issue a notification indicating that fraud has occurred against the special electric winning device 32. Thereafter, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1". As a result, the processing for advancing the game (processing from step S208 to step S219) is no longer executed. In addition, in the special electric and general electric power monitoring process (step S206), if the general electric utility object 34a has not won the open state, the general electric power object 34a is determined based on the state of the detection signal received from the general electric power open detection sensor 34b. Determine whether or not it is in an open state. Then, when it is specified that the general electric utility object 34a is in an open state, a general electric power abnormality notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the sound emission control device 70 receives the general power abnormality notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker section 54 so that the general power abnormality notification is performed, and also controls the display control device 90. As a result, the speaker section 54 and the symbol display device 41 issue a notification indicating that fraud has occurred with respect to the general utility object 34a. Thereafter, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1". As a result, the processing for advancing the game (processing from step S208 to step S219) is no longer executed.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the progress of the game is stopped. If an affirmative determination is made in step S207, this timer interrupt processing is ended without executing the processing for advancing the game (processing in steps S208 to S219). In this way, when the game stop flag in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", the process for advancing the game is no longer executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S207, the processes from step S208 onwards are executed. In step S208, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to perform output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34c. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32c is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. The output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when the information that should switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive part 34c is started, and the information that should switch the general electric accessory 34a to the closed state is set. is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S209, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S210, ball entry detection processing is executed. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing ball entry detection processing executed by the main CPU 64. As already explained, the first operating port detection sensor 46a is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via the second connector CN2 on the main control board 61, and the second operating port detection sensor 47a is connected to the main control board 61. It is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via a third connector CN3. In addition, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a, special electric detection sensor 45a, out opening detection sensor 48a, and gate detection sensor 49a are electrically connected to the main CPU 64 via the fourth connector CN4 on the main control board 61. It is connected.

In the ball entering detection process, it is first determined whether one game ball is detected by the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 42a (step S301). In step S301, when the detection signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is in the HI state, the first winning opening flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and the detection signal is When the state is LOW, the first winning slot flag is cleared to "0". The first winning opening flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. In step S301, when the value of the first winning hole flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S301, the value of the ejected balls counter provided in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize balls counter provided in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S302). is added by 1 (step S303). The discharge number counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to grasp the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. The discharge number counter is a 7-bit counter, and numerical information of any one of "0" to "127" is stored in the discharge number counter. The 10 award balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 64 outputs a 10 prize balls command to the payout control device 77 in a payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), which will be described later. Execute the process to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S301, or when the process in step S303 is performed, it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a (step S304). . In step S304, when the detection signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is in the HI state, the second winning opening flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and the detection signal is When the state is LOW, the second winning slot flag is cleared to "0". The second winning opening flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. In step S304, when the value of the second winning hole flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the value of the ejected balls counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S305), and the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S305). S306).

When a negative determination is made in step S304, or when the process in step S306 is performed, it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S307). . In step S307, when the detection signal received from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is in the HI state, the third winning opening flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and the detection signal is When the state is LOW, the third winning slot flag is cleared to "0". The third winning opening flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. In step S307, when the value of the third winning hole flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S307, the value of the ejected balls counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S308), and the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S308). S309).

When a negative determination is made in step S307, or when the process in step S309 is performed, it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S310). In step S310, when the detection signal received from the special electricity detection sensor 45a is in the HI state, the special electricity flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and when the detection signal is in the LOW state, the special electricity flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1". Clear the special electric flag to "0". The special electricity flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the special electricity detection sensor 45a. In step S310, when the value of the special electric flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S310, the value of the ejected balls counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S311), and the value of the 15 award balls counter provided in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1. (Step S312). The 15 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 64 outputs a 15 prize balls command to the payout control device 77 in a payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), which will be described later. Execute the process to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S310, or when the process in step S312 is performed, it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a (step S313). . In step S313, when the detection signal received from the first operating port detection sensor 46a is in the HI state, the first operating port flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and the detection signal is When the state is LOW, the first operating port flag is cleared to "0". The first operating port flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the first operating port detection sensor 46a. In step S313, when the value of the first operating port flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S313, the first operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S314). The first operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 64 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. When the first operation winning flag is set to "1", the main CPU 64 controls the first special figure holding area 215 in the special figure special electric control process (step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), which will be described later. On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored in the 1st to 4th areas 215a to 215d is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces, execute the process of newly storing pending information in the 1st special drawing holding area 215. do.

Thereafter, the value of the discharge number counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S315), and the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S316). The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the one prize ball counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 64 outputs a one prize ball command to the payout control device 77 in a payout output process (step S218 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), which will be described later. Execute the process to do so.

When a negative determination is made in step S313, or when the process in step S316 is performed, it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the second actuation opening detection sensor 47a (step S317). . In step S317, when the detection signal received from the second operating port detection sensor 47a is in the HI state, the second operating port flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and the detection signal is When the state is LOW, the second operating port flag is cleared to "0". The second operating port flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the second operating port detection sensor 47a. In step S317, when the value of the second operating port flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S317, the second operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S318). The second operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 64 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. When the second operation winning flag is set to "1", the main CPU 64 controls the second special figure holding area 216 in the special figure special electric control process (step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), which will be described later. On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored in the first to fourth areas 216a to 216d is less than the upper limit of four pieces, a process of newly storing pending information in the second special drawing holding area 216 is executed. do.

Thereafter, the value of the discharge number counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S319), and the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S320).

When a negative determination is made in step S317, or when the process in step S320 is performed, it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a (step S321). In step S321, when the detection signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a is in the HI state, the outlet flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and the detection signal is in the LOW state. In this case, the output flag is cleared to "0". The outlet flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a. In step S321, when the value of the exit flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 48a. When an affirmative determination is made in step S321, the value of the discharge number counter in the main side RAM 66 is incremented by 1 (step S322).

When a negative determination is made in step S321, or when the process in step S322 is performed, it is determined whether one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S323). In step S323, when the detection signal received from the gate detection sensor 49a is in the HI state, the gate flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and when the detection signal is in the LOW state, the gate flag is set to "1". Clear the gate flag to "0". The gate flag is a flag that enables the main CPU 64 to grasp the state of the detection signal received from the gate detection sensor 49a. In step S323, when the value of the gate flag changes from "0" to "1", it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S323, the gate winning flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S324). The gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 64 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. When the gate winning flag is set to "1", the main CPU 64 performs the general map and general electricity control process (step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), which will be described later, in order to On the condition that the number of pending information on the general network side stored in areas 218a to 218d is less than the upper limit of 4, the numerical information of the current general network random number counter C4 is used as the pending information on the general network side. Then, the process of storing it in the general drawing holding area 213 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S323, or if the process in step S324 is performed, a discharge number management process is executed (step S325), and the main ball entry detection process is ended. In the discharge number management process, it is determined whether the value of the discharge number counter in the main side RAM 66 has reached "100". If the value of the discharge number counter has reached "100", the discharge information flag in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and the value of the discharge number counter is subtracted by "100". The discharge information flag indicates that "100" game balls have been discharged from the gaming area PA through either the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34. This is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to understand the information. When the discharge information flag is set to "1", the main CPU 64 performs an external information setting process (step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), which will be described later, to remove "100" gaming balls from the gaming area PA. A process is executed to output information indicating that it has been ejected to the external terminal board 79.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), after the ball entry detection process is executed in step S210, in step S211, the numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 66 is updated at once. Executes timer update processing for In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

In the following step S212, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed. In the launch control process, as already explained, a launch permission signal is transmitted to the power source/launch control device 78 on the condition that the launch state signal has been received from the power source/launch control device 78. As already explained, the launch status signal is transmitted from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61, and the launch permission signal is transmitted via the first connector CN1. It is transmitted from the main side CPU 64 to the power supply/launch control device 78. The main side CPU 64 receives the firing state signal from the power supply/launch control device 78, and thereby grasps that the firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28. In the launch control process, a launch permission signal is transmitted to the launch operating device 28 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined launch cycle, while the launch operation continues.

In the following step S213, as an input state monitoring process, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are checked for disconnection, and the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are checked for opening, based on the information read in the reading process in step S209. .

In the subsequent step S214, a special figure special electric control process for controlling the execution of the game round and controlling the execution of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The contents of the special figure special electric control process will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S215, general electric power control processing is executed. In the general map and electric power control process, by confirming that "1" is set in the gate winning flag in the main side RAM 66, the number of pieces of general electric power reservation information stored in the general electric power reservation area 65c is determined. On the condition that the number is less than the upper limit of 4, a process is executed to store the current numerical information of the random number counter C4 in the general electricity holding area 65c as the holding information on the general drawing side, and the gate winning flag is set as " 0" Clear. In addition, in the general-purpose electric power control process in step S215, when the numerical information of the general electric power random number counter C4 is stored, an open determination is performed for the numerical information, and with the open determination as a trigger, the general electric power electrician random number counter C4 is Execute the process to perform the production for general drawings. Furthermore, in the general-purpose electricity control process in step S215, a process for opening and closing the general-purpose electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34 is executed based on the result of the open determination.

In the following step S216, display control processing is executed. In the display control processing, output information for reflecting the increase/decrease in the number of reservation information related to the first special figure display section 37a on the first special figure reservation display section 37c based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 and step S215. settings, output information settings for reflecting the increase or decrease in the number of reservation information related to the second special symbol display section 37b on the second special symbol reservation display section 37d, and settings for increasing or decreasing the number of reservation information related to the general symbol display section 38a. Output information to be reflected on the general figure reservation display section 38b is set. In addition, in the display control process in step S216, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b is based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 and step S215. In addition to making settings, output information for updating the display contents of the general map display section 38a is also set. Furthermore, in the display control process in step S216, output information for updating the display content of the round display section 39 is set based on the process result in the immediately preceding step S214.

In the subsequent step S217, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result. Note that details of the payout status reception process will be described later.

After that, in step S218, a payout output process is executed to set various prize ball commands as output targets. In the payout output process, a prize ball command (one prize ball command, 10 prize balls command, or 15 prize balls command). Note that details of the payout output process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S219, external information setting processing is executed to control the start and end of output of external signals according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt processing, and the current timer interrupt processing is completed. finish. As already explained, the main side CPU 64 is connected to the external terminal board 79 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61, and the external terminal board 79 is connected to the gaming hall management computer (not shown) which is an external device. It is connected to the. In the external information setting process in step S219, output settings for information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 64 on the external terminal board 79 are performed. As already explained, the external signal outputted from the main side CPU 64 to the external terminal board 79 via the first connector CN1 includes a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress and a signal indicating that the support mode is the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating that the game is in progress, a signal indicating that one game round has ended, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent to the output opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation. A signal indicating that the game ball has been ejected from the gaming area PA through either the opening 33 or the second operating opening 34, a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating opening 33, and a signal indicating that the gaming ball has entered the second operating opening 34. A signal indicating that the ball has entered the ball is included.

The management computer receives this information from the main CPU 64 through the external terminal board 79, and also receives various information described below from the payout control device 77 through the external terminal board 79. Then, according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10, the ball payout rate (ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10), etc. is calculated. By doing so, the manner in which game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 is grasped.

Next, the payout side timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 222 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. Note that the payout side timer interrupt process is activated repeatedly at a predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds).

In the payout side timer interrupt process, first, a full tank process is executed (step S401). In the filling process, it is determined whether the tank is full or not based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor described above, and if the tank is full, a process is performed to stop the payout of game balls. At the same time, a full tank command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 64. In addition, when the full tank state is canceled, a process to enable the payout of game balls is executed, and a full tank state cancellation command indicating that the full tank state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 64. . These full tank state command and full tank release command are transmitted to the main CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. In the payout status reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 recognizes that the tank is full when it receives the full tank status command, and also issues a full tank release command. When received, it is determined that the full tank state has been released.

Thereafter, ball unnecessary processing is executed (step S402). In the no-ball process, it is determined whether there is no ball or not based on the detection results of the no-ball detection sensor described above, and if there is no ball, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls. At the same time, a no-ball state command indicating that no ball is present is transmitted to the main CPU 64. In addition, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process to enable the payout of game balls is executed, and a no-ball state cancellation command indicating that the no-ball state has been canceled is sent to the main CPU 64. . These no-ball state command and no-ball state release command are transmitted to the main side CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. In the payout state reception process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 recognizes that there is no ball state when receiving the no ball state command, and also issues a command to cancel the no ball state. When received, it is understood that the no-ball state has been released.

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal payout state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the abnormal payout state, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls. At the same time, a payout abnormal state command indicating that the payout is abnormal is transmitted to the main CPU 64. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process to enable the payout of game balls is executed, and a payout abnormal state cancellation command indicating that the abnormal payout state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 64. These payout abnormal state command and payout abnormal state release command are transmitted to the main side CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. When the main CPU 64 receives a payout abnormal state command in the payout state receiving process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 recognizes that the payout abnormal state is in the state and issues a payout abnormal state cancellation command. When received, it is understood that the abnormal payout state has been canceled.

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S404). In the front door open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the state of the detection signal received from the front door open sensor 225. In such a case, a process for stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is sent to the main CPU 64. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 64. These front door open command and front door close command are transmitted to the main side CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. In the payout state receiving process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 grasps that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door open command is received, and closes the front door. When a command is received, it is recognized that the front door frame 14 is closed.

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state based on the state of the detection signal received from the main body opening sensor 226, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, At the same time, a process to stop the payout of game balls is executed, and a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 64. Further, when the game machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a main body close command is sent to the main CPU 64. These main body open command and main body close command are transmitted to the main side CPU 64 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. In the payout state receiving process (step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)), the main CPU 64 understands that the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened when the main body opening command is received, and also issues a main body closing command. When received, it is understood that the game machine main body 12 has been closed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the unpaid counter provided in the paying side RAM 224 is 1 or more (step S406). As already explained, the unpaid counter is a counter for the payout side CPU 222 to grasp the number of game balls that have not been paid out. If a negative determination is made in step S406, it is determined whether any of the 1 prize ball command, 10 prize balls command, and 15 prize balls command has been received from the main CPU 64 (step S407). . If any prize ball command has been received (step S407: YES), the number of prize balls corresponding to the received prize ball command is set in the unpaid counter (step S408). In step S408, if the 1 prize ball command is received, the unpaid ball command is set to "1", and if the 10 prize balls command is received, the unpaid counter is set to "10", and 15 prize balls are received. When the command is received, "15" is set in the unpaid counter.

Thereafter, the prize ball permission signal is lowered from the HI state to the LOW state (step S409). Is it possible for the prize ball permission signal to send a prize ball command (one of the 1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball command, and 15 prize ball command) from the main side CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222? This is a signal indicating whether or not. When the prize ball permission signal is in the HI state, it is possible to transmit the prize ball command, and when the prize ball permission signal is in the LOW state, the prize ball command cannot be transmitted. The prize ball permission signal is set to the HI state when the value of the unpaid counter in the payout side RAM 224 is "0", and is set to the LOW state when the value of the unpaid counter is 1 or more.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S406, or when the process in step S409 is performed, a payout control process is performed (step S410). In the payout control process, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is paid out. Thereafter, the value of the unpaid counter in the paying side RAM 224 is subtracted by 1 (step S411), and it is determined whether the value of the unpaid counter after the subtraction has become "0" (step S412). When an affirmative determination is made in step S412, the prize ball permission signal is raised from the LOW state to the HI state (step S413).

If a negative determination is made in step S407, if a negative determination is made in step S412, or if the process of step S413 is performed, a payout side external information setting process is performed (step S414). As already explained, some of the external terminals on the external terminal board 79 and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 222. In the payout side external information setting process in step S414, output settings of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 222 on the external terminal board 79 are performed. As already explained, the information output from the payout side CPU 222 to the external terminal board 79 includes information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out. The management computer receives various information from the main side CPU 64 and the payout control device 77 through the external terminal board 79. Then, according to the received various information, by calculating the ball payout rate (ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10), etc. , grasp the manner in which game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10, etc.

Thereafter, reset handling processing is executed (step S415), and the main payout side timer interrupt processing is ended. In the reset response process, based on the state of the payout reset signal received from the main CPU 64, it is determined whether or not the occurrence of a power interruption has been identified in the main CPU 64, and if the occurrence of a power interruption has not been identified. If it is determined, the main payout side timer interrupt process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the occurrence of a power outage has been identified, processing corresponding to the power outage is executed and an infinite loop is entered. By executing the process corresponding to the power outage, the payout side RAM 224 is initialized.

Next, the payout state receiving process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. Note that the payout status reception process is executed in step S217 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the payout state receiving process, first, full tank state handling processing is performed (step S501). In the full tank state handling process, when a full tank state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a full tank notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the audio emission control device 70 receives the full tank notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that a full tank notification is performed. In addition, in the full tank state handling process, when a full tank state cancellation command is received from the payout side CPU 222 or when a payout reset signal is received, a full tank notification end command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the audio emission control device 70 receives the full tank notification end command, it ends the notification of the full tank state being performed on the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41.

After that, processing for dealing with the no-ball state is performed (step S502). In the no-ball state handling process, when a no-ball state command is received from the payout-side CPU 222, a no-ball notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the sound emission control device 70 receives the no-ball notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker section 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that the no-ball state is notified. In addition, in the no-ball state handling process, when a no-ball state cancellation command is received from the CPU 222 on the payout side, or when a payout reset signal is received, a ball no-notification end command is transmitted to the audio light emission control device 70. When the sound emission control device 70 receives the no-ball notification end command, it ends the notification of the no-ball state being performed by the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41.

Thereafter, a payout abnormal state handling process is performed (step S503). In the abnormal payout state handling process, when an abnormal payout state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a payout abnormality notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When receiving the abnormality payout notification command, the sound emission control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker section 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that notification of abnormality in the payout state is performed. In addition, in the abnormal payout state handling process, a payout abnormality notification end command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70 when a payout abnormal state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222 or when a payout reset signal is received. When the audio emission control device 70 receives the abnormal payout notification end command, it ends the notification of the abnormal payout state being performed on the speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41.

Thereafter, processing corresponding to the front door open state is performed (step S504). In the front door open state handling process, when a front door open state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a front door open notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the audio emission control device 70 receives the front door open notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that the front door open state is notified. conduct. Further, in the front door open state handling process, when a front door open state release command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a front door open notification end command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the audio emission control device 70 receives the front door open notification end command, it ends the notification that the front door is in the open state, which is performed by the speaker section 54 and the symbol display device 41.

Thereafter, a process corresponding to the main body open state is performed (step S505), and the main payout state reception process is ended. In the main body open state handling process, when a main body open state command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a main body open state notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the audio emission control device 70 receives the main body open notification command, it controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 (FIG. 1) and the display control device 90 so that the main body open state is notified. Further, in the main body open state handling process, when a main body open state cancellation command is received from the payout side CPU 222, a main body open state notification end command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the audio emission control device 70 receives the main body open notification end command, it ends the notification that the main body is in the open state, which is performed by the speaker section 54 and the symbol display device 41.

Next, the payout output process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. Note that the payout output process is executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the payout output process, first, it is determined whether the prize ball permission signal received from the payout side CPU 222 via the first connector CN1 in the main control board 61 is in the HI state (step S601), and the prize ball permission signal is output. When is in the LOW state (step S601: NO), the main payout output process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the prize ball permission signal is in the HI state (step S601: YES), it is determined whether the value of the 15 prize balls counter in the main side RAM 66 is 1 or more (step S602). When an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the 15 prize balls command is set as an output target (step S603). The 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. Thereafter, the value of the 15 award balls counter is subtracted by 1 (step S604), and the main payout output process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S602, it is determined whether the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 66 is 1 or more (step S605). When an affirmative determination is made in step S605, the 10 award balls command is set as an output target (step S606). The 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter is subtracted by 1 (step S607), and the main payout output process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S605, it is determined whether the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 66 is 1 or more (step S608). When an affirmative determination is made in step S608, the one prize ball command is set as an output target (step S609). The one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 via the first connector CN1 on the main control board 61. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter is subtracted by 1 (step S610), and the main payout output process is ended.

As already explained, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, backup power is not supplied to the payout side RAM 224. Therefore, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped while the value of the unpaid counter in the payout side RAM 224 is 1 or more, the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224 (value of unpaid counter) will be lost. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the prize ball command is transmitted from the main side CPU 64 to the payout side CPU 222 on the condition that the value of the unpaid counter in the payout side RAM 224 is "0". Therefore, the maximum value of the number of unpaid prize balls (value of the unpaid counter) stored in the payout side RAM 224 is "15" when a 15 prize ball command is received. By setting the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224 to "15" or less, the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced in a situation where information on the number of unpaid prize balls exists in the payout side RAM 224. The number of unpaid prize balls lost when the supply is stopped is reduced.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed by the main side CPU 64 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. Note that the special figure special electric control process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring pending information is executed when a prize has been won to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and when the pending information is stored, A validity determination is made regarding the pending information, and further, using the validity determination as a trigger, processing for performing a game repeat performance is executed. Based on the result of the validity judgment, a process for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the performance of the game round, and a process is executed during the opening/closing execution mode and at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In the special figure special electric train control process, first in step S701, acquisition processing of reservation information on the special figure side is executed. In the acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first operating port 33 has occurred based on the value of the first operating winning flag in the main side RAM 66. When a game ball enters the first operating port 33, the number of pending information stored in the first special figure holding area 215 is read out, and the number of pending information is set to the upper limit (specifically is less than "4"), the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are transferred to the highest level side of the first special drawing reservation area 215 where reservation information is not stored. is stored in the area. Then, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not a winning of a game ball to the second operating opening 34 has occurred based on the value of the second operating winning flag in the main side RAM 66. When a game ball enters the second operating port 34, the number of pending information stored in the second special figure holding area 216 is read out, and the number of pending information is set to the upper limit (specifically is less than "4"), the values of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are transferred to the highest level side of the first special drawing reservation area 215 where reservation information is not stored. is stored in the area. Then, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the hold information acquisition process in step S701, if hold information about the first special figure hold area 215 or hold information about the second special figure hold area 216 is acquired, a hold command is sent to the audio emission control device 70. do. The audio emission control device 70 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 90. In the display control device 90, by receiving the reservation command, the display of the number of reservation information on the symbol display device 41 is changed in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. In this case, since the hold command includes information indicating which of the first special figure hold area 215 and the second special figure hold area 216 has increased hold information, the symbol display device 41 The display of the number of pending items corresponding to the increased side is changed.

In addition, when the number of pending information increases as described above, in the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), the first special figure pending display section 37c and the second special figure pending display section Display control is performed on the side of 37d that corresponds to the increase in the number of items on hold so that the display content is changed to correspond to the increase in the number of items on hold.

In the subsequent step S702, the information of the special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM 66 is read out, and in step S703, the special figure special electric line address table stored in the main side ROM 65 is read out. Then, in step S704, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure special electric line address table.

Here, the processing contents of steps S702 to S704 will be explained.

As already explained, the special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the performance of the game rerun and a process for controlling the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect of the game repeat, there is a special figure fluctuation start process (step S706) which is a process for starting the effect of the game repeat, and a process for advancing the effect of the game repeat. A special figure fluctuation process (step S707), which is the process of , and a special figure confirmation process (step S708), which is a process to end the performance of the game round, are set.

In addition, as a process for controlling the opening/closing execution mode, a special electric line start process (step S709) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and a process for controlling the opening state of the special electric prize winning device 32. The special electric line opening process (step S710), the special electric line closing process (step S711) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 32, the ending of the opening/closing execution mode, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A special call termination process (step S712) is set, which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure/telephone counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing should be executed, and the special figure/telephone address table has the following information: The start address of the program for executing the plurality of types of processing described above is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure fluctuation start process (step S706), and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure fluctuation process (step S707). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure confirmation process (step S708), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special train start process (step S709). The start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric line opening process (step S710), and the start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric line closed process (step S711). The start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special call termination process (step S712).

When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed, the special figure and special electric counter performs special figure and special electric control in the next processing time, triggered by the fact that the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied. It is added by 1, subtracted by 1, or cleared to "0" depending on the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric line control process in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric line counter. Note that the special figure special electric counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

After executing the process in step S704, in step S705, a process to jump to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S704 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S706, and when the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation process of step S707. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure confirmation process in step S708, and if the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special train start process in step S709. If SA4, the process jumps to the special train opening process in step S710, if the acquired start address is SA5, jumps to the special train closed process in step S711, and if the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to the special call termination process in step S712. When any of the processes from step S706 to step S712 is executed, this special figure special electric control process is ended. The processing in steps S706 to S712 will be individually explained below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol fluctuation start process in step S706 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether reservation information is stored in either the first special figure reservation area 215 or the second special figure reservation area 216. If a negative determination is made in step S801, this special symbol variation start process is directly ended, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a data setting process is executed (step S802).

In the data setting process in step S802, it is first determined whether the number of reserved pieces in the second special figure holding area 216 is "0", and if the number of reserved pieces in the second special figure holding area 216 is "0", executes the data setting process for the first special figure, and when the number of reserved pieces in the second special figure holding area 216 is not "0", executes the data setting process for the second special figure. Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the reservation information is stored in either the first special figure reservation area 215 or the second special figure reservation area 216, as already explained. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved pieces in the second special figure holding area 216 is "0". If the reservation information is stored, the data stored in the second special figure holding area 216 is displayed in a variable manner, regardless of whether the number of pieces held in the first special figure holding area 215 is 1 or more. It is now set for use. As a result, when the reservation information is stored in both the first special figure holding area 215 and the second special figure holding area 216, the holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 216 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Priority will be given to the pending information that is available for starting the game round.

In the data setting process for the first special figure performed in the data setting process (step S802), the data stored in the first area 215a of the first special figure holding area 215 is first moved to the execution area 217 for the special figure. do. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 215 is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 215a to 215d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 215a, and also Data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area 215a, third area 215c→second area 215b, fourth area 215d→third area 215c. Thereafter, the second special symbol flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is cleared to "0". The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying whether the current variable display starts in the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b. Thereafter, a shift command, which is information for making the sound emission control device 70 recognize that the data in the first special figure holding area 215 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is ended. The voice emission control device 70 suspends the display of the number of pending information corresponding to the first special pattern holding area 215 on the pattern display device 41 by transmitting a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 90. Changes will be made in response to the decrease in the number of items. In addition, when the number of reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 215 decreases as described above, in the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), the first special figure reservation display section 37c Display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending items.

In the data setting process for the second special figure performed in the data setting process (step S802), the data stored in the first area 216a of the second special figure holding area 216 is first moved to the execution area 217 for the special figure. do. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 216 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 216a to 216d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 216a, and also Data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area 216a, third area 216c→second area 216b, fourth area 216d→third area 216c. Thereafter, the second special figure flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1". Thereafter, a shift command, which is information for making the sound emission control device 70 recognize that the data in the second special figure holding area 216 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is ended. The sound emission control device 70 suspends display of the number of pending information corresponding to the second special pattern holding area 216 on the pattern display device 41 by transmitting a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display control device 90. Changes will be made in response to the decrease in the number of items. In addition, when the number of reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 216 decreases as described above, in the display control process of step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), the second special figure reservation display section 37d Display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending items.

After executing the data setting process in step S802, an appropriateness determination process is executed in step S803. In the win/fail determination process, it is first determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, a winning/failure table for the high probability mode provided in the main side ROM 65 is referred to, and information for judging the winning/failure among the information stored in the execution area 217 for special symbols, that is, a winning random number. It is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the counter C1 matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In addition, in the case of the low probability mode, numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 217 for special symbols is obtained by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table provided in the main side ROM 65. It is determined whether or not it matches the low probability jackpot numerical information.

In the following step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S803 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, a distribution determination process is executed in step S805. In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not the second special figure flag in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", the current game round is divided into the first special figure holding area 215 and the second special figure holding area 215. It is determined which reservation information in the area 216 corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is divided into the distribution table for the first special symbol (see FIG. 25(a)) and the distribution table for the second special symbol (see FIG. 25(b)). Choose from among them. After selecting the distribution table, the information for distribution determination among the pending information stored in the execution area 217 for special symbols, that is, the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, is used for the selected distribution. To grasp which type of jackpot result corresponds to the minute table. Specifically, when the distribution table for the first special symbol is selected, 12R low-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, 12R high-probability jackpot result A, 12R high-probability jackpot result B, and 16R high-probability jackpot result. To grasp which jackpot result corresponds to among the guaranteed jackpot results. In addition, when the second special drawing distribution table is selected, it corresponds to any of the following jackpot results: 8R low-probability jackpot result, 4R high-probability jackpot result, 8R high-probability jackpot result, and 16R high-probability jackpot result. Understand what you are doing.

In the following step S806, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is stored in the jackpot result stored in advance in the main side ROM 65. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 66. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of patterns that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. Then, in step S806, information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S805 is stored in the main side RAM 66.

Note that information on the type of symbols that are stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern form may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern forms may be set for each jackpot result.

In the following step S807, flag setting processing corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main side RAM 66 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, and in step S807, among the flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, the allocation determination result of step S805 is set. Set the corresponding flag to "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S804 that it is not a jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the result of the win/fail determination process in step S803 is a small winning result. If it is a small win result, in step S809, a stop result setting process for the small win result is executed. Specifically, information on the mode of the picture that will be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is stored in advance in the main side ROM 65. It is specified from the stop result table for results, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 66. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result. In the following step S810, a small hit flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1". The small hit flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 64 to grasp that a small win result has occurred in the success/failure determination process in step S803.

If a negative determination is made in step S808, a stop result setting process for a deviation result is executed in step S811. Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is stored in advance in the main side ROM 65 as a winning result. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 66. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result.

After executing any one of the processes in step S807, step S810, and step S811, in step S812, a display duration acquisition process is executed. In the acquisition process, the display continuation for the current game round is determined according to the current gaming state, the result of the validity judgment process, the result of the distribution judgment process, the presence or absence of reach display, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, and the number of pending information. Get time information.

In subsequent step S813, information corresponding to the display duration acquired in step S812 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The numerical information set in the timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step S211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) described above. Incidentally, as a performance for the game, the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol display section 37b displays a variable symbol and the symbol display device 41 displays a variable symbol, but each of these variable displays When the game is ended, the final stop is displayed with the stop result of that game round being displayed (in the pattern display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the active line) for the final stop time. . In this case, the display duration obtained in step S812 is the total time for one game, and in step S813, the display duration obtained in step S812 is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time. Set the information to the special figure special electric timer counter.

In the following step S814, a variation command and a type command are transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. As already explained, these variation commands and type commands are transmitted to the audio emission control device 70 via the seventh connector CN7 on the main control board 61. The fluctuation command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the validity judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and the display duration. Contains corresponding data. Specifically, the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data set identification data to indicate that it is a fluctuation command, and the next 4 bits of data are used to determine validity. and lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process are set, and the following 1-bit data determines which of the reservation information of the first special symbol reservation area 215 and the second special symbol reservation area 216 is set. Trigger data indicating whether the display is triggered is set, and the remaining 7 bits of data set time data corresponding to the display duration time. Therefore, when the audio emission control device 70 receives a variation command, it recognizes that it is a variation command from the identification data, and the result of the validity judgment process and the result of the distribution judgment process from the lottery result data. , and recognizes the display duration of the current game round from the time data. Here, since the main CPU 64 selects a different display duration time depending on whether or not a reach occurs, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not a reach occurs, the audio emission control device 70 It is possible to identify whether reach has occurred from information on display duration. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating the presence or absence of reach. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the validity judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and high probability mode. data indicating whether the mode is in the high-frequency support mode or not, and data indicating whether the mode is in the high-frequency support mode are included. Specifically, the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data set identification data to indicate that the command is a type command, and the next 4 bits of data are used to determine whether the command is correct or not. Lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8 bits of data are used to recognize the state of whether or not it is in high probability mode and whether or not it is in high frequency support mode. is set. Therefore, when the audio emission control device 70 receives a type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the above-mentioned identification data, and recognizes the result of the validity judgment process and the result of the distribution judgment process from the above-mentioned lottery result data. Then, it is recognized from the state recognition data whether the mode is high probability mode or not and whether the mode is high frequency support mode.

Here, both the variation command and the type command include data corresponding to the results of the validity determination process and the results of the distribution determination process. Therefore, in the audio emission control device 70, by comparing the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command, the sound emission control device 70 eliminates noise and noise regarding reception of the variation command and the type command. It becomes possible to identify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. Then, if both lottery result data match, control for production corresponding to the contents of the variation command and type command is executed, and if both lottery result data do not match, can be notified. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound emission control device 70 may be configured to execute a game repeat performance corresponding to the communication abnormality in the relevant game round. Regardless of the result of the determination process, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a complete miss may be reliably displayed on the symbol display device 41 in a stopped state. In this case, the game repeat performance may be performed for a display duration corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, or may be continued until the next variation command and type command are received. Good too. Note that the variation command may include a configuration in which data of one of the results of the validity determination process and the results of the distribution determination process is not included, or a configuration in which both data are not included.

After executing the process in step S814, in step S815, the variable display of symbols is started on the display section on the side to be executed in the current game round among the first special symbol display section 37a and the second special symbol display section 37b. let In the following step S816, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter is "1" when the process of step S816 is executed. ”. After that, this special figure fluctuation start process is ended.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuation processing in step S707 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 32) will be explained.

In the special figure fluctuation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the duration of the game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37a A process for regularly changing the display mode of the symbols on the side to be executed in the current game round of the diagram display section 37b is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether there is a winning result or not and whether or not a reach display occurs.

In addition, instead of waiting in the special figure fluctuation process until the timing to display the final stop, if it is not the timing to display the final stop, after executing the process for regularly changing the figure, this special figure Ends the changing process. Therefore, after the performance of the game cycle is started, the special figure fluctuation processing is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the timing for final stop display is reached. Furthermore, when it is time to display the final stop, a final stop command is sent to the sound emission control device 70 in order to display the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 41 as the final stop. Of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, the display mode of the symbols on the side to be executed in the current game round is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Further, information on the final stop time (0.5 seconds) of the game round is read from the main side ROM 65 and set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the process during special figure fluctuation to the value corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation.

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, the special figure confirmation process of step S708 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 32) will be explained.

In the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether the final stop time of the current game round has elapsed, and if the final stop time has elapsed, the result of the validity judgment that triggered the current game round is determined. It is determined whether or not is a jackpot result or a small win result. If the judgment result that triggered this game round is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result, clear the value of the special figure special electric counter to "0" and end this special figure confirmation process. . As a result, in the next special figure special electric control process, the special figure fluctuation start process will be executed.

On the other hand, in the special figure confirmation processing, if it is determined that the result of the judgment that triggered the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result, the opening time ( For example, the opening time information (for example, 4 seconds) is read out and the opening time information is set in the special map special electric timer counter. Thereafter, an opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 70. The opening command is a command for making the audio light emission control device 70 recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot result or a small win result. Therefore, the sound emission control device 70 can execute the performance of the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure/special electric line counter, the value of the special figure/special electric line counter which had stored "2" is changed to "3", and this special figure confirmation process is ended.

<Special call start process>
Next, the special train start process of step S709 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 32) will be explained.

In the special electric start process, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed, and if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the trigger for executing the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot result, the value of the number of round games corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round counter provided in the main side RAM 66. , sets 10 in the winning counter PC provided in the main side RAM 66. The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode, and the winning counter PC is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode. This counter is used by the main CPU 64 to determine whether or not a winning ball has occurred. Thereafter, a process of reading out the opening duration corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, when the jackpot result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a 5R high certainty jackpot result, information on the opening duration corresponding to the short time mode is read from the main side ROM 65. The opening duration time is 0.05 seconds, which is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds). On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is other than the 5R high certainty jackpot result, information on the opening duration corresponding to the long time mode is read from the main side ROM 65.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode this time is not any jackpot result, that is, if the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small winning result, the opening/closing counter provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to 5, and 10 is set to the winning counter PC provided in the main side RAM 66. The opening/closing counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number regulation mode. Thereafter, a process of reading out the opening duration corresponding to the small winning result is executed. The opening duration time is stored in advance in the main side ROM 65, and specifically, it is 0.05 seconds, which is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds).

If the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode this time is determined to be one of the jackpot results and the above-mentioned opening duration reading process is executed, or the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the result of any jackpot. If it is determined that the above-mentioned opening duration information is read out, the readout opening duration information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter and the opening is performed to bring the special electric winning device 32 into the open state. Execute the configuration process. After that, a release command is output. The release command is a command for making the sound emission control device 70 recognize that the special electric prize winning device 32 is released. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio light emission control device 70 executes control for switching the performance in the opening/closing execution mode accordingly. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the special figure/special electric line counter, the value of the special figure/special electric line counter that had stored "3" is changed to "4", and the present special electric line start process is ended.

<Processing while special electric line is open>
Next, the special train opening process in step S710 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 32) will be explained.

In the special electric release process, if the current opening/closing execution mode is the round number regulation mode, it is determined whether the termination condition of the first round game is satisfied, and if the termination condition is satisfied, The special electric prize winning device 32 is placed in a closed state, and a closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 70. Further, it is determined whether the value of the round counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and specifically, it is 2 seconds, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. Further, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, the special figure special electric wire counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special electric line opening process is executed is "4," the value becomes "5" after adding 1.

If the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing number regulation mode, if the opening duration time of the special electric winning device 32 has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is set to the closed state, and the closing command is sent to the voice light emission control device. Send to 70. Then, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As already explained, the closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, if the opening duration time has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the special electric winning device 32, and if a winning has occurred, the winning winning counter is subtracted by 1. If the value of the prize winning counter after subtraction by 1 is "0", the open/close counter is cleared to "0" and the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. In addition, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, the special figure special electric prize counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the opening/closing counter is "0" or not. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special electric line opening process is executed is "4," the value becomes "5" after adding 1.

<Processing during special electric train closure>
Next, the special train closed processing in step S711 in the special train special train control process (FIG. 32) will be explained.

In the special electric train closing process, it is determined whether both the round counter and the opening/closing counter are "0". If either one is not "0", it is determined whether the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, this special train closing process is immediately terminated; if the closing time has elapsed, the special train winning device 32 is set to the open state, and the execution trigger of the current opening/closing execution mode is set. The opening duration corresponding to the winning result is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Further, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the open state, an open command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. Thereafter, after decrementing the special train special train counter by 1, this special train closed processing is ended. In this case, since the value of the special train special train counter when the special train closed process is executed is "5", the value becomes "4" after being subtracted by 1.

On the other hand, when both the round counter and the opening/closing counter are "0", an ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. The ending command is a command for making the audio emission control device 70 recognize that it is the timing to start the ending effect. The ending command also includes information indicating whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot result or a small win result. Therefore, the sound emission control device 70 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. Further, information on the ending time (for example, 6 seconds) stored in advance in the main side ROM 65 is read out, and the information on the ending time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Thereafter, after incrementing the special figure special electric line counter by 1, this special electric line closed processing is ended. In this case, since the value of the special train special train counter when the special train closed process is executed is "5", the value becomes "6" after adding 1.

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special train end process of step S712 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 32) will be explained.

In the special call end process, it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, a game state transition process is executed, the special figure special line counter is cleared to "0", and the present special line end process is ended. Here, the gaming state transition process will be explained.

In the gaming state transition process, the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that ended this time is one of the 16R high-probability jackpot result, 12R high-probability jackpot result A, 8R high-probability jackpot result, and 4R high-probability jackpot result. If so, set each of the high probability flag and high frequency support flag provided in the main side RAM 66 to "1", clear the high frequency counter provided in the main side RAM 66 to "0", and return to the main game state. Finish the migration process. The high probability flag is a flag for specifying whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode in the main CPU 64, and the high frequency support flag is a flag for specifying whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode in the main CPU 64. This is a flag for specifying whether or not. In addition, the high frequency counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify the trigger for ending the high frequency support mode in the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times, and the value set in the high frequency counter is It is decremented by 1 each time it is terminated.

In addition, in a situation where the high probability flag is set to "0", the process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed in the validity determination process of step S803 in the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 33), and the high probability flag is set to "0". In a situation where "1" is set to "1", processing corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. In addition, in a situation where the high-frequency support flag is set to "0", the process corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed in the general electric power control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), In a situation where the high frequency support flag is set to "1", processing corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed. Further, when the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more, processing corresponding to the high frequency support mode is executed even if the value of the high frequency support flag is "0". However, in the opening/closing execution mode, the process corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed regardless of whether the high-frequency support flag is set to "1". Therefore, during the opening/closing execution mode, the mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, regardless of whether or not the previous support mode was the high-frequency support mode.

In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that ended this time is either 12R high-probability jackpot result B or 5R high-probability jackpot result, "1" is set in the high-frequency support flag. is set or the value of the high frequency counter is "1" or more. If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is set to "1" or the high-frequency counter value is "1" or more, 12R Since this means a high probability jackpot result B or a 5R high probability jackpot result, processing is executed to shift to a gaming state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. Specifically, the high probability flag and high frequency support flag provided in the main side RAM 66 are each set to "1", the high frequency counter provided in the main side RAM 66 is cleared to "0", and the main game is started. End the state transition process. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the high-frequency support flag is set to "1" nor the high-frequency counter value is "1" or more, the gaming state in the low-frequency support mode Since this means a 12R high-probability jackpot result B or a 5R high-probability jackpot result, processing is executed to set the gaming state to a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode. Specifically, the high probability flag in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1", and the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In the gaming state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that ended this time is an 8R low-probability jackpot result, the high frequency counter provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "15", Each of the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag is cleared to "0", and the main game state transition process is ended. Therefore, if the result is an 8R low-probability jackpot, the high-frequency support mode will be set after the opening/closing execution mode until the end standard number of games, 15, are played.

In the gaming state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that ended this time is a 12R low probability jackpot result, each of the high probability flag, high frequency support flag, and high frequency counter in the main side RAM 66 is is cleared to "0" and the main gaming state transition process ends.

In the gaming state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode that ended this time is a small winning result, "30" is set in the small winning counter provided in the main side RAM 66, and the main The game state transition process ends. The after-small-win counter is a counter for the main CPU 64 to specify whether or not the standard number of games for after-small-win has been completed after a small win result. The value of the after-small-win counter is decremented by 1 each time a game round is completed. Further, upon transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the small hit counter is cleared to "0". When the value of the after-small-win counter is 1 or more, the selection of the display duration in the game round is performed in a manner corresponding to after the small-win result.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Dimension of the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is determined from the size of the upper play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. It's also small. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a tampering jig such as a wire into the lower play and electrically contacting the terminals 111 to 116 and wiring patterns present on the element mounting surface 61e. , it is possible to prevent the signal from being illegally manipulated by the fraudulent act.

The fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 are the lower upright wall portions. It extends along the element mounting surface 61e between the lower peripheral portions 156b to 159b and the lower peripheral portions 101c to 104c. For this reason, the signal lines set at the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 may be damaged by wire or other It is possible to preferentially protect against fraudulent activities using tools.

The front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122 by screwing the front first case fixing boss 183 to the front third case fixing boss 185 to the back first case fixing boss 186 to the back third case fixing boss 188. be done. When the front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122, the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 156b to 159b is the upper upright wall part 101b to 159b. This is smaller than the upper play that exists between 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a. This makes it easy to maintain a state in which the play on the lower side is smaller than the play on the upper side.

When the front case body 121 is released from being fixed to the back case body 122, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are aligned in the vertical direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. It can be in a state where it exists in the center. In this state, the lower play that exists between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b is the lower play that exists between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b when the front case body 121 is fixed to the back case body 122. It becomes larger than the side play. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box 62, it is assumed that the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located at the center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the vertical direction. The fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. This makes it easy to insert the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Thereafter, the lower play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 156b to 159b is adjusted to the upper side that exists between the upper upright wall parts 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edge parts 156a to 159a. The play can be made smaller than the play.

The lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are provided with locking receiving portions 101h to 104h. Therefore, when the male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the receiving portions 101f to 104f of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and connected, the male connectors This state can be maintained by preventing the connector from coming off.

The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are closer to the first to fourth connectors CN1 than the areas facing the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c. ~ Exists on the free end side of CN4. In a state in which the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located at the center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the vertical direction, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion 156b to 159b is larger than the dimension in which the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h protrude from the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c toward the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box 62, it is possible to easily insert the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159.

The locking receiving portions 101h to 104h have a lower play than the lower side that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. It exists on the upright tip side (free end side) of the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c. For this reason, when the main control device 60 is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13, unauthorized use can be made from the front facing plate section 141 side, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the main control board 61, due to the play on the lower side. Insert the jig and electrically connect the tampering jig to one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. In the case of a fraudulent attempt to contact the user, the insertion of the fraudulent jig can be prevented by the locking receivers 101h to 104h. This can make the fraudulent act even more difficult.

The upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are not provided with locking receiving portions. Due to the structure in which the locking receiving parts 101h to 104h are provided only on the lower standing wall parts 101c to 104c among the upper standing wall parts 101b to 104b and the lower standing wall parts 101c to 104c, the upper standing wall part Compared to the configuration in which the locking receivers 101h to 104h are provided on both of the lower standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. In order to allow insertion into the fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, the play provided between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the peripheral edges of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 should be small. can do. As a result, in a state where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 can be made small.

A second guide portion 182 is integrated with the lower partition wall 125 of the back case body 122 to guide the front case body 121 upward as it is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. It is formed. The second guide portion 182 exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. The front case body 121 is moved upwardly relative to the back case body 122 so that the lower play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a is smaller than the upper play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a. invite. This makes it possible to easily create a state in which the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b are close to the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c with good reproducibility.

In a state where a part of the free end side of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 is inserted into the corresponding connector insertion hole 156 to 159, 164 to 166, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portion 156b 159b, there is play of a common size in the vertical direction. The vertical direction is the direction in which the front case body 121 is guided by the second guide portion 182. Therefore, when the front case body 121 is guided upward by the second guide part 182 while the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the corresponding boss insertion holes 175 to 178, the first to fourth connectors This prevents variations in the play between the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b in CN1 to CN4. This allows the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b to uniformly approach the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a.

The upper partition wall 124 of the back case body 122 is provided with a first guide part 181 that guides the front case body 121 downward as it slides toward the back side facing plate part 123 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. ing. By inserting the four position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 into the corresponding four boss insertion holes 175 to 178, and then sliding the front case body 121 toward the back side facing plate part 123 along the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174. To provide a state in which seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159 and 164 to 166, while eliminating the need for fine adjustment of the position of the front case body 121 with respect to the main control board 61. Can be done. The seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are located at the center in the vertical direction of the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, and the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the corresponding connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, the connector insertion holes 156 to 166 correspond to the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the locking receiving portions 95j to 97j of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. Collision with the lower peripheral edge portions 156b-159b, 164b-166b of 159, 164-166 can be prevented. This simplifies the work of inserting the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 into the corresponding seven connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the process of assembling the main controller 60, thereby improving the efficiency of the work. be able to.

The connector group corresponding recess 155 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 141 toward the main control board 61. A side surface 155b of the connector group corresponding recess 155 stands up substantially perpendicularly from the connector group corresponding plate 155a toward the direction opposite to the main control board 61. This makes it difficult to insert conductive tampering tools such as wires into the gaps between the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a.

The fixing portions 113b and 114b of all the terminals 113 and 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 extend along the element mounting surface 61e between the lower upstanding wall portions 102c and 103c and the lower peripheral edge portions 157b and 158b. It extends as if straddling the area. The second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 have terminals whose fixing portions extend along the element mounting surface 61e between the upper standing wall portions 102b, 103b and the upper peripheral edge portions 157a, 158a. not exist. Therefore, the signal lines set to all the terminals 113 and 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 can be preferentially protected from fraudulent activity using a fraudulent jig such as a wire.

A signal line for a detection signal from the first operating port detection sensor 46a is assigned to the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2. The terminal 113 is preferentially protected from unauthorized use of a conductive tampering jig. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line from being performed and a situation where a game ball enters the first operating port 33 to win a prize is created illegally.

A signal line for a detection signal from the second operating port detection sensor 47a is assigned to the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3. The terminal 114 is preferentially protected from unauthorized use of conductive tampering tools. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line and illegally creating a situation in which a game ball enters the second operating port 34.

The signal line of the detection signal in the radio wave detection sensor 202 is assigned to the 11th terminal, which is the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, and the 13th terminal, which is the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. A signal line for a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 203 is assigned to the magnetic detection sensor 203. These 11th and 13th terminals are preferentially protected from unauthorized use of conductive tampering jigs. This can prevent unauthorized creation of a situation in which unauthorized radio waves or magnetism cannot be detected.

The main side CPU 64 sends various payout reception commands (payout restriction command, front door open command, front door close command, main body open command, main body open command, main body A signal line is assigned to receive a close command, a full tank command, a full tank release command, a no-ball state command, a no-ball state release command, a dispensing abnormal state command, and a dispensing abnormal state cancel command. The thirteenth terminal is preferentially protected from unauthorized use of a conductive tampering jig. As a result, the front door close command, main body close command, full tank state release command, no ball state release command, or abnormal payout state release command is sent illegally, causing the front door frame 14 to be in the open state and the gaming machine main body 12 to be in the open state. It is possible to prevent the open state, full tank state, no ball state, or abnormal payout state from being canceled illegally.

The main side CPU 64 sends various payout transmission commands (1 prize ball command, 10 prize ball command, and 15 prize ball command ) is assigned a signal line for transmitting. The fifteenth terminal is preferentially protected from unauthorized use of a conductive tampering jig. Thereby, it is possible to prevent game balls from being illegally paid out due to an act of transmitting an illegal signal to the signal line.

A signal line for the main side CPU 64 to receive a prize ball permission signal from the payout side CPU 222 is assigned to the 19th terminal which is the one end side terminal 111 of the first connector CN1. The 19th terminal is preferentially protected from unauthorized use of a conductive tampering jig. As a result, even though the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 224 is not "0" due to a fraudulent act of transmitting an incorrect signal to the signal line, the main side CPU 64 sends the payout side to the payout side. It is possible to prevent a situation from being created in which a prize ball command is illegally transmitted to the CPU 222.

If it is specified that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state in a state where it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, a special electric power abnormality notification is performed, and a process for advancing the game (step S208 to The process of step S219) is no longer executed. In addition, if it is specified that the general electric utility object 34a is in the open state in a state where the open state winning of the general electric power accessory object 34a has not occurred, a general electric power abnormality notification is performed, and a timer interrupt process (Fig. In 27), the processing for advancing the game (the processing of steps S208 to S219) is no longer executed. A signal line through which the main side CPU 64 transmits a special electric drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32c is assigned to the twelfth terminal, which is the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. Further, a signal line through which the main CPU 64 transmits a general power drive signal to the general power drive unit 34c is assigned to the fourteenth terminal, which is the other end terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4. In the fourth connector CN4, the one end terminal 115 is preferentially protected from unauthorized use of a conductive tampering jig than the other end terminal 116. The signal line (signal line of the special electric drive signal and signal line of the general electric drive signal) that can detect the occurrence of fraudulent activity through abnormality notification (special electric power abnormality notification and general electric power abnormality notification) is on one end side of the fourth connector CN4. By being arranged at the other end side terminal 116 (specifically, the 12th terminal and the 14th terminal) instead of the terminal 115, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally opening the special electric prize winning device 32 and the general electric utility object 34a. The fourth connector CN4 is preferentially protected from fraudulent activities, while enabling the game hall administrator to discover and respond to fraudulent acts that illegally open the state. It is possible to allocate a signal line for transmitting or receiving other information to the terminal 115 on one end side.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
- The fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be in contact with the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a. Thereby, the distance between the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 and the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a can be reduced. Therefore, a conductive tampering jig such as a wire is inserted through the upper play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. fraudulent act of causing contact with the fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 112 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 113 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4; can be prevented.

・The front case body is in a state where the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are in contact with the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. 121 may be fixed to the back case body 122. In this configuration, the second guide section 182 guides the front case body 121 upward with respect to the back case body 122 and the main control board 61 until the lower upright wall sections 101c to 104c abut against the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b. do. In this way, by bringing the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 156b to 159b into contact with each other, the space between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 156b to 159b is created. Fraudulent acts such as inserting conductive tampering tools such as wires into the device can be prevented.

-Instead of the configuration in which the back case body 122 is provided with a second guide portion 182 that guides the front case body 121 upward relative to the back case body 122 and the main control board 61 by contacting the front case body 121. , a second guide portion is attached to the front case body 121, which guides the front case body 121 upward relative to the back case body 122 and the main control board 61 by contacting the main control board 61 fixed to the back case body 122. A configuration may also be provided. Specifically, a second guide portion is integrally formed in the front facing plate portion 141 of the front case body 121 at the lower part of the front facing plate portion 141 so as to protrude toward the main control board 61 side. The second guide portion is used for the first to seventh guide portions in the process in which the front case body 121 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 123 while the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 175 to 178. After the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166, they come into contact with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61, and the back case body 122 and A guide surface is provided for guiding the front case body 121 upward relative to the main control board 61. The guide surface is inclined downward in the direction from the front facing plate portion 141 to the back facing plate portion 123 (to the left in FIG. 17(a)). By sliding the front case body 121 toward the back facing plate part 123 with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 in contact with the guide surface, the back case body 122 and the main control board 61 The front case body 121 is guided upward, and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are provided in the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. 159b approaches.

In this way, the front case body 121 may be provided with a second guide portion that contacts the main control board 61 and guides the front case body 121 upward with respect to the back case body 122 and the main control board 61. , the play that exists between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is - The play can be smaller than the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. .

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main controller 230 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

The configuration of the main control device 230 in this embodiment will be explained in detail based on FIGS. 34 to 38. 34(a) is a front view of the main controller 230 in this embodiment, FIG. 34(b) is a front view of the main controller 230 showing the fifth connector CN5 in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 34(c) is a front view of the main controller 230 in this embodiment. 34(d) is a front view of the main control device 230 showing an enlarged view of the sixth connector CN6, and FIG. 34(d) is a front view of the main control device 230 showing an enlarged view of the seventh connector CN7. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the main control device 230 seen from the front side, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the main control device 230 seen from the back side. Further, FIG. 37(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector CN1, and FIG. 37(b) is an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2. 34(a), and FIG. 37(c) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector CN3. 34(d) is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the main control device 230 includes a board box 231 that accommodates the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 35, the board box 231 includes a front case body 232 that covers the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, and first to fourth boxes sandwiched between the main control board 61 and the front case body 232. It includes a connector cover 233 that surrounds the connectors CN1 to CN4, and a back case body 234 that covers the back surface 61f (FIG. 36) of the main control board 61, which is the opposite side of the element mounting surface 61e. These front case body 232, connector cover 233, and back case body 234 are made of colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. Thereby, the element mounting surface 61e and the substrate back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 231 can be visually recognized from outside the board box 231. Note that the material forming the front case body 232, connector cover 233, and back case body 234 is not limited to transparent polycarbonate resin, and may be transparent acrylic resin, or even colored transparent resin. good.

As shown in FIG. 35, the back case body 234 includes a back side opposing plate portion 235 formed in a horizontally long rectangular and substantially plate shape and facing the board back surface 61f (FIG. 36) of the main control board 61. The back side facing plate portion 235 has a board facing surface 235a that faces the main control board 61. A pair of upper and lower partition walls 236 and 237 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate portion 235, with the upper and lower long sides of the board facing surface 235a protruding toward the main control board 61 side. In addition, a first left partition wall 238 and a second left partition wall 239 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate portion 235, with the upper and lower parts of the left short side of the board facing surface 235a protruding toward the main control board 61 side. At the same time, the upper and lower parts of the right short side of the substrate facing surface 235a are made to protrude toward the main control board 61 side, and the right side first partition wall 241 and the right side second partition wall 242 are integrally formed. The back case body 234 is provided with a back side accommodating portion 243 that can accommodate a part of the back side of the front case body 232 by the back side opposing plate portion 235 and these partition walls 236 to 239, 241, and 242.

The back side facing plate section 235 has cylindrical board fixing bosses 244 to 244, which are used for fixing the main control board 61 to the back case body 234, at the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the board facing surface 235a. 247 are integrally formed. The board fixing bosses 244 to 247 protrude from the board facing surface 235a toward the main control board 61, and the free ends of the board fixing bosses 244 to 247 have screw holes (not shown) that allow the main control board 61 to be fixed with screws. ) is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 36, board fixing through holes are provided at the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the main control board 61 so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the board fixing bosses 244 to 247. 251 to 254 are formed. These four board fixing through holes 251 to 254 are provided in one-to-one correspondence to the four board fixing bosses 244 to 247 described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the back case body 234 by being screwed to the board fixing bosses 244 to 247 from the element mounting surface 61e side. This brings the main control board 61 into a state where it is integrated with the back case body 234. In this state, the board back surface 61f (FIG. 36) of the main control board 61 faces the board facing surface 235a with a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-back direction).

As shown in FIG. 35, the front case body 232 sandwiches the MPU 63 (FIG. 9(a)) and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9(a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. A horizontally long rectangular front facing plate portion 261 is provided which faces the element mounting surface 61e. As shown in FIG. 36, the front facing plate portion 261 has an element facing surface 261a facing the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 35). A pair of upper and lower standing walls 262 and 263 are integrally formed on the front facing plate portion 261, with the upper and lower long sides of the element facing surface 261a raised toward the back side (back case body 234 side). At the same time, a pair of left and right standing walls 264 and 265 are integrally formed with the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 261a standing up on the back side (back case body 234 side). The upper standing wall 262 and the lower standing wall 263 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the left standing wall 264 and the right standing wall 265 face each other at a prescribed interval in the horizontal direction. The front case body 232 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped board accommodating part 266 that is opened to the back side by the front facing plate part 261 and these upstanding walls 262 to 265, and can accommodate the main control board 61. ing.

As shown in FIG. 35, first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 34(a)) are connected to the main control board 61 at positions facing the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61 on the front facing plate portion 261. A recess 267 corresponding to the connector group is formed to be exposed on the surface of the connector 230 . The connector group corresponding recess 267 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 261 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 34(a), the connector group corresponding recess 267 is located at the bottom of the connector group corresponding recess 267, with the connector cover 233 in between, and substantially the entire element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 35) of the main control board 61. It includes opposing horizontally long rectangular connector group corresponding plate portions 267a. As shown in FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b) and FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b), the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a is in contact with the connector cover 233. As shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), the connector group corresponding plate part 267a is penetrated in the thickness direction to connect the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3, and the like. A first connector insertion hole 271, a second connector insertion hole 272, a third connector insertion hole 273, and a fourth connector insertion hole 274 are formed into which the fourth connector CN4 is inserted. These first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 are horizontally long rectangular through holes.

Next, the configuration of the connector cover 233 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the connector cover 233 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape. The connector cover 233 has the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 mounted on the main control board 61 in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 34(a)). A first cover-side insertion hole 275, a second cover-side insertion hole 276, a third cover-side insertion hole 277, and a fourth cover-side insertion hole 278 are formed to allow the insertion thereof. These first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are through holes formed by penetrating the connector cover 233 in the thickness direction.

As shown in FIG. 36, the connector cover 233 is fixed to the back surface of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. The connector group corresponding plate part 267a has a pair of left and right cover position adjustment bosses 281, 282 on the back surface of the connector group corresponding plate part 267a to prevent the fixing position of the connector cover 233 from shifting with respect to the connector group corresponding plate part 267a. are integrally formed. The cover position adjustment bosses 281 and 282 protrude from the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a toward the back side (toward the main control board 61 side).

A pair of left and right cover position adjustment holes 283 and 284 through which cover position adjustment bosses 281 and 282 can be inserted are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the connector cover 233. The cover position adjustment holes 283 and 284 are through holes that penetrate the connector cover 233 in the thickness direction. One plate surface of the connector cover 233 is an adhesive surface coated with an adhesive for fixing the connector cover 233 to the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. The connector cover 233 is attached to the connector group corresponding plate part 267a from the back side of the connector group corresponding plate part 267a so that the cover position adjustment holes 283 and 284 are inserted into the cover position adjustment bosses 281 and 282. It is fixed to the front case body 232 by.

As shown in FIGS. 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b), the first cover side insertion hole 275 is an insertion hole corresponding to the first connector insertion hole 271, and the second cover side insertion hole 275 is an insertion hole corresponding to the first connector insertion hole 271. The insertion hole 276 is an insertion hole corresponding to the second connector insertion hole 272, the third cover side insertion hole 277 is an insertion hole corresponding to the third connector insertion hole 273, and the fourth cover side insertion hole 278 is an insertion hole corresponding to the fourth connector insertion hole 272. This is an insertion hole corresponding to the connector insertion hole 274. The first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are formed one size smaller than the corresponding connector insertion holes 271 to 274. The opening areas of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are narrower than the opening areas of the corresponding connector insertion holes 271 to 274. The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 275a to 278a to the lower peripheral edge 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 271a to 274a of the corresponding connector insertion hole 271 to 274. It is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension from side peripheral edge portions 271b to 274b.

When the connector cover 233 is fixed to the front case body 232 (FIG. 36), the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are in communication with the corresponding connector insertion holes 271 to 274. There is. The upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover-side insertion holes 275 to 278 are located lower than the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the corresponding connector insertion holes 271 to 274, and The lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are located higher than the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of the corresponding connector insertion holes 271 to 274. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into both the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and exposed to the surface of the main controller 230. Then, male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be accepted.

The vertical dimension from the upper periphery 275a to 278a to the lower periphery 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is the upper upstanding wall part 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is set approximately 0.8 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end to the lower end of the locking receivers 101h to 104h. This allows the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to be inserted into the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. The vertical dimension of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b to the lower end of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is set approximately 1.8 mm larger than the actual size. Therefore, in a state where the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, the upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes are inserted. Between the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the holes 275 to 278, and between the lower standing wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. , a total play of approximately 1.8 mm occurs.

The connector cover 233 is present in the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 in a range facing the connector group mounting area 88 (FIG. 35) in which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are mounted. As shown in FIGS. 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b), the connector cover 233 is connected to the element mounting surface 61e in the front-rear direction (FIGS. 37(a), (b) and 38(b)). a) and (b) in the left-right direction) with a predetermined interval (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm interval), and between the main control board 61 and the connector cover 233 are the first to There are fixed portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 in the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. There is some play between these fixing parts 111b to 116b and the connector cover 233.

The connector cover 233 is a member smaller than the front case body 232. Errors in the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a to the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 that may occur when the connector cover 233 is molded with resin are This is smaller than the error in the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge portions 271a to 274a to the lower peripheral edge portions 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 that may occur when resin molding. The vertical dimensions of the first to fourth cover-side insertion holes 275 to 278 formed in the connector cover 233, which is a member smaller than the front case body 232, correspond to the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 formed in the front case body 232. By setting the vertical dimension to be smaller than the vertical dimension of The play around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be reduced while allowing the connectors to be inserted into the four connector insertion holes 271 to 274.

Since the front case body 232 that covers most of the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61 and the connector cover 233 in which the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are formed are separate members, The connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61 allows the front case body 232 having a common shape to be used in a plurality of models having different types and arrangements of connectors mounted on the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61. The connector cover 233 can be selected for each model according to the type and arrangement of the connector mounted on the machine.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are mainly mounted at positions facing the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a of the main control board 61 on the front facing plate portion 261. Fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 285 to 287 are formed to be exposed on the surface of the control device 230, and the fifth to seventh connector corresponding plate parts 285a of these fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 285 to 287 are formed. - 287a are formed with fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293 through which corresponding connectors CN5 to CN7 can be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 are provided at the four corners of the element facing surface 261a of the front facing plate portion 261, and boss insertion holes 301 to 297 are provided at the four corners of the main control board 61. 304 is provided. Similarly to the first embodiment, the front case body 232 is placed in a state where the position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 301 to 304, and then guided by the position adjustment bosses 294 to 297. It is slid toward the back case body 234 side.

FIG. 39 is a longitudinal sectional view of the main control device 230 taken along a cutting plane passing through the first connector CN1 and the sixth connector CN6 (line EE in FIG. 34(a)). As shown in FIG. 39, the upper partition wall 236 of the back case body 234 is provided with a first guide portion 305 that guides the front case body 232 downward. The first guide part 305 is a front case body that comes into contact with the first guide part 305 in the process of being slid toward the back side facing plate part 235 with the position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 inserted into the boss insertion holes 301 to 304. 232 approximately 0.7 mm downward. Similarly to the first embodiment, after the position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 301 to 304, the front case body 232 is guided downward by the first guide part 305, so that the first ~The fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located at the center in the vertical direction of the corresponding connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the corresponding cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 correspond. It is located at the center of the connector insertion holes 291 to 293 in the vertical direction. The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the corresponding cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the corresponding cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, respectively. It can be inserted into the connector insertion holes 291 to 293.

As shown in FIG. 39, the lower partition wall 237 of the back case body 234 is provided with a second guide part 306 that guides the front case body 232 upward after being guided downward by the first guide part 305. There is. The second guide part 306 guides the front case body 232 in contact with the second guide part 306 upward by approximately 0.7 mm. When the front case body 232 is guided upward by the second guide section 306, the connector cover 233 follows the front case body 232 and is guided upward. As the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 are guided upward by the second guide part 306, the first to The lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b of the fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are in a state of being close to each other. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a tampering jig will be inserted between the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c.

In a state where the front case body 232 is fixed to the back case body 234 with the connector cover 233 and the main control board 61 in between, as shown in FIG. extends downward from a position lower than the center in the transverse direction of the first housing 101 (closer to the lower standing wall 101c), and extends below the lower standing wall 101c and the first connector insertion hole 271. It extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the peripheral edge part 271b and between the lower standing wall part 101c and the lower peripheral edge part 275b of the first cover side insertion hole 275. ing. Further, the fixing portion 112b of the other end side terminal 112 extends upward from a position above the center in the transverse direction of the first housing 101 (closer to the upper standing wall portion 101b), and is connected to the upper standing wall portion 101b. Along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the upper peripheral edge 271a of the first connector insertion hole 271 and between the upper standing wall 101b and the upper peripheral edge 275a of the first cover insertion hole 275. It extends as if straddling it.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the fixed portion 113b of the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2 extends downward from the center position in the lateral direction of the second housing 102, and connects to the lower upright wall portion 102c. 2 to the lower peripheral edge 272b of the second connector insertion hole 272, and between the lower standing wall 102c and the lower peripheral edge 276b of the second cover insertion hole 276 to the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. It extends as if straddling it. As shown in FIG. 38(a), the fixed portion 114b of the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 extends downward from the center position in the lateral direction of the third housing 103, and connects to the lower upright wall portion 103c. The element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 is connected between the lower peripheral edge 273b of the third connector insertion hole 273 and between the lower standing wall 103c and the lower peripheral edge 277b of the third cover insertion hole 277. It extends as if straddling it.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), the fixed portion 115b of the one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector is located at a position lower than the center of the fourth housing 104 in the width direction (closer to the lower upstanding wall portion 104c). It extends downward between the lower upright wall 104c and the lower peripheral edge 274b of the fourth connector insertion hole 274, and between the lower upright wall 104c and the lower peripheral edge 278b of the fourth cover insertion hole 278. It extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 so as to straddle between the main control board 61 and the main control board 61. Further, the fixing portion 116b of the other end terminal 116 extends upward from a position above the center in the width direction of the fourth housing 104 (close to the upper standing wall portion 104b), and is connected to the upper standing wall portion 104b. Along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the fourth connector insertion hole 274 and the upper peripheral edge 274a and between the upper standing wall 104b and the upper peripheral edge 278a of the fourth cover insertion hole 278. It extends as if straddling it.

When the front case body 232 is fixed to the back case body 234 with the connector cover 233 and the main control board 61 in between, as shown in FIGS. 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b), , the play that exists between the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is This is smaller than the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge portions 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. This eliminates the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. Fraudulent acts such as inserting conductive tampering tools such as wires are prevented.

It is preferable that the dimension of the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is 0.8 mm or less, More preferably, it is 0.5 mm or less. By setting the dimension of the play to 0.8 mm or less, a conductive tampering jig such as a wire can be inserted through the play to remove the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, and the third terminal 111 of the first connector CN1. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of contacting the fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. By setting the dimension of the play to 0.5 mm or less, it is difficult to insert a tampering jig into the play, and the effect of preventing the cheating can be enhanced.

The play between the upper standing wall parts 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge parts 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is 104b and the upper peripheral portions 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. As a result, the play between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge portions 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 allows wires, etc. The possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive tampering jig is reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 37(a), (b) and 38(a), (b), in the vicinity of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, the back of the connector cover 233 (FIGS. 37(a), ( b) and the right side in FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b), there is a connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. Therefore, the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge portions 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, - Unauthorized use of wires, etc. due to the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 When attempting to insert a jig, the insertion angle of the tampering jig is limited by the presence of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. In this way, by configuring the connector group corresponding plate part 267a to exist behind the connector cover 233 around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, the connector group corresponding plate part 267a is formed. Even if the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 are larger than the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 formed in the connector cover 233, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 The vertical play of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 existing between the connector cover 233 and the connector cover 233 can prevent fraudulent activities such as insertion of a fraudulent jig.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A connector cover 233 that surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is provided between the main control board 61 and the front case body 232. The play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is This is smaller than the play that exists between the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. Therefore, the connector cover 233 allows the connector cover 233 to be exposed to the outside of the board box 231 through the play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. The range of the main control board 61 can be narrowed. As a result, a conductive tampering jig, such as a wire, is inserted into the play that exists between the upper standing wall parts 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral parts 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. If a fraudulent act is committed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent jig will reach the terminals 111 to 116, wiring pattern, etc. present on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating signals using a conductive fraud jig.

The connector cover 233 exists between the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a and the fixing portions 111b to 116b at the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Since the connector cover 233 is located closer to the connector group corresponding plate part 267a than the fixed parts 111b to 116b, the connector cover 233 can prevent the tampering jig from coming into contact with the fixed parts 111b to 116b. can. Since the connector cover 233 is located closer to the main control board 61 than the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a, it is possible to prevent the connector cover 233 from being illegally removed.

The opening area of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 formed in the connector cover 233 is the opening area of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 formed in the connector group corresponding plate part 267a. narrower than Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the connector cover 233 is not provided and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted only into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 276, ~The area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box 231 around the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud jig is brought into electrical contact with an area of the main control board 61 that is exposed to the outside of the board box 231.

A second guide portion 306 is integrated with the lower partition wall 237 of the back case body 234 to guide the front case body 232 upward as it slides toward the back side facing plate portion 235 while being guided by the position adjustment bosses 294 to 297. It is formed. When the front case body 232 is guided upward by the second guide portion 306, the connector cover 233 is guided upward following the front case body 232, and is guided upward through the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. The lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are in a state of being close to each other. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a tampering jig will be inserted between the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b and the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
- A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined play (specifically, about 1 mm play) is provided between the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a and the connector cover 233. Thereby, the distance from the fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 to the surface of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a can be increased. Therefore, from the front case body 232 side, the upper side play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, or the lower standing wall part 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 by inserting a conductive tampering jig such as a wire into the lower play. - It is possible to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts of contacting the fixed portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

- The connector cover 233 may be configured to easily bend when it comes into contact with the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Specifically, the connector cover 233 is made of colorless and transparent polyethylene resin. Note that the material forming the connector cover 233 is not limited to a colorless and transparent polyethylene resin, but may be a colorless and transparent urethane resin, or may be a colored and transparent material. As already explained in the second embodiment, the front case body 232 is made of polycarbonate resin. The plate thickness of the connector cover 233 is approximately 0.5 mm, which is thinner than the plate thickness (approximately 1 mm) of the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the front case body 232. The connector cover 233 has higher flexibility than the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. When the front case body 232 is slid toward the back facing plate portion 235 with the position adjustment bosses inserted into the boss insertion holes, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 formed on the connector cover 233. When it comes into contact with the peripheral edges 275a to 278a, 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, the connector cover 233 is bent by being pushed by the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is possible to continue sliding the front case body 232 into the back case body 234.

Therefore, in a configuration in which the connector cover 233 is easily deformable, the upper peripheral edge 275a of the first to fourth cover-side insertion holes 275 to 278 can be The vertical dimension from 278a to 275b to 278b can be set small. This eliminates the play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge portions 275a to 278a of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and The play that exists between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 is set to be small. Can be done.

The surface of the connector cover 233, except for the portions protruding inside the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, is covered by a connector group corresponding plate portion 267a. As a result, the connector cover 233 existing between the housings 101 to 104 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 is turned over, and unauthorized use is made from the turned over part. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a jig will be inserted.

・With the front case in a state where the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 are in contact with each other. The body 232 may be fixed to the back case body 234. In this configuration, the second guide section 306 moves the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 toward the back case body 234 and the main control board 61 until the lower upstanding walls 101c to 104c abut the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b. guide upward. In this way, by bringing the lower upstanding walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b into contact with each other, there is a gap between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b. Fraudulent acts such as inserting conductive tampering tools such as wires into the device can be prevented.

- The back case body 234 is provided with a second guide portion 306 that guides the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 upward relative to the back case body 234 and the main control board 61 by contacting the front case body 232. In place of this structure, a second structure is provided that guides the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 upwardly with respect to the back case body 234 and the main control board 61 by contacting the main control board 61 fixed to the back case body 234. The guide portion may be provided on the front case body 232.

Specifically, a second guide portion is integrally formed in the front facing plate portion 261 of the front case body 232 at the lower part of the front facing plate portion 261 so as to protrude from the element facing surface 261a toward the main control board 61 side. ing. The second guide portion is used for the first to seventh guide portions in the process in which the front case body 232 is slid toward the back side facing plate portion 235 while the position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 301 to 304. After the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted into the first to seventh connector insertion holes 271 to 274, 291 to 293, they come into contact with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61, and the back case body 234 and A guide surface is provided for guiding the front case body 232 upward with respect to the main control board 61. The guide surface is inclined downward in the direction from the front facing plate portion 261 to the back facing plate portion 235 (to the left in FIG. 39). By sliding the front case body 232 toward the back side facing plate part 235 with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 in contact with the guide surface, the back case body 234 and the main control board 61 The front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 are guided upward, and the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are provided below the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. The side peripheral edges 275b to 278b approach each other.

In this way, the front case body 232 is provided with a second guide portion that contacts the main control board 61 and guides the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 upward with respect to the back case body 234 and the main control board 61. Even in a configuration in which the connectors CN1 to CN4 are connected to each other, the connectors CN1 to CN4 exist between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278. Play can be reduced.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main controller 310 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

The configuration of the main control device 310 in this embodiment will be explained in detail based on FIGS. 40 to 44. FIG. 40(a) is a front view of the main control device 310 in this embodiment, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the main control device 310 showing the vicinity of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 in an enlarged manner. , FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller 310 seen from the front side, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller 310 seen from the back side. Further, FIG. 43(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the first connector CN1, and FIG. 43(b) is an enlarged view of the periphery of the second connector CN2. FIG. 44(a) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the third connector CN3; 40(b) is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 40(a) showing an enlarged view of the periphery of the fourth connector CN4.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), the main control device 310 includes the main control board 61 already described in the first embodiment, and a board box 311 that accommodates the main control board 61. Similar to the first embodiment, the main control board 61 has an MPU 63 (FIG. 9(a)), first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7, and various elements (resistance 91, capacitor 92, A transistor 93 and an IC 94 (FIG. 9(a), etc.) are mounted, and the plate surface on one side is an element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41).

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the board box 311 includes a front case body 312 that covers the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41) of the main control board 61, and a front case body 312 that covers the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 on the opposite side of the element mounting surface 61e. It includes a back case body 313 that covers the board back surface 61f (FIG. 42), which is a board surface, and a connector compatible plate 314 that is fixed to the main control board 61 and surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The connector compatible plate 314 exists between the main control board 61 and the front case body 312. These front case body 312, back case body 313, and connector compatible plate 314 are made of colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin. Thereby, the element mounting surface 61e and the substrate back surface 61f of the main control board 61 housed in the board box 311 can be visually recognized from outside the board box 311. Note that the material forming the front case body 312, the back case body 313, and the connector compatible plate 314 is not limited to transparent polycarbonate resin, but may also be transparent acrylic resin, or even colored transparent resin. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 41, the back case body 313 includes a back side opposing plate portion 315 formed in a horizontally long rectangular and substantially plate shape and facing the board back surface 61f of the main control board 61 (FIG. 42). The back side facing plate portion 315 has a board facing surface 315a that faces the main control board 61. A pair of upper and lower partition walls 316 and 317 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate portion 315, with the upper and lower long sides of the board facing surface 315a protruding toward the main control board 61 side. Further, a first left partition wall 318 and a second left partition wall 319 are integrally formed on the back side facing plate portion 315, with the upper and lower parts of the left short side of the board facing surface 315a protruding toward the main control board 61 side. At the same time, the upper and lower parts of the right short side of the substrate facing surface 315a are made to protrude toward the main control board 61 side, and the right side first partition wall 321 and the right side second partition wall 322 are integrally formed.

The upper partition wall 316 and the lower partition wall 317 face each other with a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Further, the first left partition wall 318 and the second left partition wall 319 and the first right partition wall 321 and the second right partition wall 322 face each other with a predetermined interval in the lateral direction. The back case body 313 is provided with a back side accommodating part 323 that can accommodate a part of the back side of the front case body 312 by the back side opposing plate part 315 and these partition walls 316 to 319, 321, and 322.

The back side facing plate portion 315 has cylindrical board fixing bosses 324 to 324, which are used for fixing the main control board 61 to the back case body 313, at the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the board facing surface 315a. 327 is integrally formed. The board fixing bosses 324 to 327 protrude from the board facing surface 315a toward the main control board 61, and the free ends of the board fixing bosses 324 to 327 have screw holes (not shown) that allow the main control board 61 to be fixed with screws. ) is formed. Further, board fixing through holes 331 to 334 are provided at the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side when viewed from the front of the main control board 61, so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the board fixing bosses 324 to 327. It is formed. These four board fixing through holes 331 to 334 are provided in one-to-one correspondence to the four board fixing bosses 324 to 327 described above. The main control board 61 is fixed to the front side of the back case body 313 by being screwed to the board fixing bosses 324 to 327 from the element mounting surface 61e side. This brings the main control board 61 into a state where it is integrated with the back case body 313. In this state, the board back surface 61f (FIG. 42) of the main control board 61 faces the board facing surface 315a with a predetermined distance in the depth direction (front-back direction).

Next, the configuration of the connector compatible plate 314 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 41, the connector compatible plate 314 includes a plate-like portion 335 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. The plate portion 335 includes a first plate side insertion hole 336 through which the first connector CN1 (FIG. 40(a)) mounted on the main control board 61 can be inserted, and a second connector CN2 (FIG. 40(a)). ), the third plate side insertion hole 338 allows the third connector CN3 (FIG. 40(a)) to be inserted therethrough, and the fourth connector CN4 (FIG. 40(a)). A fourth plate-side insertion hole 339 is formed to allow insertion. These first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 are horizontally long rectangular through holes.

As shown in FIG. 42, the plate portion 335 includes a pair of left and right plate fixing bosses 341 at both longitudinal ends of the plate portion 335 for screwing the connector compatible plate 314 to the main control board 61. 342 is integrally formed, and a pair of left and right plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 for preventing the fixing position of the connector corresponding plate 314 from shifting with respect to the main control board 61 are also integrally formed. The plate fixing bosses 341 and 342 and the plate position adjustment bosses 343 and 344 protrude toward the main control board 61 side, and the protruding ends of the plate fixing bosses 341 and 342 have screw holes ( (not shown) is formed.

As shown in FIG. 41, at both longitudinal ends of the connector group mounting area 88 on the main control board 61, there are a pair of left and right plates into which screws 349 for fixing the connector compatible plate 314 to the main control board 61 can be inserted. Fixing holes 345, 346 and plate position adjustment holes 347, 348 are formed through which the free ends of plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 (FIG. 42) extending from the plate-like portion 335 of the connector compatible plate 314 can be inserted. . These plate fixing holes 345, 346 and plate position adjustment holes 347, 348 are through holes that penetrate the main control board 61 in the thickness direction.

As shown in FIG. 42, the protruding dimensions of the plate position adjustment bosses 343, 344 are larger than the protruding dimensions of the plate fixing bosses 341, 342. After the connector compatible plate 314 is inserted into the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 to which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 correspond, the two plate position adjustment bosses 343 and 344 correspond to the two plate position adjustment holes 347. , 348. By inserting the two plate position adjustment bosses 343 and 344 into the two corresponding plate position adjustment holes 347 and 348, the fixed position of the connector compatible plate 314 with respect to the main control board 61 is determined. Thereafter, the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61 by screwing the plate fixing bosses 341 and 342 to the main control board 61 from the back side of the main control board 61.

The connector compatible plate 314 covers almost the entire connector group mounting area 88 (FIG. 41) in which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 40(a)) are mounted on the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41). . As shown in FIGS. 43(a), (b) and 44(a), (b), the connector compatible plate 314 is connected to the element mounting surface 61e in the front-back direction They face each other at a predetermined interval (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm interval) in the left-right direction in (a) and (b), and there is a There are fixed portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. There is some play between these fixing parts 111b to 116b and the connector compatible plate 314.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a), (b) and 44(a), (b), when the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are , are present near the center in the vertical direction of the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. In a state where the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge portions of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 336a to 339a, and between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 336b to 339b of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. There is a play of approximately 1 mm.

Next, the configuration of the front case body 312 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 41, the front case body 312 sandwiches the MPU 63 (FIG. 9(a)) and various elements 91 to 94 (FIG. 9(a)) mounted on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. A horizontally long rectangular front facing plate portion 351 is provided which faces the element mounting surface 61e. As shown in FIG. 42, the front facing plate portion 351 has an element facing surface 351a facing the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41). A pair of upper and lower standing walls 352 and 353 are integrally formed on the front facing plate portion 351, with the upper and lower long sides of the element facing surface 351a standing up on the back side (back case body 313 side). At the same time, a pair of left and right standing walls 354 and 355 are integrally formed with the left and right short sides of the element facing surface 351a standing up on the back side (back case body 313 side). The upper standing wall 352 and the lower standing wall 353 face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the left standing wall 354 and the right standing wall 355 face each other at a prescribed interval in the horizontal direction. The front case body 312 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped board accommodating part 356 that is opened to the back side by the front facing plate part 351 and these upstanding walls 352 to 355, and can accommodate the main control board 61. ing.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 (FIG. 40(a)) are connected to the main control device at positions facing the connector group mounting area 88 of the main control board 61 on the front facing plate portion 351. A recess 361 corresponding to the connector group is formed to be exposed on the surface of the connector 310 . The connector group corresponding recess 361 is formed by recessing the front facing plate portion 351 toward the main control board 61. As shown in FIG. 40(a), the connector group corresponding recess 361 has a horizontally long rectangular connector group corresponding plate portion facing the element mounting surface 61e (FIG. 41) of the main control board 61 at the bottom of the connector group corresponding recess 361. 361a.

As shown in FIG. 40(b), the connector group corresponding plate part 361a is penetrated in the board thickness direction, and the first connector CN1, the second connector CN2, the third connector CN3, and the like are connected to each other. A first front connector insertion hole 362, a second front connector insertion hole 363, a third front connector insertion hole 364, and a fourth front connector insertion hole 365 are formed into which the fourth connector CN4 is inserted. These first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are horizontally long rectangular through holes. In this embodiment, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 include first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 formed in the front case body 312 and plate side insertion holes 336 formed in the connector corresponding plate 314. 339, it becomes exposed on the surface of the main control device 310 and can receive male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4.

As shown in FIG. 41, fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are connected to the main control device 310 at positions facing the fifth to seventh connector mounting areas 85a to 87a of the main control board 61 on the front facing plate portion 351. Recesses 371 to 373 corresponding to the fifth to seventh connectors are formed to be exposed on the surface of the connector. As shown in FIG. 40(a), the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 371 to 373 are located at the bottom of the fifth to seventh connector corresponding recesses 371 to 373 on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 (see FIG. 41). ), and the fifth to seventh connector compatible plate parts 371a to 373a are provided with horizontally long rectangular plate parts 371a to 373a facing the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7. Fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376 are formed into which the connectors are inserted. Similarly to the first embodiment, the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 374 to 376 to be exposed on the surface of the main control device 310, - Male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 can be accepted.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a), (b) and 44(a), (b), from the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 to the lower peripheral edge portion 362b to The vertical dimension up to 365b is set to be approximately 3 mm larger than the dimension from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b to the lower end of the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. . Therefore, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The vertical dimension of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 is from the upper end of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b to the lower end of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c in the corresponding first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Approximately 4mm larger than the previous size. Therefore, when the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding connector insertion holes 362 to 365, the upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365a of the connector insertion holes 362 to 365 There is a total play of about 4 mm between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the connector insertion holes 362 to 365.

The first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 are formed one size smaller than the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 corresponding to the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. . The opening areas of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 are narrower than the corresponding first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 336a to the lower peripheral edge 336b of the first plate-side insertion hole 336 is approximately 2 mm longer than the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 362a to the lower peripheral edge 362b of the first front connector insertion hole 362. The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 337a to the lower peripheral edge 337b of the second plate-side insertion hole 337 is smaller than the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 363a to the lower peripheral edge 363b of the second front-side connector insertion hole 363. The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 338a to the lower peripheral edge 338b of the third plate-side insertion hole 338 is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 364a to the lower peripheral edge 364b of the third front-side connector insertion hole 364. The vertical dimension from the upper peripheral edge 339a to the lower peripheral edge 339b of the fourth plate-side insertion hole 339 is approximately 2 mm smaller than that of the fourth front-side connector insertion hole 365 from the upper peripheral edge 365a to the lower peripheral edge 365b. It is approximately 2 mm smaller than the vertical dimension.

The connector compatible plate 314 is a component that surrounds the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, and is a smaller component than the front case body 312 that covers most of the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. In order to fix the connector compatible plate 314 to the main control board 61, the work of inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 is performed using the seven connectors mounted on the main control board 61. This is an easier task than inserting the connectors CN1 to CN7 into the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 and the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376. Therefore, the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 formed in the connector compatible plate 314 can be made to be slightly smaller than the front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 formed in the front case body 312. By using the connector compatible plate 314, it is possible to prevent the play present above the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 from becoming large while suppressing the assembly process from becoming complicated. .

As shown in FIG. 42, position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 are provided at the four corners of the element facing surface 351a of the front facing plate portion 351, as in the first embodiment. Further, as shown in FIG. 40(a), boss insertion holes 385 to 388 are provided at the four corners of the main control board 61. The boss insertion holes 385 to 388 are long holes that extend vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimensions of the boss insertion holes 385 to 388 are such that the front case body 312 is allowed to move approximately 4 mm in the vertical direction when the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385 to 388. , is set approximately 4 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384.

In the process of assembling the main control device 310, the main control board 61 is fixed to the back case body 313 with screws, as described above. Thereafter, the connector compatible plate 314 is screwed onto the element mounting surface 61e side of the main control board 61. After that, the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385 to 388 of the main control board 61, and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. and after the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the corresponding fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376, the free ends of the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 are on the back side. The front case body 312 is slid toward the back side facing plate 315 until it comes into contact with the facing plate 315 .

After that, the front case body 312 slides approximately 2 mm upward until the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 come into contact with the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385 to 388 and the front case body 312 cannot be slid upward any further. be done. As already explained, the boss insertion holes 385 to 388 have vertical holes that allow the front case body 312 to move approximately 2 mm upward when the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 385 to 388. It has dimensions.

When the upward sliding of the front case body 312 is completed, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are the lower upright walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. They are approaching each other at a predetermined distance. The lower play that exists between the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 and the lower standing walls 101c to 104c is preferably 0.8 mm or less, more preferably 0. .5mm or less. By setting the play on the lower side to 0.8 mm or less, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a conductive tampering jig such as a wire will be inserted through the play on the lower side. By setting the play to 0.5 mm or less, this possibility can be further reduced.

After that, when the front case body 312 has finished sliding upward and the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 are located at the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385 to 388, the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are Fixed with screws. When the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are screwed together, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are connected to the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 and the corresponding front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. By being inserted through both of the connectors, the connectors are exposed to the surface of the main controller 310, and can receive male connectors (not shown) corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. In this state, the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a of the front case body 312 is in contact with the plate-shaped portion 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314.

45(a) is a front view of the front case body 312, and FIG. 45(b) is a front view of the back case body 313. As shown in FIG. 45(a), the left side upright wall 354 is integrally formed with a front side first case fixing boss 391 at the end of the upright end of the left side upright wall 354, and the right side upright wall 355 is integrally formed with a front side first case fixing boss 391. , a front-side second case fixing boss 392 and a front-side third case fixing boss 393 are integrally formed at the end of the upright end of the right side standing wall 355. The front-side first case fixing boss 391 is provided approximately at the center of the left standing wall 354 in the vertical direction, and protrudes leftward from the left standing wall 354 . The second front case fixing boss 392 and the third front case fixing boss 393 are provided at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and protrude rightward from the right side upright wall 355. These case fixing bosses 391 to 393 are formed with through holes 391a to 393a through which screws 389 (FIG. 41) for fixing the front case body 312 to the back case body 313 are inserted.

As shown in FIG. 45(b), the back side facing plate part 315 of the back case body 313 has a back side first case fixing boss 394 integrally formed on the left short side of the back side facing plate part 315. A second back case fixing boss 395 and a third back case fixing boss 396 are integrally formed on the right short side of the back side facing plate portion 315. The back side first case fixing boss 394 corresponds to the front side first case fixing boss 391, the back side second case fixing boss 395 corresponds to the front side second case fixing boss 392, and the back side third case fixing boss 396 corresponds to the front side first case fixing boss 394. It corresponds to the third case fixing boss 393 on the front side. The back side first case fixing boss 394 is provided at a position between the left side first partition wall 318 and the left side second partition wall 319 in the vertical direction, and protrudes leftward from the back side opposing plate portion 315. Further, the back side second case fixing boss 395 and the back side third case fixing boss 396 are provided at a predetermined interval between the right side first partition wall 321 and the right side second partition wall 322 in the vertical direction. , protrudes to the right from the back side facing plate portion 315. Screw holes 394a to 396a are formed in these case fixing bosses 394 to 396 so that the front case body 312 can be fixed with screws.

FIG. 46(a) shows the positions of the through hole 391a formed in the first case fixing boss 391 on the front side and the screw hole 394a formed in the first case fixing boss 394 on the back side before the front case body 312 is slid upward. FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship, and FIG. 46(b) shows the through hole 391a formed in the front first case fixing boss 391 and the back first case fixing boss after the front case body 312 is slid upward. 394 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship with a screw hole 394a formed in 394. FIG. Before the front case body 312 is slid upward, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the through hole 391a of the first case fixing boss 391 on the front side and the screw hole 394a of the first case fixing boss 394 on the back side are , vertically shifted. Although not shown, similarly, the through holes 392a, 393a (FIG. 45(a)) of the second case fixing boss 392 on the front side and the third case fixing boss 393 on the front side, the second case fixing boss 395 on the back side and the third case fixing boss 395 on the back side The screw holes 395a, 396a (FIG. 45(b)) of the case fixing boss 396 are shifted in the vertical direction. For this reason, it is in a state where it cannot be fixed with screws as it is.

After the front case body 312 is slid upward, as shown in FIG. is resolved, and the through hole 391a and the screw hole 394a are in communication with each other. Although not shown, similarly, the through holes 392a, 393a (FIG. 45(a)) of the second case fixing boss 392 on the front side and the third case fixing boss 393 on the front side, the second case fixing boss 395 on the back side and the third case fixing boss 395 on the back side The screw holes 395a and 396a (FIG. 45(b)) of the case fixing boss 396 are in communication with each other. This makes it possible to fix the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 with screws. Due to the configuration in which the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 cannot be fixed with screws unless the front case body 312 is slid upward, the front case body 312 is not slid upward, This prevents the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 from being fixed together when the slide is only halfway completed.

In a state where the front case body 312 is fixed to the back case body 313 with the connector compatible plate 314 and the main control board 61 in between, as shown in FIG. 111b extends downward from a position lower than the center in the transverse direction of the first housing 101 (closer to the lower upright wall 101c), and is connected to the lower upright wall 101c and the first front connector insertion hole 362. It extends along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the lower peripheral edge 362b and between the lower standing wall 101c and the lower peripheral edge 336b of the first plate side insertion hole 336. There is. Further, the fixing portion 112b of the other end side terminal 112 extends upward from a position above the center in the transverse direction of the first housing 101 (closer to the upper standing wall portion 101b), and is connected to the upper standing wall portion 101b. Along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the upper peripheral edge 362a of the first front side connector insertion hole 362 and between the upper standing wall 101b and the upper peripheral edge 336a of the first plate side insertion hole 336. It extends as if straddling the area.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), the fixed portion 113b of the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2 extends downward from the center position in the lateral direction of the second housing 102, and connects to the lower upright wall portion 102c. The element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 is connected between the lower peripheral edge 363b of the second front connector insertion hole 363 and between the lower standing wall 102c and the lower peripheral edge 337b of the second plate side insertion hole 337. It extends along astride. As shown in FIG. 44(a), the fixed portion 114b of the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3 extends downward from the center position in the width direction of the third housing 103, and connects to the lower upright wall portion 103c. The element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 is connected between the lower peripheral edge 364b of the third front connector insertion hole 364 and between the lower standing wall 103c and the lower peripheral edge 338b of the third plate side insertion hole 338. It extends along astride.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the fixed portion 115b of the one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 is located at a position lower than the center in the width direction of the fourth housing 104 (closer to the lower upstanding wall portion 104c). It extends downward from the lower upright wall 104c and the lower peripheral edge 365b of the fourth front connector insertion hole 365, and between the lower upright wall 104c and the lower peripheral edge of the fourth plate side insertion hole 339. 339b along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Further, the fixing portion 116b of the other end terminal 116 extends upward from a position above the center in the width direction of the fourth housing 104 (close to the upper standing wall portion 104b), and is connected to the upper standing wall portion 104b. Along the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 between the upper peripheral edge 365a of the fourth front side connector insertion hole 365 and between the upper standing wall 104b and the upper peripheral edge 339a of the fourth plate side insertion hole 339. It extends as if straddling the area.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a), (b) and 44(a), (b), the upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 The size of the play that exists between the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a is greater than the size of the play that exists between the upper standing wall parts 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the front connector insertion holes 362 to 365. It's also small. As already explained, since the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, even if the front case body 312 (FIG. 42) is slid upward, the connector compatible plate 314 will not follow the front case body 312. Therefore, the play existing between the upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 336a to 339a does not widen due to the upward sliding of the front case body 312. As a result, a conductive tampering jig such as a wire is inserted between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being inserted.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61. In a state where the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the connector compatible plate 314 moves following the main control board 61. Therefore, by moving the front case body 312 with respect to the main control board 61 and the connector compatible plate 314 while the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 The positions of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 with respect to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are prevented while preventing the positions of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 from changing with respect to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. can be made possible to change.

The front case body 312 is fixed to the back case body 313 by screwing the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393 to the back first case fixing boss 394 to the back third case fixing boss 396. Fixed. In a state where the front case body 312 is fixed to the back case body 313, the lower side upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower side of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 The play that exists between the peripheral edges 362b to 365b is the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365 of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. 365a. Therefore, by fixing the front case body 312 to the back case body 313, the play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 362b to 365b is reduced. It is possible to maintain a state smaller than the play that exists between the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365a.

Before the front case body 312 is slid upward, the through holes 391a to 393a of the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393, and the through holes 391a to 393a of the front first case fixing boss 391 to the back side third case fixing boss 394 to the back side third case fixing boss The screw holes 394a to 396a of the boss 396 are shifted in the vertical direction, and the screws cannot be fixed as they are. After the front case body 312 is slid upward, the through holes 391a to 393a of the front first case fixing boss 391 to the front third case fixing boss 393 and the back first case fixing boss 394 to the back third case fixing boss 396 is eliminated, the through holes 391a to 393a are in communication with the screw holes 394a to 396a, and the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are fixed with screws. becomes possible. Due to the structure in which the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 cannot be fixed with screws unless the front case body 312 is slid upward, the front case body 312 is not slid upward, This prevents the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 from being fixed together when the slide is only completed halfway.

When the front case body 312 is released from being fixed to the back case body 313, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located above and below the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365. It can be set to a state where it exists in the center in the direction. In this state, compared to the state in which the front case body 312 is fixed to the back case body 313, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth front side The size of the play that exists between the connector insertion holes 362 to 365 and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b increases. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box 311, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 must be located at the vertical center of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Therefore, the work of inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 can be facilitated. After that, the play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 is The front case body 312 can be fixed to the back case body 313 in a state where the play is smaller than the play existing between the parts 362a to 365a. This allows the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b to be in close proximity to each other.

By moving the front case body 312 upward with respect to the main control board 61 and the connector corresponding plate 314, the upper peripheral edge of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 for the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 The upper side of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 with respect to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is prevented from changing the positions of 336a to 339a and lower peripheral edges 336b to 339b. The peripheral edges 362a-365a and the lower peripheral edges 362b-365b can be moved upward. This upward movement brings the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 closer to the lower upstanding wall parts 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. , the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the side peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b can be reduced. Due to the upward movement, the upper wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 exist between the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. Although the play becomes larger, the size of the play existing between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 does not change. Therefore, on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61, the area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box 311 becomes large around the upper upstanding wall parts 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is possible to reduce the area of the area exposed to the outside of the substrate box 311 around the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c while suppressing this.

A connector compatible plate 314 surrounding the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is provided between the main control board 61 and the front case body 312. The play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 is This is smaller than the play that exists between the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. For this reason, the connector compatible plate 314 allows the outside of the board box 311 to pass through the play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The exposed range of the main control board 61 can be narrowed. As a result, a conductive tampering jig, such as a wire, is inserted into the play that exists between the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. If a fraudulent act is committed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent jig will reach the terminals 111 to 116, wiring pattern, etc. present on the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating signals using a conductive fraud jig.

The connector corresponding plate 314 exists between the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a and the fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. Since the connector compatible plate 314 is located closer to the connector group compatible plate part 361a than the fixed parts 111b to 116b, the connector compatible plate 314 prevents the tampering jig from coming into contact with the fixed parts 111b to 116b. be able to. Since the connector compatible plate 314 is located closer to the main control board 61 than the connector group compatible plate portion 361a, it is possible to prevent the connector compatible plate 314 from being illegally removed.

The opening area of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 formed in the connector corresponding plate 314 is the same as that of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 formed in the connector group corresponding plate part 361a. narrower than the opening area. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the connector compatible plate 314 is not provided and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted only into the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365, the main control board 61 is The area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box 311 around the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud jig is brought into electrical contact with an area of the main control board 61 exposed to the outside of the board box 311.

<Another form of the third embodiment>
- A configuration in which the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61 in such a manner that the upper upstanding wall parts 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the connector compatible plate 314 are in contact with each other. You can also use it as Specifically, a pair of left and right plate fixing holes are provided at both longitudinal ends of the connector group mounting area 88 in the main control board 61 through which screws 349 for fixing the connector compatible plate 314 to the main control board 61 can be inserted. and a plate position adjustment hole through which the free ends of plate position adjustment bosses 343 and 344 extending from the plate-like portion 335 of the connector compatible plate 314 can be inserted. These plate fixing holes and plate position adjustment holes are through holes that penetrate the main control board 61 in the thickness direction. In this configuration, the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61 in such a manner that the upper upright wall parts 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the connector compatible plate 314 are in contact with each other. A plate fixing hole and a plate position adjustment hole are formed at the position where the plate is fixed.

In the process of assembling the main controller 310, the connector compatible plate 314 is inserted into the plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 to which the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 correspond, and then the two plate position adjustment bosses 343 and 344 are inserted into the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339. It is inserted into two corresponding plate position adjustment holes. By inserting the two plate position adjustment bosses 343 and 344 into the two corresponding plate position adjustment holes, the fixed position of the connector compatible plate 314 with respect to the main control board 61 is determined. Thereafter, the plate fixing bosses 341 and 342 are screwed to the main control board 61 from the back side of the main control board 61, thereby being fixed to the main control board 61. In a state where the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the corresponding plate side insertion holes 336 to 339, and the first to fourth connectors CN1 The upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of ~CN4 are in contact with the upper peripheral edge portions 336a to 339a of the connector corresponding plate 314. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a conductive tampering jig such as a wire from being inserted between the other ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the plate portion 335. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud in which a conductive fraud jig is brought close to the other end side terminals 112, 116 of the first connector CN1 and the fourth connector CN4.

As already explained in the third embodiment, the front case body 312 has lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 below the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. It is slid upward until it comes close to the side upright walls 101c to 104c, and is fixed to the back case body 313 when the sliding is completed. The lower standing walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are close to the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365, and By configuring the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b of the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the upper peripheral edges 336a to 339a of the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 to be in contact with each other, the first to fourth connectors All the terminals 111 to 116 in the four connectors CN1 to CN4 can be protected from unauthorized use of a conductive unauthorized use jig.

- A configuration in which the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a abuts against the plate-like portion 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314 in a state where the front case body 312 and the back case body 313 are fixed with the connector corresponding plate 314 and the main control board 61 in between. Instead, a configuration may be adopted in which the connector group corresponding plate part 361a approaches the plate part 335 of the connector corresponding plate 314 with a predetermined interval (approximately 1 mm interval) in this state. The predetermined interval is an interval that makes it difficult to insert a conductive tampering jig such as a wire. Even if the configuration is such that they approach each other at a predetermined distance, it is possible to prevent a tampering jig from being inserted due to the play that exists between the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a and the plate portion 335. .

- The fixing portions 111b to 116b of the terminals 111 to 116 of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 may be in contact with the connector corresponding plate 314. Thereby, the distance between the element mounting surface 61e of the main control board 61 and the connector compatible plate 314 can be reduced. Therefore, a conductive tampering jig such as a wire is inserted through the upper play that exists between the upper upright wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. fraudulent act of causing contact with the fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 112 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 113 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4; can be prevented.

- When the front case is in a state where the lower upstanding walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are in contact with the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The body 312 may be fixed to the back case body 313. In this configuration, the front case body 312 is manually slid upward relative to the back case body 313, main control board 61, and connector compatible plate 314 until the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 come into contact with the upper ends of the boss insertion holes 385 to 388. By doing so, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b can be in contact with each other. Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive tampering jig such as a wire between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 401 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 47(a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 in this embodiment, and FIG. 47(b) is a plan view of the main control board 401 showing an enlarged part of the MPU 402. , FIG. 48(a) is a plan view showing the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, and FIG. 48(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 48(a). Similar to the first embodiment, the main control board 401 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and as shown in FIG. and a right side 401d. The main control board 401 is equipped with a large number of insertion components such as an MPU 402, first to seventh connectors CN41 to CN47, and various elements. These insertion-mounted components are mounted only on one side of the main control board 401, and that side serves as an element mounting surface 401e.

The MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 are provided with pins 411 to 413, 415, and 416 (FIG. 48(a)) extending linearly in the thickness direction of the main control board 401. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the insertion components other than the MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 are also provided with pins extending linearly in the thickness direction of the main control board 401. The insertion mounting components including the MPU 402 and the first connector CN41 are in a state in which these pins 411 to 413, 415, and 416 are inserted into through holes (not shown) provided by penetrating the main control board 401 in the board thickness direction. They are soldered and mounted using insertion mounting techniques such as flow soldering. As shown in FIG. 48(a), the board surface of the main control board 401 opposite to the element mounting surface 401e serves as a solder surface 401f to which pins 411 to 413, 415, and 416 of insertion mounting components are soldered. ing.

As already explained in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 7, the main controller 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the Pachinko machine 10. When installed in a game hall, the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 faces toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the solder surface 401f faces toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. By opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 becomes visible. In this case, since the main control device 60 constitutes the back side of the gaming machine main body 12, and the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the gaming machine main body 12 cannot be removed. By opening the frame 11, the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 becomes visible through the transparent front case body 121.

As in this embodiment, in a configuration in which an insertion mounting component is mounted on the element mounting surface 401e and the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 401e is the soldering surface 401f, it is necessary to There is a risk that fraud may be carried out by inserting a tampering jig from the side of the main controller 60 and contacting the pins 411 to 413, 415, 416 (Fig. 48(a)) protruding from the soldering surface 401f. . In addition, insert a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver from the side or front side of the main controller 60 to insert it into the pins 411 to 413 exposed on the element mounting surface 401e (FIG. 47(b)). There is a risk that fraud may occur. Here, the side surfaces of the main controller 60 refer to the upper partition wall 124, the lower partition wall 125, the first left partition wall 126, and the second left partition wall of the back case body 122 already explained in the first embodiment. 127, a right side first partition wall 128 and a right side second partition wall 129 (FIG. 16(b)). A configuration for detecting these frauds will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 is provided with a GND line 405 that goes around the periphery of the element mounting surface 401e. A fraud detection line 406 is provided near the center of the control board 401 and runs around the periphery of the element mounting surface 401e. The GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are formed by etching conductive metal foil (specifically, copper foil).

The fraud detection line 406 is an electrical wiring that makes it possible to detect that a conductive fraud jig, such as a flathead screwdriver, has been inserted from the side surface of the main control device 60 or the like. The fraud detection line 406 is supplied with a voltage for fraud detection (specifically, +5V voltage). When the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 and finds that the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are connected to each other by a conductive fraud jig, the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 has dropped. to identify that fraud has occurred.

The GND line 405 includes an upper GND line 405a that extends linearly along the upper side 401a of the main control board 401 from the left end to the right end of the upper side 401a with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width); A lower GND line 405b extends linearly along the lower side 401b of the control board 401 from the left end to the right end of the lower side 401b with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width), and the left side of the main control board 401. A left GND line 405c linearly extends along the left side 401c from the upper end to the lower end of the left side 401c with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width), and a left side GND line 405c extends linearly along the right side 401d of the main control board 401 from the upper end to the lower end of the left side 401c. The right side GND line 405d extends linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width) from the upper end to the lower end of the line 401d.

The fraud detection line 406 includes an upper fraud detection line 406a provided downward from the upper GND line 405a at an interval of approximately 1 mm, and a lower fraud detection line 406a provided upward from the lower GND line 405b at an interval of approximately 1 mm. A fraud detection line 406b, a left fraud detection line 406c provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm to the right from the left GND line 405c, and a right fraud detection line 406c provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm to the left from the right GND line 405d. A fraud detection line 406d is also provided. The upper fraud detection line 406a extends linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width) from the upper end of the left fraud detection line 406c to the upper end of the right fraud detection line 406d, and also The detection line 406b extends linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width) from the lower end of the left fraud detection line 406c to the lower end of the right fraud detection line 406d. These upper, lower, left and right fraud detection lines 403a to 403d are electrically connected.

The periphery of the element mounting surface 401e is doubly surrounded by an outer GND line 405 and an inner fraud detection line 406. These GND line 405 and fraud detection line 406 are exposed on the surface of main control board 401, and when a conductive fraud jig comes into contact with GND line 405 and fraud detection line 406, GND line 405 and fraud detection line 406 are exposed. Line 406 is rendered conductive. Since the fraud detection line 406 is provided close to the GND line 405, when the conductive fraud jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e, the fraud detection line 406 connects to the GND line 405 and the fraud detection jig. There is a high possibility that the voltage on the fraud detection line 406 will drop because it is in contact with both lines 406.

A large number of GND contact portions 407 are formed on the upper, lower, left, and right GND lines 405a to 405d so as to form a row in the extending direction of the GND lines 405a to 405d. As shown in FIG. 48(b), the GND contact portion 407 penetrates the main control board 401 in the board thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). A through hole 407a is provided, and lands 407b and 407c are provided in a circular shape around the periphery of the through hole 407a on the element mounting surface 401e and the soldering surface 401f. The lands 407b and 407c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 407a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 407b, 407c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The GND contact portion 407 includes a solder bulge portion 407d that bulges out by approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f. The solder swelling portion 407d is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 407a and the land 407c on the solder surface 401f side from the solder surface 401f side. The solder swelling portions 407d of all the GND contact portions 407 are electrically connected to the GND line 405. Since the solder bulge 407d bulges out from the solder surface 401f, the possibility that a conductive tampering jig brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge 407d is increased. In the upper, lower, left, and right GND lines 405a to 405d, the GND contact portions 407 are provided at regular intervals such that the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions 407 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the possibility that the conductive tampering jig brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulging portion 407d of any of the GND contact portions 407.

A large number of fraud detection contact portions 408 are formed in the upper, lower, left, and right fraud detection lines 406a to 406d so as to form a line in the extending direction of the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d. As shown in FIG. 48(b), the fraud detection contact part 408 penetrates the main control board 401 in the board thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). A through hole 408a is provided, and lands 408b and 408c are provided in a circular shape around the periphery of the through hole 408a on the element mounting surface 401e and the soldering surface 401f. The lands 408b and 408c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 408a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 408b, 408c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The fraud detection contact portion 408 includes a solder bulge portion 408d that bulges out by approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f. The solder swelling portion 408d is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 408a and the land 408c on the solder surface 401f side from the solder surface 401f side. The solder swelling portions 408d of all the fraud detection contact parts 408 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. Since the solder bulge 408d bulges out from the solder surface 401f, the possibility that a conductive tampering jig brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge 408d is increased. In the upper, lower, left, and right fraud detection lines 406a to 406d, the fraud detection contact parts 408 are provided at equal intervals such that the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contact parts 408 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the possibility that the conductive tampering jig brought close to the soldering surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge 408d of any of the tamper detection contact parts 408.

As already explained, the fraud detection line 406 is provided close to the GND line 405 on the element mounting surface 401e. Therefore, the fraud detection contact portion 408 and the GND contact portion 407 are located close to each other on the solder surface 401f. As a result, when the conductive tampering jig is brought close to the soldering surface 401f, it comes into contact with one or more GND contact parts 407 and one or more tamper detection contact parts 408, and the tamper detection line 406 There is an increased possibility that the voltage will drop.

As shown in FIGS. 47(a) and 47(b), an MPU 402 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The MPU 402 includes a large number of pins 411 to 413, including a GND connection pin 411 and a fraud detection connection pin 412, and these pins 411 to 413 are soldered on a solder surface 401f. As shown in FIG. 48(a), a gap is provided near the center of the right side 401d of the soldering surface 401f, which is larger than the above-mentioned 3 mm interval between adjacent fraud detection contact parts 408, and one A copper wiring 414 is formed to electrically connect the two GND contact portions 407 and the GND connection pin 411 of the MPU 402. The wiring 414 is covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that it is not exposed to the surface.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), a first connector CN41 is mounted on the upper side 401a of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The first connector CN41 includes a large number of pins 415, 416 (FIG. 48(a)), and one of the many pins 415, 416 supplies voltage to the fraud detection line 406 (FIG. 48(a)). This is the voltage supply pin 415 (FIG. 48(a)). The numerous pins 415 and 416, including the voltage supply pin 415, are soldered at the solder surface 401f. As shown in FIG. 48(a), one fraud detection contact portion 408 provided near the right side 401d of the main control board 401 and the fraud detection connection pin 412 of the MPU 402 are electrically connected to the solder surface 401f. A copper wire 417 is formed to electrically connect one fraud detection contact portion 408 provided near the upper side 401a of the main control board 401 and the voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41. A wiring 418 is formed. These wirings 417 and 418 are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that they are not exposed to the surface.

While operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, a fraud detection voltage (specifically, At the same time, the fraud detection voltage is supplied to the input side of the MPU 402 via the fraud detection line 406, the fraud detection connection pin 412, and the wiring 417. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage supplied to the input side of the MPU 402 via the fraud detection connection pin 412, and can determine that it is in a normal state if the voltage is a voltage for fraud detection. can.

As already explained, on the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 are located close to each other. Therefore, a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver was inserted into the soldering surface 401f from the side of the main control device 60 and came into contact with the GND contact portion 407 and the tamper detection contact portion 408. In this case, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected by the fraud jig. Moreover, as already explained, on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are provided close to each other. Therefore, a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the element mounting surface 401e from the side or front side of the main controller 60 and is in contact with the GND line 405 and the tamper detection line 406. If this occurs, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected by the fraud jig. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406, and if it is determined that the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 has dropped due to conduction between the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406, the main CPU 64 detects an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406. Understand what happened.

Next, the fraud detection process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. Note that the fraud detection process is executed in step S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the fraud detection process, first, the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 connected to the input side of the MPU 402 is monitored, and it is determined whether a drop in the voltage has been detected (step S901). If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not fraud has occurred in the monitored object (step S902). In step S902, similarly to the fraud detection process (step S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)) in the first embodiment, the monitoring target is detected based on the detection signals received from the radio wave detection sensor 202 and the magnetic detection sensor 203. Identify when fraud has occurred. If no fraud has occurred in the monitored object (step S902: NO), the fraud detection process is directly ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an abnormality notification process is executed (step S903). In the abnormality notification process, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. The abnormality notification command is a command for causing the audio emission control device 70 to execute processing for performing abnormality notification to notify that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406, a radio wave abnormality, or a magnetic abnormality has occurred. When receiving the abnormality notification command, the audio light emission control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 to notify that fraud has been detected, controls the light emission of the display light emission unit 53, and controls the display control device 90. . Thereby, it is possible to know from outside the pachinko machine 10 that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406, a radio wave abnormality, or a magnetic abnormality has been detected. In addition, in the abnormality notification process in step S903, an abnormality signal is output to the gaming hall management computer (not shown), which is an external device. This allows the management computer to recognize that an abnormality, radio wave abnormality, or magnetic abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected.

Thereafter, the game stop flag in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S904), and the present fraud detection process is ended. As already explained in the first embodiment, the process for advancing the game in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) by setting the game stop flag to "1" (processing from step S208 to step S219) will no longer be executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A GND line 405 and a fraud detection line 406 are provided on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. The fraud detection line 406 is an electrical wiring that makes it possible to detect that a conductive fraud jig, such as a flathead screwdriver, has been inserted from the side surface of the main control device 60 or the like. The fraud detection line 406 is supplied with a voltage for fraud detection. The main control board 401 is provided with a large number of GND contact parts 407 along a GND line 405 and a large number of fraud detection contact parts 408 along a fraud detection line 406. All the GND contact parts 407 are electrically connected to the GND line 405, and all the fraud detection contact parts 408 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. The GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 include solder bulges 407d and 408d that bulge from the solder surface 401f. A conductive tampering jig is brought close to the soldering surface 401f of the main control board 401, and the tampering jig is connected to solder bulges 407d at one or more GND contact parts 407 and one or more tamper detection contact parts 408. When it comes into contact with both solder bulges 408d, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected. When the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 and finds that the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are connected to each other by a conductive fraud jig, the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 has dropped. to identify that fraud has occurred. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act of inserting a conductive tampering jig into the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401. On the solder surface 401f where the pins 411 to 413, 415, and 416 of various electronic components are fixed by solder, if a fraudulent act is performed by touching the solder-fixed part and its surroundings with a conductive fraud jig. In this case, there is a risk that signals transmitted from various electronic components or signals received by various electronic components may be illegally altered. In contrast, by having a configuration that can detect fraudulent activities in which a conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the soldering surface 401f, the possibility of such fraudulent activities being carried out without the amusement hall manager's knowledge is reduced. has been done.

On the element mounting surface 401e, the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are exposed on the surface. Therefore, if a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraud jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e, and the fraud jig comes into contact with both the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406, , the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are made conductive, and the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 drops. This makes it possible to understand that the fraudulent act has occurred.

The fraud detection line 406 is arranged in parallel with the GND line 405 on the element mounting surface 401e. As a result, when the conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e, the tampering jig is in contact with both the GND line 405 and the tampering detection line 406, and the tampering detection line 406 There is an increased possibility that the voltage will drop.

When the main CPU 64 detects a drop in the voltage of the fraud detection line 406, it executes an abnormality notification process. Thereby, abnormalities in the fraud detection line 406 can be notified to the administrator of the game hall.

Each of the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 is provided along the peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, if a conductive fraud jig approaches the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 from the side surface of the main control device 60, the fraud detection jig will connect the GND line 405 and the fraud detection. It is possible to increase the possibility that the line 406 will be in a conductive state. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act at an early stage.

Each of the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 is provided over the entire circumference of the periphery of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which at least one of the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 is provided only on a part of the peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 401e, the main control board 401 can be viewed from the side of the main control device 60. If a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraud jig approaches the element mounting surface 401e side, it is possible to increase the possibility that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 will be in a state of continuity due to the fraud jig. . This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act at an early stage.

The main control board 401 is provided with a large number of GND contact parts 407 along a GND line 405 and a large number of fraud detection contact parts 408 along a fraud detection line 406. All the GND contact parts 407 are electrically connected to the GND line 405, and all the fraud detection contact parts 408 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406. The GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 include solder bulges 407d and 408d that bulge from the solder surface 401f. Since the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 bulges out from the solder surface 401f, a conductive tampering jig brought close to the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 can avoid the solder bulge of the GND contact portion 407. The possibility of electrical contact with the portion 407d is increased. Since the solder swelling part 408d of the fraud detection contact part 408 bulges out from the solder surface 401f, the conductive fraud jig that is brought close to the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 can touch the solder of the fraud detection contact part 408. The possibility of electrical contact with the bulging portion 408d is increased. Therefore, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f where the various electronic components mounted on the main control board 401 and the main control board 401 are fixed by soldering, The possibility that the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact part 407 and the solder bulge 408d of the tamper detection contact part 408 will be electrically connected to each other can be increased by the tampering jig. On the solder surface 401f where the pins 411 to 413, 415, and 416 of various electronic components are fixed by solder, if a fraudulent act is performed by touching the solder-fixed part and its surroundings with a conductive fraud jig. In this case, there is a risk that signals transmitted from various electronic components or signals received by various electronic components may be illegally altered. In contrast, by having a configuration that can detect fraudulent activities in which a conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the soldering surface 401f, the possibility of such fraudulent activities being carried out without the amusement hall manager's knowledge is reduced. has been done.

On the solder surface 401f, the solder bulge 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 is arranged in parallel with the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407. As a result, when the conductive tampering jig is brought close to the soldering surface 401f side, the tampering jig is attached to the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact part 407 and the solder bulge 408d of the tamper detection contact part 408. There is a high possibility that the voltage on the fraud detection line 406 will drop because it is in contact with both.

The periphery of the solder surface 401f is disposed intermittently at a position closer to the center of the main control board 401 than the solder bulges 407d of the GND contact portions 407 disposed intermittently on the outside and the solder bulges 407d of the GND contact portions 407. It is doubly surrounded by solder bulges 408d of the fraud detection contact portions 408 which are arranged as follows. Therefore, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 from the side surface of the main controller 60, the tampering jig is moved to the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and Since both solder bulges 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 are in contact with each other, there is a high possibility that the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 will drop.

The GND line 405 includes an upper GND line 405a, a lower GND line 405b, and a left GND line 405c that are continuous on the upper peripheral edge, lower peripheral edge, left peripheral edge, and right peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. and a right side GND line 405d. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the GND lines 405a to 405c are formed intermittently, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the main control board 401, if the tampering jig is The possibility of contacting the GND lines 405a to 405d can be increased.

Four GND lines 405a to 405d are connected to the ground of the main control board 401. As a result, when the conductive fraud jig comes into contact with any of the GND lines 405a to 405d and the fraud detection line 406, and the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected, fraud is detected. A condition can be created where the voltage on line 406 is dropping. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are in a conductive state.

The fraud detection line 406 is located at a position closer to the center than the four GND lines 405a to 405d on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401, and includes a continuous upper fraud detection line 406a, lower fraud detection line 406b, and left fraud detection line. 406c and a right fraud detection line 406d. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the fraud detection lines 406a to 406c are formed intermittently, when a conductive fraud jig is brought close to the main control board 401, the fraud detection line 406a to 406c is intermittently formed. The possibility of contacting any of the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d can be increased.

A voltage for fraud detection is supplied to all four fraud detection lines 406a to 406d. As a result, if the conductive tampering jig comes into contact with both the GND lines 405a to 405d and any of the tampering detection lines 406a to 406d, the tampering jig will No matter where the detection lines 406a to 406d are touched, it is possible to create a state in which the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected, and the voltage in the fraud detection line 406 is dropped. . Therefore, it is possible to easily identify that the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are in a conductive state.

The GND contact portions 407 are arranged along the upper GND line 405a, the lower GND line 405b, the left GND line 405c, and the right GND line 405d so that the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions 407 is approximately 3 mm. provided at intervals. This increases the possibility that the conductive tampering jig brought close to the solder surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulging portion 407d of any of the GND contact portions 407.

The fraud detection contact parts 408 are arranged such that the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contact parts 408 is approximately equal to each other along the upper fraud detection line 406a, the lower fraud detection line 406b, the left fraud detection line 406c, and the right fraud detection line 406d. They are provided at equal intervals of 3 mm. This increases the possibility that the conductive tampering jig brought close to the soldering surface 401f will come into contact with the solder bulge 408d of any of the tamper detection contact parts 408.

<Another form of the fourth embodiment>
- In the abnormality notification process performed in step S903 of the fraud detection process (FIG. 49), the mode of abnormality notification performed when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected and when a radio wave abnormality or magnetic abnormality is detected It is also possible to have a configuration in which the abnormality notification is performed in a manner different from that performed in the above case. Specifically, when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, the main CPU 64 transmits a first abnormality notification command to the audio emission control device 70 in the abnormality notification process. The first abnormality notification command is a command for causing the audio emission control device 70 to execute a process for performing a first abnormality notification to notify that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected. When receiving the first abnormality notification command, the audio light emission control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 to notify that an abnormality has been detected in the fraud detection line 406, controls the light emission of the display light emission unit 53, and displays Controls the control device 90. In the first abnormality notification, the speaker section 54 outputs a sound saying "first abnormality has occurred", the display light emitting section 53 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality on the fraud detection line 406, and the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is ``First abnormality occurrence'' is displayed. This makes it possible to know from outside the pachinko machine 10 that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected. Furthermore, when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, the main CPU 64 outputs a first abnormality signal to the gaming hall management computer (not shown), which is an external device, in the abnormality notification process. This allows the management computer to recognize that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected.

When a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality is detected, the main CPU 64 transmits a second abnormality notification command to the audio emission control device 70 in the abnormality notification process. The second abnormality notification command is a command for causing the audio emission control device 70 to execute a process for performing a second abnormality notification to notify that a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality has been detected. When receiving the second anomaly notification command, the audio emission control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker section 54 to notify that a radio wave anomaly or magnetic anomaly has been detected, and controls the light emission and display of the display light emission section 53. Controls the device 90. In the second abnormality notification, the speaker section 54 outputs a sound saying "second abnormality has occurred", the display light emitting section 53 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the radio wave abnormality or magnetic abnormality, and the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. The words "Second abnormality occurrence" are displayed. Thereby, it is possible to grasp from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 that a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality has been detected. Further, when a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality is detected, the main side CPU 64 outputs a second abnormality signal to the gaming hall management computer (not shown), which is an external device, in the abnormality notification process. This allows the management computer to understand that a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality has been detected.

In this way, in a configuration in which a second abnormality notification is performed when a radio wave abnormality or a magnetic abnormality is detected, when an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 is detected, a first abnormality notification different from the second abnormality notification is issued. By adopting a configuration in which this is performed, it is possible to quickly grasp that an abnormality in the fraud detection line 406 has been detected.

- In the main control board 401, a wiring 414 electrically connects one GND contact part 407 and the GND connection pin 411 of the MPU 402, and a wiring 414 electrically connects one fraud detection contact part 408 and the fraud detection connection pin 412 of the MPU 402. The board surface on which the wiring 417 to be connected and the wiring 418 that electrically connects one fraud detection contact portion 408 and the voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41 are formed is not limited to the solder surface 401f. . A configuration may be adopted in which some or all of these wirings 414, 417, and 418 are formed on the element mounting surface 401e.

- In the main control board 401, the board surface where the GND line 405 is provided (element mounting surface 401e in the fourth embodiment) and the board surface where the solder swelling portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 is provided (the fourth In the embodiment, the solder surface 401f) may be reversed. By configuring the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 to bulge toward the element mounting surface 401e side, a conductive tampering jig brought close to the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 may contact the GND. The possibility of contact with the portion 407 can be increased.

- In the main control board 401, the board surface where the fraud detection line 406 is provided (element mounting surface 401e in the fourth embodiment) and the board surface where the solder swelling portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 is provided ( In the fourth embodiment, the solder surface 401f) may be reversed. By configuring the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 to bulge toward the element mounting surface 401e, a conductive fraud jig brought close to the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 can be detected as a fraud. The possibility of contact with the detection contact portion 408 can be increased.

- A configuration may be adopted in which solder is applied to the entire area of the GND line 405 formed on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 to form a solder bulge region. The solder bulging region bulges out by approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 401e. Thereby, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e side, the possibility that the tampering jig comes into electrical contact with the GND line 405 through the solder bulge region can be increased.

- A configuration may be adopted in which solder is applied to the entire area of the fraud detection line 406 formed on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 to form a solder bulging area. The solder bulging region bulges out by approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 401e. Thereby, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e side, it is possible to increase the possibility that the tampering jig electrically contacts the tampering detection line 406 through the solder bulging region.

-Instead of the configuration in which both the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact part 407 and the solder bulge 408d of the fraud detection contact part 408 are provided on the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, these two are provided on the solder surface 401f. A configuration may be adopted in which only one of the types of solder bulges 407d and 408d is provided. In a configuration in which only the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 is provided on the solder surface 401f, the fraud detection contact portion 408 is provided with a solder contact portion on the solder surface 401f. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 408a of the fraud detection contact portion 408 from the solder surface 401f side, but does not protrude from the solder surface 401f and is flush with the solder surface 401f. They are one. The solder contact part is exposed, and the conductive tampering jig is brought closer to the solder surface 401f and comes into contact with both the solder bulge 407d of the GND contact part 407 and the solder contact part of the tamper detection contact part 408. In this case, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected by the fraud jig. Further, in a configuration in which only the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408 is provided on the solder surface 401f, the GND contact portion 407 is provided with a solder contact portion on the solder surface 401f. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 407a of the GND contact portion 407 from the solder surface 401f side, but does not bulge out from the solder surface 401f and is flush with the solder surface 401f. It has become. The solder contact part is exposed, and the conductive tampering jig is brought close to the solder surface 401f and comes into contact with both the solder contact part of the GND contact part 407 and the solder bulge part 408d of the tamper detection contact part 408. In this case, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected by the fraud jig. In this way, even if the solder surface 401f is provided with only one of the solder bulging portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407 and the solder bulging portion 408d of the fraud detection contact portion 408, the solder contact portion is not provided on the other side. With this configuration, it is possible to detect that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraud jig close to the soldering surface 401f has been carried out.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that it includes a configuration for monitoring fraudulent activity in a power-off state in which the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fourth embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for monitoring fraudulent activity in a power-off state in this embodiment.

Similar to the fourth embodiment described above, a GND line 405 and a fraud detection line 406 are provided on the element mounting surface 401e (FIG. 47(a)) of the main control board 401. Further, on the solder surface 401f (FIG. 48(a)) of the main control board 401, a large number of GND contact parts 407 electrically connected to the GND line 405 and a large number of ground contact parts 407 electrically connected to the fraud detection line 406 are provided. A fraud detection contact section 408 is provided. The main control board 401 in this embodiment includes a MOSFET 421 that can switch between a state in which voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 406 and a state in which it is not supplied, and a conductive fraud jig such as a flathead screwdriver when the power is cut off. A tamper detection capacitor 422 is provided to detect tampering by bringing the solder surface 401f close to the soldering surface 401f. These MOSFET 421 and fraud detection capacitor 422 are mounted on the element mounting surface 401e.

MOSFET 421 includes a gate terminal 421a, a source terminal 421b, and a drain terminal 421c. In the MOSFET 421, when the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a is in the HI state, current flows between the source terminal 421b and the drain terminal 421c, and when the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a is in the LOW state, the current flows between the source terminal 421b and the drain terminal 421c. No current flows between 421b and drain terminal 421c.

The gate terminal 421a is electrically connected to the main CPU 64 by a copper wiring 423. The main CPU 64 controls the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a. The voltage supply pin 415 of the first connector CN41 that supplies voltage to the fraud detection line 406 is connected to the source terminal 421b, and the fraud detection line 406 is connected to the drain terminal 421c.

The fraud detection capacitor 422 includes a first terminal 422a and a second terminal 422b. The first terminal 422a is electrically connected to a wiring 425 that connects the fraud detection line 406 and the main CPU 64 via a copper wiring 424. The second terminal 422b is electrically connected to the GND line 405.

After the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the main CPU 64 sets the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a to the HI state. As a result, voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 406, and charges are accumulated in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422. The main CPU 64 can determine whether charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a based on the voltage of the wiring 425.

If the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped and the power supply is cut off while charges are accumulated in the first terminal 422a, the charges accumulated in the first terminal 422a are retained as they are. In the power-off state, a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 from the side of the main control device 60, and one or more GND contact parts 407 and one When the above fraud detection contact portion 408 is in contact, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected. In addition, in the power-off state, a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401 from the side or front side of the main control device 60, and the GND line 405 and tampering Even when the detection line 406 is in contact, the GND line 405 and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected. When the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are electrically connected, the charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a escapes to the GND line 405. This results in a state in which no charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a. When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the main CPU 64 determines whether or not electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, and if no electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, the main CPU 64 determines whether or not electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a. It was discovered that a fraudulent act was carried out in which a fraudulent jig was brought close to the computer while the power was cut off.

Next, the power-on setting process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51. Note that the power-on setting process is executed in step S109 of the main process (FIG. 26).

In the power-on setting process, it is first determined whether charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422 (step S1001). If the first terminal 422a is in a state where no charge is accumulated (step S1001: NO), this means that the charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a is lost in the power cut-off state, so an abnormality alarm is issued. Processing is executed (step S1002). In the abnormality notification process, a corresponding abnormality notification command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 70. When the audio light emission control device 70 receives the abnormality notification command, the sound output control device 70 controls the sound output of the speaker unit 54 to notify that fraud has been detected in the power-off state, controls the light emission of the display light emission unit 53, and controls the display control device 90. control. Thereby, it is possible to know from outside the pachinko machine 10 that fraud has been detected in the power-off state. In addition, in the abnormality notification process in step S1002, an abnormality signal is output to the gaming hall management computer (not shown), which is an external device. This allows the management computer to recognize that fraud has been detected in a power-off state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001 or if the process in step S1002 is performed, an input voltage raising process is performed to raise the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a from a LOW state to a HI state (step S1003). As a result, voltage is supplied to the fraud detection line 406, and charges are accumulated in the first terminal 422a.

Thereafter, an initial value setting process is executed to set a predetermined area of the main side RAM 66 to an initial value, such as initializing a power outage flag (step S1004), and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is executed in order to recognize the current gaming state. A command transmission process for the gaming state is executed to transmit the command to the audio emission control device 70 (step S1005), and the present power-on setting process is ended.

As described above, after the supply of operating power is started, the main CPU 64 determines whether or not charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a before raising the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a to the HI state. This makes it possible to grasp the state of the first terminal 422a in the power-off state.

If it is determined in step S1001 that no charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a, the input voltage of the gate terminal 421a is raised to the HI state after executing the abnormality notification process in step S1002. Therefore, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped after the abnormality notification process is executed, and then the supply of operating power is restarted, even though no fraudulent activity has occurred, This prevents a negative determination from being made again in step S1001 and execution of the abnormality notification process in step S1002.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the main control board 401, charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a while operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and after the power is cut off, the conductive board 401 is inserted into the main control device 60. A fraud detection capacitor 422 is mounted, which loses the charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a when the fraud detection line 406 and the GND line 405 are electrically connected by the fraud prevention jig. Therefore, by determining whether electric charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is possible to ascertain whether or not there is fraud in the power-off state. .

If the main CPU 64 determines in step S1001 in the power-on setting process (FIG. 51) that no charge is accumulated in the first terminal 422a of the fraud detection capacitor 422, it executes the abnormality notification process. Based on the fact that the abnormality notification process has been executed, the administrator of the game hall can understand that the electric charge accumulated in the first terminal 422a has been lost due to a fraudulent act performed while the power was cut off. .

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in the configuration of the main control board. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fourth embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the fourth embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 52(a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 in this embodiment, and FIG. 52(b) is a plan view of the main control board 431 showing an enlarged part of the MPU 432. , FIG. 53(a) is a plan view showing the back surface 431f of the main control board 431, and FIG. 53(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 53(a). Similar to the first embodiment, the main control board 431 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and as shown in FIG. and a right side 431d. The main control board 431 is equipped with a large number of surface mount components such as an MPU 432, first to seventh connectors CN51 to CN57, and various elements. These surface mount components are mounted only on one side of the main control board 431, and that side serves as an element mounting surface 431e.

The MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 are provided with terminals 441 to 443, 445, and 446 (FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b)) extending along the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Further, although not shown, surface mount components other than the MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 are also provided with terminals extending along the element mounting surface 431e. The surface mount components including the MPU 432 and the first connector CN51 are mounted on the element mounting surface 431e side by soldering these terminals 441 to 443, 445, and 446 to the element mounting surface 431e by surface mounting technology such as reflow soldering. Implemented. In this embodiment, the terminals 441 to 443, 445, and 446 of the surface-mounted components exist only on the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431, and do not exist on the substrate back surface 431f side. A wiring pattern (not shown) is formed on the element mounting surface 431e to electrically connect terminals (not shown) of the surface mount components.

As already explained in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 7, the main controller 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the Pachinko machine 10. When installed in the game hall, the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 faces toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back surface 431f of the board faces toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. By opening the gaming machine main body 12 from the outer frame 11 to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 becomes visible. In this case, the main controller 60 constitutes the back side of the gaming machine main body 12, and since the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the gaming machine main body 12 cannot be removed. By opening the frame 11, the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 becomes visible through the transparent front case body 121.

In a configuration in which the terminals 441 to 443, 445, and 446 of surface mount components are present only on the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 as in this embodiment, it is necessary to prevent unauthorized use of a conductive device such as a flathead screwdriver. There is a possibility that an unauthorized person may insert a tool from the side or front side of the main controller 60 and contact the terminals 441 to 443, 445, and 446 present on the element mounting surface 431e. A configuration for detecting the fraud will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431, a GND line 435 that goes around the periphery of the back surface 431f of the board is provided, and the main control board A fraud detection line 436 is provided that goes around the periphery of the back surface 431f of the board at a position near the center of the board 431. The GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are formed by etching conductive metal foil (specifically, copper foil).

The fraud detection line 436 is an electrical wiring that makes it possible to detect that a conductive fraud jig, such as a flathead screwdriver, has been inserted from the side of the main control device 60 or the like. The fraud detection line 436 is supplied with a voltage for fraud detection (specifically, +5V voltage). Similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 436, and conducts the fraud detection line 436 and the GND line 435 by the conductive fraud jig, so that the fraud detection line 436 is connected to the GND line 435. If it is determined that the voltage has dropped, it can be determined that fraud has occurred.

The GND line 435 includes an upper GND line 435a that extends linearly along the upper side 431a of the main control board 431 from the left end to the right end of the upper side 431a with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width); A lower GND line 435b extends linearly along the lower side 431b of the control board 431 from the left end to the right end of the lower side 431b with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width), and the left side of the main control board 431. A left GND line 435c linearly extends along the left side 431c from the upper end to the lower end of the left side 431c with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width), and a left side GND line 435c extends linearly along the right side 431d of the main control board 431 from the upper end to the lower end of the left side 431c. The right side GND line 435d extends linearly from the upper end to the lower end with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width).

The fraud detection line 436 includes an upper fraud detection line 436a provided downward from the upper GND line 435a at an interval of approximately 1 mm, and a lower fraud detection line 436a provided upward from the lower GND line 435b at an interval of approximately 1 mm. A fraud detection line 436b, a left fraud detection line 436c provided approximately 1 mm to the right from the left GND line 435c, and a right fraud detection line 436c provided approximately 1 mm to the left from the right GND line 435d. A fraud detection line 436d is also provided. The upper fraud detection line 436a extends linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width) from the upper end of the left fraud detection line 436c to the upper end of the right fraud detection line 436d, and also The detection line 436b extends linearly with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width) from the lower end of the left fraud detection line 436c to the lower end of the right fraud detection line 436d. These upper, lower, left and right fraud detection lines 403a to 403d are electrically connected.

The periphery of the back surface 431f of the substrate is double surrounded by an outer GND line 435 and an inner fraud detection line 436. These GND line 435 and fraud detection line 436 are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that they are not exposed to the surface.

A large number of GND contact portions 437 are formed on the upper, lower, left, and right GND lines 435a to 435d so as to form a row in the extending direction of the GND lines 435a to 435d. As shown in FIG. 53(b), the GND contact portion 437 penetrates the main control board 431 in the board thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). A through hole 437a is provided, and lands 437b and 437c are circularly provided around the periphery of the through hole 437a on the element mounting surface 431e and the back surface 431f of the substrate. The lands 437b and 437c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 437a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 437b, 437c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The GND contact portion 437 includes a solder bulge portion 437d that bulges out by approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e. The solder swelling portion 437d is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 437a and the land 437b on the element mounting surface 431e side from the element mounting surface 431e side. The solder swelling portions 437d of all the GND contact portions 437 are electrically connected to the GND line 435. Since the solder bulging portion 437d bulges out from the element mounting surface 431e, the possibility that a conductive tampering jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulging portion 437d is increased. In the upper, lower, left, and right GND lines 435a to 435d, the GND contact portions 437 are provided at regular intervals such that the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions 437 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the possibility that the conductive tampering jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulging portion 437d of any of the GND contact portions 437.

A large number of fraud detection contact portions 438 are formed in the upper, lower, left, and right fraud detection lines 436a to 436d so as to form a row in the extending direction of the fraud detection lines 436a to 436d. As shown in FIG. 53(b), the fraud detection contact part 438 penetrates the main control board 431 in the board thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). A through hole 438a is provided, and lands 438b and 438c are provided in a circular shape around the periphery of the through hole 438a on the element mounting surface 431e and the back surface 431f of the substrate. The lands 438b and 438c are made of metal, specifically copper. The diameter of the through hole 438a is approximately 0.6 mm, and the diameter of the lands 438b, 438c is approximately 1.2 mm.

The fraud detection contact portion 438 includes a solder bulge portion 438d that bulges out by approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e. The solder swelling portion 438d is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 438a and the land 438b on the element mounting surface 431e side from the element mounting surface 431e side. The solder swelling portions 438d of all the fraud detection contact parts 438 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 436. Since the solder bulging portion 438d bulges out from the element mounting surface 431e, the possibility that a conductive tampering jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulging portion 438d is increased. In the upper, lower, left, and right fraud detection lines 436a to 436d, the fraud detection contact parts 438 are provided at equal intervals such that the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contact parts 438 is approximately 3 mm. This increases the possibility that the conductive tampering jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulge 438d of any tamper detection contact portion 438.

On the back surface 431f of the substrate, the fraud detection line 436 is provided close to the GND line 435, and on the element mounting surface 431e, the fraud detection contact portion 438 and the GND contact portion 437 are located close to each other. As a result, when the conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, it comes into contact with one or more GND contact parts 437 and one or more tamper detection contact parts 438, and the tamper detection line 436 voltage is likely to drop.

As shown in FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), an MPU 432 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. The MPU 432 includes a large number of terminals 441 to 443, including a GND connection terminal 441 and a fraud detection connection terminal 442, and these terminals 441 to 443 are soldered to the element mounting surface 431e. As shown in FIG. 53(a), a gap is provided near the center of the right side 431d of the back surface 431f of the board, which is larger than the above-mentioned 3 mm interval between adjacent fraud detection contact parts 438, and one A copper wiring 444 is formed to electrically connect the two GND contact portions 437 and the GND connection terminal 441 of the MPU 432. The wiring 444 is covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that it is not exposed to the surface.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the first connector CN51 is mounted on the upper side 431a side of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. The first connector CN51 includes a large number of terminals 445, 446, and one of the large number of terminals 445, 446 is a voltage supply terminal 445 (Fig. 53(a)). The plurality of terminals 445 and 446 including the voltage supply terminal 445 are soldered to the element mounting surface 431e. As shown in FIG. 53(a), one fraud detection contact portion 438 provided near the right side 431d of the main control board 431 is electrically connected to the fraud detection connection terminal 442 of the MPU 432 on the back surface 431f of the board. A copper wire 447 is formed to electrically connect one fraud detection contact portion 438 provided near the upper side 431a of the main control board 431 and the voltage supply terminal 445 of the first connector CN51. A wiring 448 is formed. These wirings 447 and 448 are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so that they are not exposed to the surface.

While operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, a fraud detection voltage (specifically, At the same time, the input side of the MPU 432 is supplied with the fraud detection voltage via the fraud detection line 436 and the fraud detection connection terminal 442. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage supplied to the input side of the MPU 432 via the fraud detection connection terminal 442, and can determine that the state is normal if the voltage is a voltage for fraud detection. can.

As already explained, on the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, the GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection contact portion 438 are located close to each other. Therefore, a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the element mounting surface 431e from the side or front side of the main controller 60 and comes into contact with the GND contact portion 437 and the tamper detection contact portion 438. In this case, the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are electrically connected by the fraud jig. The main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 436, and when it is determined that the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are connected and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 has dropped, the main CPU 64 detects an abnormality in the fraud detection line 436. Understand what happened.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A GND line 435 and a fraud detection line 436 are provided on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431. The fraud detection line 436 is an electrical wiring that makes it possible to detect that a conductive fraud jig, such as a flathead screwdriver, has been inserted from the side surface of the main control device 60 or the like. The fraud detection line 436 is supplied with a voltage for fraud detection. The main control board 431 is provided with a large number of GND contact parts 437 along a GND line 435 and a large number of fraud detection contact parts 438 along a fraud detection line 436. All the GND contact parts 437 are electrically connected to the GND line 435, and all the fraud detection contact parts 438 are electrically connected to the fraud detection line 436. The GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection contact portion 438 include solder bulges 437d and 438d that bulge from the element mounting surface 401e. A conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, and the tampering jig is applied to solder bulges 437d at one or more GND contact portions 437 and one or more tamper detection contact portions. When it comes into contact with both solder bulges 438d at 438, the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are electrically connected. When the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 and finds that the fraud detection line 436 and the GND line 435 are connected to each other by a conductive fraud jig and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 has dropped. to identify that fraud has occurred. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act of inserting a conductive tampering jig into the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. On the element mounting surface 431e where terminals 441 to 443, 445, and 446 of various electronic components are fixed by solder, a fraudulent act was carried out in which a conductive fraud jig was brought into contact with the solder-fixed locations and their surroundings. In such cases, there is a risk that signals transmitted from various electronic components or signals received by various electronic components may be fraudulently altered. On the other hand, by having a configuration that can detect fraudulent activity in which a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, there is a possibility that the fraudulent activity will be carried out without the administrator of the game hall noticing. has been reduced.

Since the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 bulges from the back side 431f of the board, a conductive tampering jig brought close to the back side 431f of the main control board 431 can detect the solder bulge of the GND contact portion 437. The possibility of electrical contact with the portion 437d is increased.

Since the solder swelling part 438d of the fraud detection contact part 438 bulges from the back surface 431f of the board, the conductive fraud jig brought close to the back surface 431f of the board of the main control board 431 can touch the solder of the fraud detection contact part 438. The possibility of electrical contact with the bulging portion 438d is increased.

On the element mounting surface 431e, the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is arranged in parallel with the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437. As a result, when the conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e side, the tampering jig is moved to the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the tamper detection contact portion 438. The possibility of being in contact with both is increasing. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the fraud detection line 436 and the GND line 435 are electrically connected and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 drops.

The solder bulges 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulges 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 are provided intermittently along the peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Therefore, if a conductive fraud jig approaches the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 from the side surface of the main controller 60, the fraud jig will be removed from the solder of the GND contact portion 437. There is a high possibility that the solder bulge 437d and the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 will be in contact with both. This increases the possibility that the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 will be electrically connected, and the voltage of the fraud detection line 436 will drop. Therefore, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act at an early stage.

Each of the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided over the entire circumference of the peripheral portion of the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which at least one of the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided only on a part of the peripheral edge of the element mounting surface 431e. , when a conductive fraud jig approaches the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 from the side surface of the main controller 60, the fraud jig causes solder bulges on the GND contact portion 437. There is a high possibility that the contact portion 437d and the solder swelling portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 will be in contact with both.

The GND contact portions 437 are arranged along the upper GND line 435a, the lower GND line 435b, the left GND line 435c, and the right GND line 435d so that the distance between the centers of adjacent GND contact portions 437 is approximately 3 mm. provided at intervals. This increases the possibility that the conductive tampering jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulging portion 437d of any of the GND contact portions 437.

The fraud detection contact parts 438 are arranged such that the distance between the centers of adjacent fraud detection contact parts 438 is approximately equal to each other along the upper fraud detection line 436a, the lower fraud detection line 436b, the left fraud detection line 436c, and the right fraud detection line 436d. They are provided at equal intervals of 3 mm. This increases the possibility that the conductive tampering jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e will come into contact with the solder bulge 438d of any tamper detection contact portion 438.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
- In the main control board 431, a wiring 444 electrically connects one GND contact part 437 and the GND connection terminal 441 of the MPU 432, and a wiring 444 electrically connects one fraud detection contact part 438 and the fraud detection connection terminal 442 of the MPU 432. The board surface on which the wiring 447 to be connected and the wiring 448 that electrically connects one fraud detection contact portion 438 and the voltage supply terminal 445 of the first connector CN51 are formed is not limited to the element mounting surface 431e. do not have. A configuration may be adopted in which some or all of these wirings 444, 447, and 448 are formed on the back surface 431f of the substrate.

- In the main control board 431, instead of the configuration in which the GND line 435 is provided on the back surface 431f of the substrate, a configuration in which the GND line 435 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e may be adopted. In the GND line 435 provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the surface of the area other than the area where the GND contact portion 437 is provided is covered with a resist. The solder swelling portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e side, as in the sixth embodiment, and is located in an area other than the area where the GND contact portion 437 is provided on the GND line 435. Approximately 1 mm bulges out from the resist covering the area. Thereby, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, the possibility that the tampering jig comes into contact with the GND contact portion 437 is increased. In this way, even with the configuration in which the GND line 435 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the GND contact portion 437 can be brought into contact with the conductive fraud jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e.

- In the main control board 431, instead of the configuration in which the fraud detection line 436 is provided on the back surface 431f of the board, a configuration in which the fraud detection line 436 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e may be adopted. In the fraud detection line 436 provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the surface of the area other than the area where the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided is covered with a resist. The solder swelling portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e side, as in the sixth embodiment, and is located in the area where the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided in the fraud detection line 436. It bulges out by about 1 mm from the resist covering the other areas. Thereby, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, the possibility that the tampering jig comes into contact with the tampering detection contact portion 438 is increased. In this way, even with the configuration in which the fraud detection line 436 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the fraud detection contact portion 438 can be brought into contact with the conductive fraud jig brought close to the element mounting surface 431e.

-Instead of the configuration in which both the solder bulging part 437d of the GND contact part 437 and the solder bulging part 438d of the fraud detection contact part 438 are provided on the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, A configuration may be adopted in which only one of these two types of solder bulges 437d and 438d is provided. In a configuration in which only the solder bulging portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the fraud detection contact portion 438 includes a solder contact portion on the element mounting surface 431e. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 438a of the fraud detection contact portion 438 from the element mounting surface 431e side, but it does not protrude from the element mounting surface 431e, and the solder does not protrude from the element mounting surface 431e. It is flush with 431e. The solder contact portion is exposed, and the conductive tampering jig is brought closer to the element mounting surface 431e and comes into contact with both the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder contact portion of the tamper detection contact portion 438. In this case, the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are electrically connected by the fraud jig. Further, in a configuration in which only the solder bulging portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided on the element mounting surface 431e, the GND contact portion 437 is provided with a solder contact portion on the element mounting surface 431e. The solder contact portion is formed by flowing solder into the through hole 437a of the GND contact portion 437 from the element mounting surface 431e side, but does not protrude from the element mounting surface 431e, and is not bulged from the element mounting surface 431e. and are on the same page. The solder contact portion is exposed, and the conductive tampering jig is brought closer to the element mounting surface 431e and comes into contact with both the solder contact portion of the GND contact portion 437 and the solder bulge portion 438d of the tamper detection contact portion 438. In this case, the GND line 435 and the fraud detection line 436 are electrically connected by the fraud jig. In this way, even if the element mounting surface 431e is provided with only one of the solder bulge 437d of the GND contact section 437 and the solder bulge 438d of the fraud detection contact section 438, the solder contact By adopting a configuration in which the element mounting surface 431e is provided, it is possible to detect that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraud jig close to the element mounting surface 431e has been performed.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for executing power outage monitoring processing when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 54(a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 in this embodiment, and FIG. 54(b) is a plan view of the main control board 451 showing the center area enlarged.

Similar to the fourth embodiment, the main control board 451 is equipped with a large number of insertion components such as an MPU 452, first to seventh connectors CN61 to CN67, and various elements. These insertion components are mounted only on one side of the main control board 451, and this side serves as an element mounting surface 451a.

The insertion mounting component includes a pin (not shown) that extends linearly in the thickness direction of the main control board 451. The insertion mounting component is soldered and mounted using an insertion mounting technique such as flow soldering, with the pin inserted into a through hole (not shown) provided through the main control board 451 in the board thickness direction. has been done. The plate surface of the main control board 451 opposite to the element mounting surface 451a is a solder surface to which pins of inserted mounting components are soldered.

The element mounting surface 451a includes a connector group mounting area 453 in which the first to fourth connectors CN61 to CN64 are mounted, and a fifth to seventh connector mounting area in which the fifth to seventh connectors CN65 to CN67 are mounted. 454 to 456 and an element mounting area 457 in which a large number of elements are mounted are provided.

An MPU 452 is mounted near the center of the element mounting area 457, and a power outage monitoring device 461 is mounted between the MPU 452 and the connector group mounting area 453 in the element mounting area 457. The power outage monitoring device 461 has a power supply voltage terminal 461a to which a +36V (DC36V) power supply voltage is input from the power supply/launch control device 78 via the first connector CN61, and a power supply/launch control device 78 via the first connector CN61. A drive voltage terminal 461b to which a DC5V element drive voltage is input, a reset signal terminal 461c for transmitting a reset signal to the MPU 452, and a power failure signal terminal 461d for transmitting a power failure signal to the MPU 452. Note that in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), illustration of the wiring connecting the first connector CN61 and the power failure monitoring device 461 is omitted.

The MPU 452 includes a reset signal receiving terminal 462 that receives a reset signal, and a power outage signal receiving terminal 463 that receives a power outage signal. On the solder surface of the main control board 451, which is the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 451a, there is a reset signal wiring 464 that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 461c and the reset signal receiving terminal 462, and a power outage signal terminal 461d. A power outage signal wiring 465 is formed to electrically connect the power outage signal receiving terminal 463 and the power outage signal receiving terminal 463. Note that the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 are wiring patterns made of copper, and are covered with an insulating resist so as not to be exposed on the surface.

The power outage monitoring device 461 monitors the power supply voltage input from the power supply/launch control device 78, and controls the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 when the power supply voltage drops below the power outage reference voltage of +24V (DC24V). Specify that the supply will be cut off. When the power outage monitoring device 461 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the power outage monitoring device 461 lowers the power outage signal output to the MPU 452 from the HI state to the LOW state. The main CPU 64 recognizes that the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 will be stopped by detecting the fall of the power outage signal from the HI state to the LOW state, and similarly to the first embodiment, A power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27)).

The power outage monitoring device 461 lowers the reset signal from the HI state to the LOW state after a predetermined period of time (specifically, 9 milliseconds) after lowering the power outage signal. The operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped when the reset signal falls. In order to execute the power outage process, the element drive voltage supplied to the MPU 452 needs to be maintained at +5V (DC5V) until the power outage process ends. In this embodiment, the power failure reference voltage is set to 24V so that sufficient time can be secured to execute the power failure process. Note that the power failure reference voltage is not limited to +24V and may be any voltage as long as sufficient time can be secured to execute the power failure process.

<Power outage information storage processing>
Next, the power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU 64 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S201 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27).

In the power outage information storage process, first, it is determined whether a fall of the power outage signal received from the power outage monitoring device 461 from the HI state to the LOW state has been detected (step S1101), and the falling of the power outage signal is detected. If not (step S1101: NO), the main power outage information storage process is ended.

On the other hand, if a falling edge of the power outage signal is detected (step S1101: YES), power outage processing (processing in steps S1102 to S1104) is executed. Specifically, first, the checksum of the main side RAM 66 is calculated (step S1102), and the calculated checksum is saved (step S1103). Thereafter, the power failure flag provided in the main side RAM 66 is set to "1" (step S1104), and the main power failure information storage process is ended. The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 64 to determine that the power outage process (processing from step S1102 to step S1104) has been normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 64 is stopped. be.

Next, the manner in which the power outage process is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 56(a) to 56(g). 56(a) shows the period during which the power outage process is executed by the main CPU 64, and FIG. 56(b) shows the power supply voltage input from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the power outage monitoring device 461. 56(c) shows the element drive voltage input from the power source/launch control device 78 to the power outage monitoring device 461, FIG. 56(d) shows the state of the power outage signal, and FIG. 56(e) shows the state of the reset signal. , FIG. 56(f) shows the timing at which the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and FIG. 56(g) shows the timing at which the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 56(f), when the supply of operating power is started at timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 56(b) and 56(c), the power supply/launch control device 78, the power supply voltage and element drive voltage input to the power outage monitoring device 461 start rising. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(c), when the element drive voltage input from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the power outage monitoring device 461 reaches the normal operating range voltage (+5V) at timing t2, As shown in d), at the timing t2, the power outage monitoring device 461 raises the power outage signal from the LOW state to the HI state.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the power supply voltage input from the power supply/launch control device 78 to the power outage monitoring device 461 reaches +36V (DC36V) at timing t3. Thereafter, at timing t4, when a predetermined time (specifically 9 milliseconds) has elapsed from timing t2, the power outage monitoring device 461 raises the reset signal from the LOW state to the HI state, as shown in FIG. 56(e). . The main CPU 64 starts operating upon rising of the reset signal.

The time from timing t2 at which the power failure monitoring device 461 raises the power failure signal to timing t4 at which the reset signal is raised is a predetermined time (sufficient for stabilizing the element drive voltage supplied to the MPU 452 at +5V (DC5V)). Specifically, it is set to 9 milliseconds). This makes it possible to start the operation of the main CPU 64 after the MPU 452 is in a state where it can stably supply an element drive voltage of +5 V (DC 5 V).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(g), when the supply of operating power is stopped at timing t5, the power is input from the power source/launch control device 78 to the power outage monitoring device 461 as shown in FIG. 56(b). The power supply voltage starts to drop from +36V (DC36V) and becomes below the power outage reference voltage (specifically +24V) at timing t6. As shown in FIG. 56(d), the power outage monitoring device 461 lowers the power outage signal from the HI state to the LOW state at the timing t6.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the main CPU 64 detects the fall of the power outage signal in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 55) performed at timing t7, and also detects the fall of the power outage signal (power outage information The storage process (processing from step S1102 to step S1104 in FIG. 55) is started. The power outage processing ends at timing t8.

During the period from timing t7 when the power outage processing is executed to timing t8, the reset signal is maintained in the HI state as shown in FIG. 56(e), and the power supply is maintained as - The element drive voltage input from the launch control device 78 to the power outage monitoring device 461 is maintained at a normal voltage (specifically +5V). As a result, the power outage process can be completed before the operation of the main CPU 64 stops, and when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the game can be resumed from the state before the supply of operating power was stopped. can be restarted normally.

Thereafter, at timing t9, which is later than timing t8 and after a predetermined time (specifically 9 milliseconds) has elapsed from timing t6, a power outage occurs as shown in FIG. 56(e). The monitoring device 461 lowers the reset signal from the HI state to the LOW state. As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the element drive voltage input from the power source/launch control device 78 to the power outage monitoring device 461 begins to drop at timing t10.

As mentioned above, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped because a period sufficient for executing power outage processing is secured between when the power outage signal falls and when the reset signal falls. It is possible to complete the power outage processing earlier than the above.

Next, a configuration for reducing the influence of radiation noise on the reset signal wiring 464 connecting the power outage monitoring device 461 and the MPU 452 will be described.

As already explained, when the reset signal falls from the HI state to the LOW state, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped. Therefore, if only the reset signal falls due to the influence of noise without the power outage signal falling in advance, the power outage process (processing from step S1102 to step S1104 in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 55)) is executed. The operation of the main CPU 64 will stop without being updated. In this case, the power failure flag in the main RAM 66 is not set to "1", so a negative determination is made in step S105 of the main process (FIG. 26) and the main RAM 66 is cleared (step S108). Further, the power failure processing is executed when the power failure signal falls from the HI state to the LOW state. Therefore, when the power outage signal falls due to the influence of noise, the power outage processing is executed unnecessarily.

As already explained, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 are formed on the solder surface of the main control board 451, which is the plate surface opposite to the element mounting surface 451a. Further, as already explained with reference to FIG. 7 in the first embodiment, the main controller 60 is mounted so that the surface of the front case body 121 faces the rear of the Pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed on the island equipment, the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 faces toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. A game ball replenishment path for successively replenishing game balls from the island equipment to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) in the payout mechanism section 73 exists behind the pachinko machine 10 than the main control board 451. In the game ball supply route, static electricity is generated due to the game balls rubbing against each other and the friction between the game balls and the ball path. Radiation noise is generated when this static electricity is suddenly discharged. As already explained, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 are provided on the opposite side of the main control board 451 from the game ball supply route. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal and the power outage signal will be affected by radiation noise generated by the game ball supply route.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), a noise countermeasure surface 466 is provided on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 to reduce the influence of radiated noise on the reset signal and power outage signal. ing. The noise countermeasure pattern 466 is a metal (specifically, copper) pattern covered with an insulating resist, and is electrically connected to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 451. The noise countermeasure surface 466 is formed by etching metal foil (specifically, copper foil). The noise countermeasure pattern 466 is provided on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 at a position corresponding to the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 formed on the solder surface of the main control board 451. , 465 and the game ball supply route, and a noise countermeasure surface 466 is provided along these signal wirings 464, 465 so as to be wider than these signal wirings 464, 465. It is being

The noise countermeasure surface 466 exists between the game ball supply route for sequentially replenishing game balls from the island equipment to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) in the payout mechanism section 73, and the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465. are doing. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route is transferred to the noise countermeasure surface 466 that is located on the front side of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 when viewed from the source of the noise (game ball supply route). It is absorbed and escapes to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 451. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the reset signal and the power outage signal will be affected by electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route.

In a configuration in which the reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465 are provided on the opposite side of the game ball supply route with the main control board 451 in between, the reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465 are connected to the game ball supply route. By having a configuration in which a metal noise countermeasure plate 466 is further provided between them, the ability to shield radiation noise generated in the game ball supply route is enhanced, and the influence of radiation noise on the reset signal and power outage signal is reduced. It can be further reduced.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A metal noise countermeasure surface 466 is provided between the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 and a game ball supply route for replenishing the tank 75 with game balls. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route is handled by a noise countermeasure surface 466 that is located on the front side of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 when viewed from the source of the noise (game ball supply route). Absorbed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the reset signal and the power outage signal will be affected by electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route.

By reducing the possibility that the reset signal will fall due to the influence of radiated noise, the power outage processing ( This prevents the main CPU 64 from stopping its operation without executing the power outage information storage process (steps S1102 to S1104 in FIG. 55). Further, since the possibility that the power outage signal falls due to the influence of radiation noise is reduced, unnecessary execution of power outage processing is prevented.

The noise countermeasure pattern 466 is a solid pattern made of metal (specifically, copper), and is electrically connected to the ground plane of the main control board 451. Electrical noise absorbed by the noise countermeasure surface 466 escapes to the ground plane. This increases the possibility that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path will be absorbed by the noise countermeasure flat 466, and reduces the possibility that the influence of the noise will affect the reset signal and power outage signal. can do.

The noise countermeasure flat 466 is arranged in such a manner that the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 are arranged along the signal wirings 464 and 465 so that the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 face the game ball supply route with the noise countermeasure flat 466 in between. 464 and 465. This reduces the possibility that electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route will reach the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 without being absorbed by the noise countermeasure flat 466. Therefore, the influence of radiation noise on the reset signal and the power outage signal can be reduced.

The MPU 452 and the power outage monitoring device 461 are insert-mounted components, and the MPU 452 and the power outage monitoring device 461 are mounted on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451. The terminals 462, 463 of the MPU 452 and the terminals 461a to 461d of the power failure monitoring device 461 are soldered to the solder surface of the main control board 451, which is the opposite side of the element mounting surface 451a. For this reason, in the main control board 451, the entire reset signal wiring 464 for the power failure monitoring device 461 to transmit a reset signal to the main control board 451 and the power failure signal wiring 465 for transmitting the power failure signal are provided on the solder surface. In addition, it is possible to provide a noise countermeasure surface 466 on the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451 in an area opposite to the entire reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465 with the main control board 451 in between. can. As a result, electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465 with the noise countermeasure plane 466 in between reaches the reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465. The noise can be blocked by a noise countermeasure layer 466 that is located before the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 when viewed from the source (gaming ball supply route).

The reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 are provided on the opposite side of the game ball supply route with the main control board 451 in between. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal and the power outage signal will be affected by radiation noise generated in the game ball supply route.

The power outage monitoring device 461 is mounted on the main control board 451 on which the MPU 452 is mounted. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the power failure monitoring device 461 is mounted on a different board from the MPU 452, the total length of the reset signal wiring 464 can be shortened, and the total length of the power failure signal wiring 465 can be shortened. . This reduces the influence of radiation noise on the reset signal and power outage signal.

If the operation of the main side CPU 64 is stopped without executing the power outage process, the main side RAM 66 is cleared after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. Thereby, even if the operation of the main CPU 64 is not properly stopped, it is possible to prevent the game from being played while the information stored in the main RAM 66 is maintained.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment in that surface mount components are mounted on the main control board. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the seventh embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the seventh embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 57(a) is a plan view showing the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 in this embodiment, and FIG. 57(b) is a plan view of the main control board 471 showing the center area enlarged.

Similar to the first embodiment, the main control board 471 is equipped with a large number of surface mount components such as an MPU 472, first to seventh connectors CN71 to CN77, and various elements. These surface mount components are mounted only on one side of the main control board 471, and that side serves as an element mounting surface 471a. The terminals of these surface mount components are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a by surface mount technology such as reflow soldering.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), the MPU 472 is mounted near the center of the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471, and the MPU 472 and the first to fourth A power failure monitoring device 473 is installed between the connectors CN71 to CN74.

Similarly to the seventh embodiment, the power outage monitoring device 473 has a power supply voltage terminal 473a into which a +36V (DC36V) power supply voltage is input from the power supply/launch control device 78 via the first connector CN71, and a first connector. A drive voltage terminal 473b to which a DC5V element drive voltage is input from the power supply/launch control device 78 via the CN71, a reset signal terminal 473c for transmitting a reset signal to the MPU 472, and a reset signal terminal 473c for transmitting a power outage signal to the MPU 472. A power outage signal terminal 473d is provided. Note that in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the wiring connecting the first connector CN71 and the power failure monitoring device 473 is omitted.

Like the seventh embodiment, the MPU 472 includes a reset signal receiving terminal 474 that receives a reset signal, and a power outage signal receiving terminal 475 that receives a power outage signal. The main control board 471 includes a reset signal wiring 476 that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset signal receiving terminal 474, and a power outage signal wiring that electrically connects the power outage signal terminal 473d and the power outage signal receiving terminal 475. 477 is formed.

On the main control board 471, a part of the reset signal wiring 476 is placed near the reset signal terminal 473c of the power failure monitoring device 473 and near the reset signal receiving terminal 474 of the MPU 472, opposite to the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. A first reset-side through hole 481 and a second reset-side through hole 482 are formed on the back surface of the substrate, which is the side plate surface. In addition, in the main control board 471, a part of the power outage signal wiring 477 is placed near the power outage signal terminal 473d in the power outage monitoring device 473 and in the vicinity of the power outage signal receiving terminal 475 in the MPU 472 in order to route a part of the power outage signal wiring 477 to the back surface of the board of the main control board 471. A first through hole 483 on the power outage side and a second through hole 484 on the power outage side are formed. These through holes 481 to 484 are through holes formed through the main control board 471 in the board thickness direction, and their inner peripheral surfaces are plated with a conductive metal such as copper.

The reset signal wiring 476 includes a reset side first wiring 476a provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the reset signal terminal 473c to the reset side first through hole 481, and a reset side first through hole 476a provided on the back surface of the substrate. 481 to the reset side second through hole 482; and a reset side third wiring 476c provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the reset side second through hole 482 to the reset signal receiving terminal 474. It is equipped with The length of the second reset wiring 476b is set longer than the total length of the first reset wiring 476a and the third reset wiring 476c, and most of the reset signal wiring 476 is provided on the back surface of the board. There is.

The power outage signal wiring 477 includes a power outage side first wiring 477a that is provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extends from the power outage signal terminal 473d to the power outage side first through hole 483, and a power outage side first through hole that is provided on the back side of the board. 483 to the power outage side second through hole 484, and a power outage side third wiring 477c provided on the element mounting surface 471a and extending from the power outage side second through hole 484 to the power outage signal receiving terminal 475. It is equipped with The length of the second power outage side wiring 477b provided on the back side of the board is set longer than the total length of the power outage side first wiring 477a and the power outage side third wiring 477c provided on the element mounting surface 471a. Most of the power outage signal wiring 477 is present on the back surface of the board.

As already explained in the seventh embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted so that the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Most of the reset signal wiring 476 and power outage signal wiring 477 are provided on the back side of the board, and are opposite to the game ball replenishment route for replenishing game balls to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) across the main control board 471. It is located on the side. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal and the power outage signal will be affected by radiation noise generated by the flow of the game balls.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), on the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471, there is a A noise countermeasure surface 485 is provided. The noise countermeasure pattern 485 is a metal (specifically, copper) pattern covered with an insulating resist, and is electrically connected to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 471. It is GND solid (ground solid). The noise countermeasure surface 485 is formed by etching metal foil (specifically, copper foil). The noise countermeasure plane 485 is placed on the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471 at a position corresponding to the reset side second wiring 476b and the power outage side second wiring 477b formed on the back surface of the main control board 471. In such a manner that a noise countermeasure flat 485 exists between almost the entirety of the second wirings 476b, 477b and the game ball supply route, the noise is removed from the second wirings 476b, 477b along these second wirings 476b, 477b. It is also designed to be wide.

The noise countermeasure pattern 485 occupies most of the game ball replenishment route for sequentially replenishing game balls from the island equipment to the tank 75 (FIG. 2) in the payout mechanism section 73, the reset signal wiring 476, and the power outage signal wiring 477. It exists between the second wirings 476b and 477b. The electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route is absorbed by the noise countermeasure surface 485 that is located on the front side of the second wiring 476b, 477b when viewed from the source of the noise (game ball supply route). , escapes to the ground plane (not shown) of the main control board 471. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the reset signal and the power outage signal will be affected by electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route.

In the configuration in which the second wirings 476b, 477b are provided on the opposite side of the game ball supply route with the main control board 471 in between, a metal wire is further provided between the second wirings 476b, 477b and the game ball supply route. By having the configuration in which the noise countermeasure plate 485 is provided, it is possible to increase the ability to shield the radiation noise generated in the game ball supply route, and further reduce the influence of the radiation noise on the reset signal and the power outage signal. .

As already explained, the MPU 452 and the power outage monitoring device 461 are surface-mounted components, and the reset signal terminal 473c and the power outage signal terminal 473d of the MPU 452, and the reset signal receiving terminal 474 and the power outage signal receiving terminal 475 of the power outage monitoring device 461 are It is soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the control board 471. A reset side first wiring 476a that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset side first through hole 481, and a reset side third wiring that electrically connects the reset side second through hole 482 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474. 476c on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the reset-side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, on the back surface of the substrate. Thereby, the noise countermeasure surface 485 can be made to exist between the reset side second wiring 476b and the game ball supply route. Also, a first wiring 477a on the power outage side electrically connects the power outage signal terminal 473d and the power outage side first through hole 483, and a power outage side first wiring 477a electrically connects the power outage side second through hole 484 and the power outage signal receiving terminal 475. By providing the third wiring 477c on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the second power failure side wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power failure signal wiring 477, on the back surface of the board. Thereby, the noise countermeasure surface 485 can be present between the second wiring 477b on the power outage side and the game ball supply route.

Since the reset signal is prevented from falling under the influence of radiation noise, the operation of the main CPU 64 is prevented from being stopped without executing the power outage process. Furthermore, by preventing the power outage signal from falling due to the influence of radiation noise, it is possible to prevent unnecessary power outage processing from being executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A metal noise countermeasure flat 485 is provided between the reset side second wiring 476b that occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476 and the game ball supply route for replenishing the tank 75 with game balls. This reduces the possibility that the reset signal will fall due to the influence of radiation noise. Therefore, the operation of the main CPU 64 is prevented from being stopped without executing the power outage process.

The reset-side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, is provided on the back surface of the board, and is provided on the opposite side of the game ball supply path with the main control board 471 in between. Thereby, in the main control board 471 on which surface-mounted components are mounted, the possibility that the reset signal will be affected by radiation noise generated in the game ball supply route is reduced.

A metal noise countermeasure flat 485 is provided between the power outage side second wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power outage signal wiring 477, and the game ball supply route. This reduces the possibility that the power outage signal will fall due to the influence of radiation noise. Therefore, unnecessary power outage processing is prevented from being executed.

The second wiring 477b on the power outage side, which occupies most of the power outage signal wiring 477, is provided on the back side of the board, and the second wiring 477b on the power outage side is provided on the opposite side of the main control board 471 from the game ball supply route. It is being This reduces the possibility that the power outage signal will be affected by radiation noise generated in the game ball supply route.

The MPU 472 and the power failure monitoring device 473 are surface-mounted components, and the reset signal terminal 473c of the power failure monitoring device 473 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474 of the MPU 472 are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. A reset side first wiring 476a that electrically connects the reset signal terminal 473c and the reset side first through hole 481, and a reset side third wiring that electrically connects the reset side second through hole 482 and the reset signal receiving terminal 474. 476c on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the reset-side second wiring 476b, which occupies most of the reset signal wiring 476, on the back surface of the substrate. Thereby, the noise countermeasure surface 485 can be made to exist between the reset side second wiring 476b and the game ball supply route.

The MPU 472 and the power failure monitoring device 473 are surface-mounted components, and the power failure signal terminal 473d of the power failure monitoring device 473 and the power failure signal receiving terminal 475 of the MPU 472 are soldered to the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471. A first wiring 477a on the power outage side that electrically connects the power outage signal terminal 473d and the first through hole 483 on the power outage side, and a third wiring on the power outage side that electrically connects the second through hole 484 on the power outage side and the power outage signal receiving terminal 475. 477c on the element mounting surface 471a side, it is possible to provide the power outage side second wiring 477b, which occupies most of the power outage signal wiring 477, on the back surface of the board. Thereby, the noise countermeasure surface 485 can be present between the second wiring 477b on the power outage side and the game ball supply route.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) In the first embodiment, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 121 instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the back case body 122. The front facing plate part 141 of the front case body 121 has four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the element facing surface 141a for position adjustment when assembling the main control board 61 with the front case body 121. The substrate position adjustment boss used is integrally formed. The substrate position adjustment boss is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the element facing surface 141a toward the back side facing plate portion 123. Board fixing boss insertion holes through which the board position adjustment bosses can be inserted are formed at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the main control board 61. The lateral dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the lateral movement of the front case body 121 is restricted in a state where the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixation boss insertion hole. It is set slightly larger than . The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole that extends vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is such that the front case body 121 is allowed to move approximately 1 mm in the vertical direction when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set approximately 1 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment boss.

In the step of assembling the main control board 61 to the front case body 121, the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss, and then the main control board 61 is slid toward the front facing plate part 141. be done. The lower upright wall 143 of the front case body 121 has a part on the back side facing plate part 123 side of the lower upright wall 143 that is in contact with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 and is connected to the front case body 121. A first board guide portion is provided to guide the main control board 61 upward. When the main control board 61 is guided upward with respect to the front case body 121 by the first board guide part, the free ends of the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159. , 164-166. In this state, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are located at the center of the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the vertical direction.

The upper upstanding wall 142 of the front case body 121 is provided with a main control board that contacts the upper long side 61a of the main control board 61 after being guided upward by the first board guide part. A second substrate guide portion is provided to guide the substrate 61 downward. By guiding the main control board 61 downward with respect to the front case body 121 by the second board guide part, the first to seventh connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the first to seventh connector insertion holes 156 to 159, 164 to 166 in the vertical direction, and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are the lower upright wall portions 101c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. ~104c.

The front side facing plate part 141 has cylindrical front board fixing bosses used for fixing the main control board 61 to the front case body 121 at the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the element facing surface 141a. It is integrally formed. The front board fixing boss protrudes from the element facing surface 141a toward the main control board 61, and a screw hole is formed at the free end of the front board fixing boss to allow the main control board 61 to be fixed with screws. Board fixing through holes are formed in the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the main control board 61 so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the front board fixing boss. These four board fixing through holes are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four front board fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is guided downward with respect to the front case body 121 by the second board guide part, and is screwed to the front board fixing boss from the back side of the board 61f to the rear side of the front case body 121. Fixed.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing boss and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 allow the main control board 61 to be guided downward relative to the front case body 121 by the second board guide section. The front part is shifted in the vertical direction and cannot be fixed with screws, and after the main control board 61 is guided downward by the second guide part, it is communicated and can be fixed with screws. Therefore, when the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are close to the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, The main control board 61 can be fixed to the body 121.

In this way, even if the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 121, the play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 156b to 159b can be reduced. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive tampering jig such as a wire into the play area.

(2) In the first to third embodiments, the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 (position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 in the second embodiment, position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 in the third embodiment) are inserted. Instead of the boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (the boss insertion holes 301 to 304 in the second embodiment, and the boss insertion holes 385 to 388 in the third embodiment), the four corners of the main control board 61 (the upper left side in front view, A configuration may be adopted in which cutouts are provided in the lower left side, upper right side, and lower right side) into which the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted. The notches on the upper left side and the upper right side are provided halfway down from the top end of the main control board 61, and the cutouts on the bottom left side and the bottom right side are provided halfway up from the bottom end of the main control board 61. It is set across. These four notches have a horizontal dimension that restricts movement of the front case body 121 in the left-right direction when the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the notches, and It has a vertical dimension that allows movement in the vertical direction. A configuration in which horizontal movement of the front case body 121 is restricted while vertical movement of the front case body 121 is permitted in a state in which the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 are inserted into the notches. By doing so, the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the lower peripheral edges 275b to 159b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278) 278b, in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 approach the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The front case body 121 can be moved until the front case body 121 is moved.

(3) In the first to third embodiments described above, the first to fourth connectors, which are insertion mounting components, are mounted on the main control board 61 instead of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4, which are surface mount components. It may be configured as follows. In this configuration, the first to fourth connectors extend linearly in the direction penetrating the main control board 61 in the board thickness direction, instead of the terminals 111 to 116 having fixing parts 111b to 116b extending along the element mounting surface 61e. It is equipped with an extending rod-shaped pin.

The first connector includes 17 connectors arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, at intervals such that the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the first connector as the arrangement direction. One end side pin and 17 other end side pins lined up in a row at equal intervals (specifically, the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction as the arrangement direction. It is equipped with a pin. The row of pins on one end side and the row of pins on the other end side are arranged at a predetermined interval in the lateral direction of the first connector (specifically, an interval such that the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm). The row of pins on one end side is arranged on the one end side (lower upright wall section 101c side) in the transverse direction, and the row of pins on the other end side is arranged on the other end side (upper side) in the transverse direction. (upstanding wall portion 101b side). The second connector includes two pins arranged at the center of the second connector in the lateral direction. These two pins are arranged at a predetermined distance in the longitudinal direction of the second connector (specifically, a distance such that the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm). The third connector includes two pins arranged at the center of the third connector in the lateral direction. These two pins are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction of the third connector (specifically, an interval such that the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm). The 10 fourth connectors are arranged in a row at equal intervals (specifically, at intervals such that the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction of the fourth connector as the arrangement direction. One end side pin and 10 other end side pins lined up in a row at equal intervals (specifically, the distance between the axes of adjacent pins is 2.54 mm) with the longitudinal direction as the arrangement direction. It is equipped with a pin. The row of pins on one end side and the row of pins on the other end side are arranged at a predetermined interval in the lateral direction of the fourth connector (specifically, an interval such that the distance between the axes of the pins is 2.54 mm) The row of pins on one end side is arranged on the one end side (lower standing wall 104c side) in the transverse direction, and the row of pins on the other end side is arranged on the other end side (upper side) in the transverse direction. The upright wall portion 104b side).

The pins of the first to fourth connectors are inserted into through holes formed by penetrating the main control board 61 in the board thickness direction, and are soldered on the back surface 61f of the board, and are attached to the element mounting surface 61e side. is not exposed. In this way, even if the pins of the first to fourth connectors are not exposed on the element mounting surface 61e side, the pins of the first to fourth connectors and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 ( In the second embodiment, use a flathead screwdriver to check the play that exists between the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 279 and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment. If a conductive tampering jig, such as At the same time, there is a risk that a fraudulent act may be carried out by touching the exposed wiring with the tampering jig.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, as described above, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the bottom of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are The lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b are close to the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the side peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b is small. In the second embodiment, as described above, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portion 275b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 The lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play between the lower peripheral edge portions 275b and 278b is reduced. In the third embodiment, as described above, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portion 362b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 The lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play between the lower peripheral portions 362b and 365b is reduced. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the first to third embodiments described above, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b (second It is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which a fraudulent jig is inserted into the play that exists between the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b in the embodiment and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b in the third embodiment). . Therefore, it is possible that the above-mentioned fraudulent acts may be carried out on the wiring that is electrically connected to the pins at one end of the first connector, the pins of the second connector, the pins of the third connector, and the pins at one end of the fourth connector. It is possible to reduce the

(4) In the first to third embodiments described above, the fixed portions 113b and 114b of the terminals 113 and 114 of the second connector CN2 and the third connector CN3 are located above (upper side) the center of the housings 102 and 103 in the vertical direction. It may be configured to extend from the position of the upright wall portions 102b, 103b) to straddle between the lower upright wall portions 102c, 103c and the lower peripheral edge portions 157b, 158b along the element mounting surface 61e. . Also in this configuration, the lower standing walls 102c, 103c and the lower peripheral edges 157b, 158b (lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b in the second embodiment, lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b in the third embodiment) If a conductive tampering jig, such as a wire, is inserted between the two, there is a risk that the tampering jig will come into contact with the fixing parts 113b and 114b. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, as described above, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the bottom of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are The lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b are close to the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the side peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b is small. In the second embodiment, as described above, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portion 275b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 The lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play between the lower peripheral edge portions 275b and 278b is reduced. In the third embodiment, as described above, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portion 362b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 The lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play between the lower peripheral portions 362b and 365b is reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity in which the fraudulent jig is brought into contact with the fixing parts 113b, 114b.

(5) In the first to third embodiments described above, a configuration may be provided in which one of the left side play and right side play of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 is made smaller than the other. . Specifically, position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 and boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 and boss insertion holes 301 to 304 in the second embodiment, and position adjustment bosses 381 to 381 in the third embodiment) 384 and boss insertion holes 385 to 388), the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are connected to the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, and in the third embodiment, the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365). In this state, the front case body 121 (in the second embodiment, the front The case body 232 (in the third embodiment, the front case body 312) is guided.

First to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 279 in the second embodiment, first to fourth connector insertion holes 275 to 279 in the third embodiment) If a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the play that exists between the periphery of the fourth front connector insertion hole 362 to 365), use the tampering jig to mount the element. There is a risk that a fraudulent act may be carried out by scraping the resist covering the wiring provided on the surface 61e to expose the wiring on the surface and bringing the fraud jig into contact with the exposed wiring. In contrast, a configuration that reduces the play that exists between the left standing wall portions 101d to 104d of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the left peripheral edges of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is adopted. With this configuration, among the wiring patterns provided on the element mounting surface 61e, the wiring patterns arranged around the left side of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are prioritized from the above-mentioned fraudulent activity. can be protected.

(6) In the first to third embodiments described above, the main control board 61 is provided with boss insertion holes 175 to 178 (in the second embodiment, boss insertion holes 301 to 304, third In the embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the boss insertion holes 385 to 388) are formed, a configuration in which the boss insertion holes are formed as long holes extending in an oblique direction may be used. Specifically, position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 (second A boss insertion hole is formed into which the position adjustment bosses 294 to 297 in the embodiment and the position adjustment bosses 381 to 384 in the third embodiment are inserted. These four boss insertion holes are elongated holes extending in a direction slanting downward toward the right. Note that these four boss insertion holes may be formed as elongated holes extending in a direction slanting downward toward the left.

With the position adjustment bosses 171 to 174 inserted into the boss insertion holes, the front case body 121 (the front case body 232 in the second embodiment, the front case body 312 in the third embodiment) is inserted into the back case body 122. It is movable diagonally upward to the left and diagonally downward to the right with respect to (the back case body 234 in the second embodiment and the back case body 313 in the third embodiment). The first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are connected to the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 ~274, in the third embodiment, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are present at the center in the vertical direction of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365), and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are After being inserted into the fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, by moving the front case body 121 diagonally upward to the left with respect to the back case body 122, the lower side of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 Peripheral parts 156b to 159b (lower peripheral parts 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover-side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the second embodiment, first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 278b in the third embodiment) The lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b) of the connectors 365 can be brought close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. This reduces the play that exists between the lower upstanding walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. can do.

In this way, even if the boss insertion hole is formed as a long hole extending diagonally, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes By reducing the play that exists between the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of 156 to 159, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a tampering tool such as a wire into the play.

(7) In the first to third embodiments described above, the locking receiving parts 101h to 104h are provided on the upper upright wall parts 101b to 104b, and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are to the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, in the third embodiment) The first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365) are positioned below the center in the vertical direction, and the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connector insertion holes. It may be configured to be inserted through ports 156 to 159. In this configuration, since the locking receiving portions 101h to 104h are provided on the upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are connected in the vertical direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. After inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 while maintaining their positional relationship, The front case body 121 (the front case body 232 in the second embodiment, the front case body 312 in the third embodiment) is connected to the back side facing plate part 123 (the back side facing plate part 235 in the second embodiment, the front case body 312 in the third embodiment). In this embodiment, the front case body 121 can be fixed to the back case body 122 with screws by sliding it toward the back side facing plate portion 315).

Therefore, the step of moving the front case body 121 upward relative to the back case body 122 after inserting the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 into the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 is omitted. The lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 The lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b of the fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 (in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365) It can be a state.

(8) In the first to third embodiments described above, when a fraudulent act of illegally manipulating a signal is performed, a signal that would pay out a relatively large number of game balls is preferentially protected from the fraudulent act. On the other hand, a signal for which the number of game balls to be paid out in the event of the fraudulent act is relatively small is assigned to the other end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. 116 may be used. As already explained in the first to third embodiments, the terminal 115 on one end of the fourth connector CN4 is different from the terminal 116 on the other end when a conductive tampering jig is brought into contact with the terminal 115 on the one end side and the signal is tampered with. Priority protection from manipulation fraud. Since the number of one end side terminals 115 in the fourth connector CN4 is limited, the number of signals assigned to the one end side terminals 115 is also limited.

In this configuration, the detection signals of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a and the detection signals of the special electric detection sensor 45a are assigned to the terminal 115 at one end, while the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a is assigned to the other end. It is assigned to terminal 116. As already explained in the first embodiment, even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. is paid out. For this reason, if a fraudulent act of illegally manipulating the detection signals of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a occurs in succession, such as when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, 10 The payout of prize balls is executed continuously. In addition, if a fraudulent act of illegally manipulating the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a occurs consecutively, such as when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, the payout of 15 prize balls will be executed continuously. It will be done. In these cases, the economic loss incurred by the game hall in a short period of time becomes large.

By assigning a detection signal that causes a relatively large number of game balls (for example, 10 or more game balls) to be paid out when the signal is fraudulently manipulated to one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, the game hall can be shortened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that may cause a lot of time and economic loss.

(9) In the first to third embodiments described above, among the signals regarding the presence or absence of a game ball entering the ball entry section, the transition to a state advantageous for the player due to the occurrence of the entry of a game ball Terminals 113 to 115 are preferentially protected from fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating the signals in the second to fourth connectors CN2 to CN4. It may also be configured such that it is assigned to As a signal regarding the presence or absence of a game ball entering the ball entering part, first to third winning a prize opening detection sensors 42a to 44a, special electric detection sensor 45a, first operating opening detection sensor 46a, second operating opening detection sensor 47a, Detection signals from the exit detection sensor 48a and the gate detection sensor 49a are present.

In this configuration, among these detection signals, the detection signals of the first operating port detection sensor 46a, the second operating port detection sensor 47a, and the gate detection sensor 49a, which are related to transition to a state advantageous to the player, are used to detect fraudulent activity. It is assigned to terminals 113 to 115 that are preferentially protected from the above. On the other hand, the detection signals of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a, special electric detection sensor 45a, and out opening detection sensor 48a, which are not related to the transition to a state advantageous to the player, are sent to the other end terminal of the fourth connector CN4. 116. The other end side terminal 116 is not a target to be preferentially protected from fraudulent activities.

As already explained in the first embodiment, a winning lottery is held using the win to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. If a jackpot or small jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the prize entered into the first operating port 33, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when a jackpot or a small win is won in a winning lottery based on a prize entered into the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a gaming mode in which it is possible to win a prize using the special electric winning device 32, and is an advantageous state for the player. As already explained in the first embodiment, an internal lottery is carried out using winning in the through gate 35 as a trigger. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. The general power open state is a state in which the general power accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner and a prize can be won through the second operation port 34, and is an advantageous state for the player.

Among the signals regarding the presence or absence of a game ball entering the ball entry section, there is a signal regarding the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section where the entry of a game ball causes a transition to a state advantageous to the player. By configuring the configuration in which only the signals related to the presence or absence are assigned to the terminals 113 to 115, which are preferentially protected from illegal acts of illegally manipulating the signals in the second to fourth connectors CN2 to CN4, it is possible to prevent unauthorized signal manipulation. It is possible to prevent a situation advantageous for a player from being fraudulently created due to fraudulent operations.

(10) In the first to third embodiments, the special electric drive signal is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the special electric drive unit 32c, and the special electric drive signal is transmitted from the main controller 60 to the general electric drive unit 34c. The general power drive signal may be assigned to one end side terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, and the special power open detection sensor 32b and the general power open detection sensor 34b may be provided.

If a fraudulent act of illegally transmitting a special electric drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32c is performed, the special electric prize winning device 32 will be illegally set to an open state, so that winnings to the special electric winning device 32 will be fraudulently won. I'm forced to do it. In a configuration in which the special electricity release detection sensor 32b is not provided, the main side CPU 64 cannot grasp the situation where winnings to the special electricity prize winning device 32 are fraudulently occurring. If a fraudulent act of illegally transmitting a special electric drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34c is performed, the ordinary electric accessory 34a will be illegally set to the open state, so it is difficult to enter the prize into the second operating port 34. It is caused illegally. In a configuration in which the normal power release detection sensor 34b is not provided, the main CPU 64 cannot grasp the situation in which a prize is fraudulently won to the second operating port 34.

On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the special electric drive signal and the general electric drive signal are assigned to the terminal 115 on the one end side of the fourth connector CN4, fraudulent acts of illegally manipulating the special electric drive signal and the general electric drive signal can be prevented. It can be prevented. In addition, in this configuration, only one of the special electric drive signal and the general electric drive signal is assigned to one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, and the other is assigned to the other end terminal 116. You can also use it as

(11) In the first to third embodiments described above, all wiring for transmitting external signals to the management computer of the gaming hall via the external terminal board 79 is prioritized from fraudulent activity at the first connector CN1. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the terminal 111 is assigned to one end side terminal 111 that is protected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the transmission of external signals to the management computer of the gaming hall from being illegally blocked and the management computer from being unable to accurately grasp the payout status of game balls in the pachinko machine 10.

(12) In the first to third embodiments, the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 Wiring patterns formed on the element mounting surface 61e for electrically connecting the fixed parts 111b, 113b to 115b and the electronic components mounted on the main control board 61 are connected to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN1. The lower standing walls 101c to 104c of CN4 and the lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 (in the second embodiment, the It may also be configured to extend across the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b (in the third embodiment, the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365). good.

The surface of the wiring pattern is covered with a resist, but if the resist is scraped, it may be inserted into the play that exists between the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b. There is a risk that a conductive tampering tool such as a wire may come into electrical contact with the wiring pattern. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, as described above, the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the bottom of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are The lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b are close to the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play existing between the side peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b is small. In the second embodiment, as described above, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portion 275b of the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 The lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play between the lower peripheral edge portions 275b and 278b is reduced. In the third embodiment, as described above, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the lower peripheral edge portion 362b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 The lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c so that the play between the lower peripheral portions 362b and 365b is reduced.

Therefore, the fixed portions 111b, 113b to 115b of the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4, and the main control Wiring patterns for electrically connecting electronic components mounted on the board 61 are connected to the lower upstanding walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 and the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159. Even in a configuration in which the wall extends across the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b, the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 156b to 159b (in the second embodiment, the lower peripheral edge 275b to 278b (in the third embodiment, lower peripheral portions 362b to 365b)) to prevent a tampering jig inserted into the play that exists between the wire pattern and the wiring pattern from electrically contacting the wiring pattern. Can be done.

(13) In the first to third embodiments described above, the occurrence of a V winning is identified based on the detection of a game ball passing through the V winning passage area, and the V winning passage area is The signal line of the detection signal for detecting a passing game ball is connected to one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the terminal 114 of the third connector CN3, and the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4. It may also be configured such that it is assigned to Specifically, a variable display unit is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the areas where game balls can flow down in the game area PA are the upper area and the upper area. In contrast, it is divided into a left side area and a right side area that are continuous below the left side area and a right side area, and a lower side area that is continuous below the left side area and the right side area. When the firing operating device 28 is operated with the amount of rotation in the first range, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area → left area → lower area, and when it is operated with the amount of rotation in the second range, it flows down the upper area. Flows down in the order of area → right area → lower area.

The lower area is provided with a first operating part that allows winning only when the game ball flows down the left side area of the left side area and the right side area. A second actuating part with a guiding unit is provided in the right-hand region. A game ball flowing down the right side area will not enter the second operating section if the guiding unit is in the non-guiding state, but will not enter the second operating section if the guiding unit is in the guiding state. I will do it. In the right area, a through winning section is provided vertically above the second operating section, a special electric winning device is provided downstream of the second operating section, and a distribution prize is provided below the special electric winning device. A prize winning device is provided. The game ball that wins in the through winning section can win in the second operating section, special electric winning device, or distribution winning device. In the through winning section, the special electric winning device, and the sorting winning device, winning is possible only when the game ball flows down the right side of the left side area and the right side area. When a ball enters the first operating section, second operating section, distribution winning device, and special electric winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, while when a ball enters the through winning section. Also, the payout of game balls is not executed. A lottery is held triggered by winning in the through-winning section, and if the result of the lottery is a win in the guidance execution state, the guidance unit of the second actuating section enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner. Transition.

A winning lottery is conducted based on the occurrence of winning in the first actuating part or the second actuating part. If either the 6R jackpot result or the 15R jackpot result is selected in the winning lottery, after the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends, the game will shift to the opening/closing execution mode in which it is possible to win a prize in the special electric winning device. . If any of the first to third small winning results is selected in the winning lottery executed based on winnings in the second operating section, after the game round corresponding to the small winning result ends, Shifts to the distribution execution mode in which it is possible to enter a prize into the distribution prize winning device. The sorting winning device is equipped with a sorting entrance of a size that allows game balls to pass through, and the sorting entrance can be put into a closed state where the game balls cannot pass through and an open state where the game balls can pass through. Equipped with a switchable distribution side opening/closing member. The game balls that have won at the sorting entrance are led out to a branch path formed in the base body of the sorting winning device. The branch passage includes an upstream passage area, a discharge passage area that is set to be continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage area, and a discharge passage area that is branched from an intermediate position of the discharge passage area. is equipped with a V-winning path area for guiding game balls to different sides. A switching piece is provided at a branch point in the discharge passage area to the V winning passage area, which is placed in the retracted position in the first state and placed in the V guiding position in the second state. The game balls flowing into the branch passage in the first state flow down the discharge passage area without being guided to the V winning passage area, and are detected by a count detection sensor provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece. By entering the second state, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage is guided by the switching piece, flows into the V winning passage area, and is detected by the V winning winning detection sensor provided in the V winning passage area. In the distribution execution mode, the game balls are basically detected by the V winning detection sensor.

Regardless of whether a game ball is detected by the count detection sensor or a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor, the same number of prize balls corresponding to the distribution winning device is paid out. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor in the distribution execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the sorting execution mode ends without any game ball being detected by the V winning prize detection sensor, the opening/closing execution mode does not occur. As already explained in the first to third embodiments, the one end terminal 115 of the fourth connector CN4 receives a signal that is set to the one end terminal 115 using a conductive tampering jig such as a wire. It is preferentially protected from fraudulent activities that involve illegally manipulating the information. In this configuration, the detection signal of the V winning prize detection sensor is input to the main side CPU 64 via the one end side terminal 115. Thereby, it is possible to prevent fraud in which the detection signal of the V winning prize detection sensor is fraudulently manipulated to fraudulently generate the opening/closing execution mode after the sorting execution mode. In addition, the signal line of the detection signal of the V winning prize detection sensor is connected to the one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, and the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, which are preferentially protected from fraudulent activities using conductive fraud jigs. It may be configured to be assigned to any one of the terminals 114 of the third connector CN3.

(14) In the second embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the back case body 234, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 232. The front facing plate portion 261 of the front case body 232 has four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the element facing surface 261a for position adjustment when assembling the main control board 61 with the front case body 232. The substrate position adjustment boss used is integrally formed. The substrate position adjustment boss is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the element facing surface 261a toward the back side facing plate portion 235. At the four corners of the main control board 61 (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side), board fixing boss insertion holes are formed through which the board position adjustment bosses can be inserted. The lateral dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the lateral movement of the front case body 232 is restricted when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixation boss insertion hole. It is set slightly larger than . The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole that extends vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is such that the front case body 232 is allowed to move approximately 1 mm in the vertical direction when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set approximately 1 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment boss.

As already explained in the second embodiment, the connector cover 233 is fixed to the front case body 232. In the step of assembling the main control board 61 to the front case body 232 to which the connector cover 233 is fixed, after the board position adjustment bosses are inserted into the board fixing bosses, the main control board 61 is moved to face the front side. It is slid toward the plate portion 261. The lower upright wall 263 of the front case body 232 has a part on the back side facing plate part 235 side of the lower upright wall 263 that is in contact with the lower long side 61b of the main control board 61 and is connected to the front case body 232. A first board guide portion is provided to guide the main control board 61 upward. When the main control board 61 is guided upward with respect to the front case body 232 by the first board guide part, the free ends of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and the free ends of the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted to the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293. In this state, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located at the center in the vertical direction of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278, and The fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are located at the center of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293 in the vertical direction.

The upper upstanding wall 262 of the front case body 232 has a part that contacts the upper long side 61a of the main control board 61 after being guided upward by the first board guide part, and is connected to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233. A second board guide portion is provided to guide the main control board 61 downward. By guiding the main control board 61 downward with respect to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 by the second board guide part, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are connected to the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 and the first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the vertical direction, and the fifth to seventh connectors CN5 to CN7 are moved to the bottom of the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 291 to 293. Move below the center in the vertical direction. As a result, the lower peripheral edge portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover-side insertion holes 275 to 278 are brought close to the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. .

The front side facing plate part 261 has cylindrical front board fixing bosses used for fixing the main control board 61 to the front case body 232 at the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the element facing surface 261a. It is integrally formed. The front board fixing boss protrudes from the element facing surface 261a toward the main control board 61, and a screw hole through which the main control board 61 can be fixed with screws is formed at the free end of the front board fixing boss. Board fixing through holes are formed in the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the main control board 61 so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the front board fixing boss. These four board fixing through holes are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four front board fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is guided downward with respect to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 by the second board guide part, and is screwed to the front board fixing boss from the back side of the board 61f, thereby fixing the main control board 61 to the front case body. It is fixed to the back side of 232.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing boss and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 allow the main control board 61 to be positioned downwardly relative to the front case body 232 and the connector cover 233 by the second board guide section. Before the main control board 61 is guided by the second guide part, it is shifted in the vertical direction and cannot be fixed with screws, and after the main control board 61 is guided downward by the second guide part, it is communicated and can be fixed with screws. Therefore, the lower peripheral portions 275b to 278b of the first to fourth cover-side insertion holes 275 to 278 are exposed in a state where they are close to the lower upright wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The main control board 61 can be fixed to the case body 232.

In this way, even if the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 232, the play that exists between the lower upright walls 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 275b to 278b can be reduced. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the play.

(15) In the third embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the main control board 61 is fixed to the back case body 313, the main control board 61 may be fixed to the front case body 312. The front facing plate portion 351 of the front case body 312 has four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the element facing surface 351a for position adjustment when assembling the main control board 61 with the front case body 312. The substrate position adjustment boss used is integrally formed. The substrate position adjustment boss is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the element facing surface 351a toward the back side facing plate portion 315. Board fixing boss insertion holes through which the board position adjustment bosses can be inserted are formed at the four corners (upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side) of the main control board 61. The lateral dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is set to the diameter of the board position adjustment boss so that the lateral movement of the front case body 312 is restricted when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixation boss insertion hole. It is set slightly larger than . The board fixing boss insertion hole is a long hole that extends vertically along the short sides 61c and 61d of the main control board 61. The vertical dimension of the board fixing boss insertion hole is such that the front case body 312 is allowed to move approximately 2 mm in the vertical direction when the board position adjustment boss is inserted into the board fixing boss insertion hole. It is set approximately 2 mm larger than the diameter of the position adjustment boss.

As already explained in the third embodiment, the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the main control board 61. In the process of assembling the main control board 61 to which the connector compatible plate 314 is fixed to the front case body 312, after the board position adjustment bosses are inserted into the board fixing bosses, the main control board 61 is placed on the front side. It is slid toward the opposing plate section 351. Due to the slide, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth plate side insertion holes 336 to 339 and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365, and the fifth to seventh connectors The connectors CN5 to CN7 are inserted into the fifth to seventh connector insertion holes 374 to 376. Thereafter, the main control board 61 is manually slid upward with respect to the front case body 312 and the connector corresponding plate 314 until the board position adjustment boss contacts the upper end of the board fixing boss. As a result, the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are brought close to the lower upstanding wall portions 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. .

The front facing plate portion 351 has cylindrical front board fixing bosses used for fixing the main control board 61 to the front case body 312 at the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the element facing surface 351a. It is integrally formed. The front board fixing boss protrudes from the element facing surface 351a toward the main control board 61, and a screw hole through which the main control board 61 can be fixed with screws is formed at the free end of the front board fixing boss. Board fixing through holes are formed in the upper left side, lower left side, lower right side, and upper right side of the main control board 61 so that the main control board 61 can be screwed to the front board fixing boss. These four board fixing through holes are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the four front board fixing bosses described above. The main control board 61 is guided downward with respect to the front case body 312 by the second board guide part, and is screwed to the front board fixing boss from the back side of the board 61f to the rear side of the front case body 312. Fixed.

The screw holes formed in the front board fixing bosses and the board fixing through holes formed in the main control board 61 are arranged so that the main control board 61 moves upward until the board position adjustment boss abuts the upper end of the board fixing boss insertion hole. Before the main control board 61 is slid upwardly, it is shifted in the vertical direction and cannot be fixed with screws, and after the main control board 61 is slid upward, it is communicated and becomes able to be fixed with screws. Therefore, the lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are close to the lower upstanding walls 101c to 104c of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4. The main control board 61 can be fixed to the case body 312.

In this way, even if the main control board 61 is fixed to the front case body 312, the play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral parts 362b to 365b can be reduced. , it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a conductive fraudulent jig such as a wire into the play.

(16) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, a power supply line for supplying operating power to the main CPU 64 may be provided in place of the fraud detection line 406. On the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401, a GND line 405 and the power supply line are provided close to each other. Therefore, while operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver may be inserted into the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401. When the GND line 405 and the power supply line are made conductive by the jig, a state is created in which operating power is not supplied to the main CPU 64. As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped.

On the solder surface 401f of the main control board 401, a large number of power supply contact parts are provided in place of the large number of fraud detection contact parts 408. The power supply contact portion includes a solder bulge that bulges out by approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f. All power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. Since the solder bulging portion of the power supply contact portion bulges out from the solder surface 401f, the possibility of contact with the tampering jig when the tampering jig is brought close to the soldering surface 401f is increased. There is. While operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 and one or more GND contact parts are inserted. 407 and one or more power supply contact parts, the GND line 405 and the power supply line are electrically connected, creating a state in which operating power is not supplied to the main CPU 64. As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped.

In this way, the power supply line is provided on the element mounting surface 401e of the main control board 401, and the solder bulge of the power supply contact portion is provided on the solder surface 401f. If fraud is committed by bringing a tampering jig close to the element mounting surface 401e or the soldering surface 401f of the board 401, the operation of the main CPU 64 can be stopped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in a state where fraud using the fraud jig has been committed.

(17) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the combination of the GND line 405 and the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact portion 408 is located at a different location from the peripheral portion of the main control board 401. It is also possible to have a configuration provided in. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a combination of the GND line 405 and the GND contact section 407, and the fraud detection line 406 and the fraud detection contact section 408 are provided around the MPU 402. Specifically, a GND line having a width of approximately 1.5 mm is provided around the MPU 402 on the element mounting surface 401e at a predetermined interval (for example, approximately 2 mm interval) from the pins 411 to 413 of the MPU 402. In addition, a fraud detection line having a width of approximately 1.5 mm is arranged parallel to the GND line at a predetermined interval (specifically, approximately 1 mm interval) on the opposite side of the MPU 402 from the GND line. The GND line and the fraud detection line are provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the MPU 402. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the GND line and the fraud detection line are provided only in a part of the periphery of the MPU 402.

The surfaces of the GND line and the fraud detection line are not covered with resist and are exposed. Therefore, if a fraudulent act is performed by inserting a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver into the element mounting surface 401e side of the main control board 401 and attempting to contact the MPU 402, the tampering jig will connect the GND line. and the fraud detection line become electrically connected, and the voltage of the fraud detection line drops. As in the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line, and when it detects that a drop in the voltage has occurred, installs a conductive fraud jig on the main control board 401. Identify that fraudulent activity has occurred.

The solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 has a predetermined interval (for example, between the centers of adjacent GND contact parts) along the GND line provided on the element mounting surface 401e, which is the plate surface on the opposite side of the solder surface 401f. A plurality of GND contact portions are provided at intervals of approximately 3 mm. Similar to the fourth embodiment, the GND contact portion passes through the main control board 401 in the board thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). It includes a through hole, a land circularly provided around the periphery of the through hole on the element mounting surface 401e and the soldering surface 401f, and a solder bulge extending from the soldering surface 401f. All GND contacts are electrically connected to the GND line by through holes. The solder bulge protrudes approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f, and when a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the solder surface 401f, the tampering jig comes into contact with the solder bulge. The possibility has been increased.

The solder surface 401f of the main control board 401 has a predetermined interval (for example, the center of adjacent fraud detection contact parts) along the fraud detection line provided on the element mounting surface 401e, which is the plate surface opposite to the solder surface 401f. A plurality of fraud detection contact portions are provided at intervals of approximately 3 mm. Similar to the fourth embodiment, the fraud detection contact portion penetrates the main control board 401 in the board thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). A through hole, a land provided in a circular shape around the periphery of the through hole on the element mounting surface 401e and the soldering surface 401f, and a solder bulging portion protruding from the soldering surface 401f. All tamper detection contacts are electrically connected to the tamper detection line by through holes. The solder bulge protrudes approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f, and when a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the solder surface 401f, the tampering jig comes into contact with the solder bulge. The possibility has been increased.

A wiring pattern for electrically connecting the MPU 402 and other insertion components mounted on the main control board 401 is formed through the gap between the GND contact part and the fraud detection contact part on the solder surface 401f. If a fraudulent act is performed by inserting a conductive tampering jig into the solder surface 401f side of the main control board 401 and attempting to contact the pins 411 to 413 of the MPU 402, the tampering jig will By coming into contact with both of the detection contact parts, the GND line and the fraud detection line become electrically connected, and the voltage of the fraud detection line drops. This allows the main CPU 64 to identify that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraud jig close to the main control board 401 has been performed.

In this way, by configuring the main control board 401 to have a combination of the GND line and the GND contact part, and the fraud detection line and the fraud detection contact part provided around the MPU 402, the main control board 401 can be mounted. Among the inserted and mounted components, it is possible to detect fraudulent activities in which a conductive fraudulent jig is brought close to the MPU 402 in particular. In addition to the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, in which a combination of a GND line 405 and a GND contact part 407, and a fraud detection line 406 and a fraud detection contact part 408 are provided around the main control board 401, this embodiment As in the above configuration, a combination of a GND line and a GND contact part, and a fraud detection line and a fraud detection contact part may be provided around the MPU 402.

(18) In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, instead of the configuration in which the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line 406 (fraud detection line 436 in the sixth embodiment), the main CPU 64 detects fraud. A configuration may also be adopted in which the current flowing through line 406 is monitored. In this configuration, when operating power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, a current of, for example, 5 mA flows through the fraud detection line 406 as a current for fraud detection. When the GND line 405 (GND line 435 in the sixth embodiment) and the fraud detection line 406 are electrically connected by a conductive fraud jig such as a flathead screwdriver, the amount of current flowing through the fraud detection line 406 is the reference value. A state in which the current amount is reduced to less than the amount of current (for example, 2.5 mA) or a state in which no current flows through the fraud detection line 406 occurs. The main CPU 64 monitors the current flowing through the fraud detection line 406, and the state where the amount of current flowing through the fraud detection line 406 has decreased to less than the reference current amount or no current is flowing through the fraud detection line 406. When the occurrence of a situation is detected, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a conductive fraud jig has been carried out. In this way, even with a configuration in which the main CPU 64 monitors the current flowing through the fraud detection line 406, it is possible to detect fraud in which a conductive fraud jig is brought close to the main control board 61.

(19) In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, instead of the configuration in which the GND line 405 is provided around the entire circumference of the main control board 401 (main control board 431 in the sixth embodiment), the GND line 405 may be provided only on a part of the periphery of the main control board 401. For example, a GND line and a right GND line are provided on the left and right edges of the main control board 401, which is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, while GND lines are provided on the upper and lower edges of the main control board 401. It is also possible to have no configuration. The left GND line is a straight line along the left side 401c (left side 431c in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401 from the upper end to the lower end of the left side 401c with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width). The right GND line extends along the right side 401d (right side 431d in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401 from the upper end to the lower end of the right side 401d (specifically, approximately 1 .5mm width) and extends linearly.

In this configuration, the fraud detection line 406 (fraud detection line 436 in the sixth embodiment) includes an upper fraud detection line, a lower fraud detection line, a left fraud detection line, and a right fraud detection line. The left fraud detection line is spaced approximately 1 mm to the right from the left GND line, and the right fraud detection line is spaced approximately 1 mm to the left from the right GND line. These left fraud detection line and right fraud detection line have a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width) and extend linearly in the vertical direction from the upper end to the lower end of the main control board 401.

As described above, no GND line is provided at the upper and lower peripheral edges of the main control board 401. Therefore, it is possible to provide fraud detection lines near the upper side 401a and the lower side 401b of the main control board 401. The upper fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) along the upper side 401a (upper side 431a in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401, and extends from the upper end of the left fraud detection line to the right fraud detection line. It extends linearly in the left and right direction to the top end. In addition, the lower fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) along the lower side 401b (lower side 431b in the sixth embodiment) of the main control board 401, and extends from the lower end of the left fraud detection line to the right fraud detection line. It extends linearly in the left and right direction to the lower end of the detection line. These upper, lower, left, and right fraud detection lines are electrically connected.

In a configuration in which the vertical dimension of the main control board 401 is smaller than the horizontal dimension, a GND line and a fraud detection line are provided on the left and right peripheral edges of the main control board 401; Only a fraud detection line is provided on the periphery. As a result, if a fraudulent act is performed by inserting a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver from the side of the main control device 60 and approaching the left or right side of the main control board 61, While having a configuration that allows the detection of fraudulent activity when the GND line and the fraud detection line are electrically connected by a tool, a wide vertical area is secured in the main control board 401 where insertion mounted components or surface mounted components can be placed. can do. Note that this configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the GND line is provided only on the left and right peripheral edges of the main control board 401, but one or more of the four peripheral edges on the top, bottom, left, and right of the main control board 401. By adopting a configuration in which GND lines are provided on less than one peripheral edge and no GND lines are provided on the remaining peripheral edges, GND lines and fraud detection lines are provided on all the upper, lower, left, and right peripheral edges. Compared to the configuration, it is possible to secure a wider area on the main control board in which insertion-mounted components or surface-mounted components can be mounted.

(20) In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, the GND line is not provided on the peripheral edge of the main control board 61 located on the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13 among the upper, lower, left, and right peripheral edges. You can also use it as As described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. has been done. Further, as already explained in the first embodiment, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). When the main control device 60 is mounted on the inner frame 13, the right sides 401d and 431d of the main control boards 401 and 431 are located on the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13, and the left sides 401c and 431c are located on the inner frame 13. 13 is located on the rotating tip side. If a fraudulent act is carried out by inserting a conductive tampering tool such as a flathead screwdriver from the side of the main control device 60 and approaching the main control boards 401 and 431 without removing the main control device 60 from the inner frame 13, If you try to insert the tampering jig from the rotation base end side of the frame 13 (the right side 401d, 431d side of the main control boards 401, 431), it will , the lower side 401b, 431b side, or the left side 401c, 431c side), it is necessary to open the inner frame 13 widely with respect to the outer frame 11, compared to the case where the tampering jig is inserted from the lower side 401b, 431b side, or the left side 401c, 431c side. For this reason, a fraudulent act in which a tampering jig is inserted from the side of the main control board 401, 431 to approach the main control board 401, 431 is prohibited on the upper side 401a, 431a side and the lower side 401b, 431b side of the main control board 401, 431. , or from the left sides 401c and 431c.

In this configuration, a GND line and a fraud detection line are provided on the upper peripheral edge, lower peripheral edge, and right peripheral edge of the main control boards 401 and 431, while the right peripheral edge of the main control boards 401 and 431 is provided with a GND line and a fraud detection line. Only a fraud detection line is provided and no GND line is provided. The main control boards 401 and 431 are provided with an upper GND line, a lower GND line, and a left GND line. The upper GND line extends linearly along the upper sides 401a, 431a of the main control boards 401, 431 from the left end to the right end of the upper sides 401a, 431a with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width). At the same time, the lower GND line runs linearly along the lower sides 401b, 431b of the main control board 401 from the left end to the right end of the lower sides 401b, 431b with a predetermined width (specifically, approximately 1.5 mm width). Extending. Further, the left GND line extends linearly along the left sides 401c, 431c of the main control boards 401, 431 from the upper end to the lower end of the left sides 401c, 431c with a predetermined width (specifically, a width of approximately 1.5 mm). There is.

The main control boards 401 and 431 are provided with an upper fraud detection line, a lower fraud detection line, a left fraud detection line, and a right fraud detection line. The upper fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm downward from the upper GND line, and the lower fraud detection line is provided at a distance of approximately 1 mm upward from the lower GND line. Further, the left side fraud detection line is provided at an interval of about 1 mm to the right from the left side GND line. As described above, no GND line is provided on the right peripheral edge of the main control board 61. Therefore, it is possible to provide the fraud detection line near the right sides 401d and 431d of the main control boards 401 and 431. The right side fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) along the right sides 401d and 431d of the main control board 401, and is linear in the vertical direction from the right end of the upper fraud detection line to the right end of the lower fraud detection line. It extends to The upper fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) and extends linearly from the upper end of the left fraud detection line to the upper end of the right fraud detection line, and the lower fraud detection line has a predetermined width. It has a width (approximately 1.5 mm width) and extends linearly from the lower end of the left fraud detection line to the lower end of the right fraud detection line. Further, the left fraud detection line has a predetermined width (approximately 1.5 mm width) and extends linearly from the left end of the upper fraud detection line to the left end of the lower fraud detection line. These upper, lower, left and right fraud detection lines are electrically connected.

Since only a fraud detection line is provided on the right side periphery of the main control boards 401, 431 and no GND line is provided, a GND line and a fraud detection line are provided on the right side periphery of the main control boards 401, 431. Compared to the configuration shown in FIG.

In this manner, in the configuration in which the right sides 401d and 431d of the main control boards 401 and 431 are the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13, and the left sides 401c and 431c are the rotation tip side of the inner frame 13, A GND line and a fraud detection line are provided on the upper, lower, and left side peripheries of the main control boards 401 and 431, while only a tamper detection line is provided on the right side periphery of the main control boards 401 and 431. By adopting a configuration in which a It is possible to secure a wide area in which components can be mounted.

(21) In the fourth to sixth embodiments, the GND lines 405, 435 and the GND contact portions 407, 437 are more connected to the main control board 401, 431 than the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and the fraud detection contact portions 408, 438. Instead of the structure in which the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and the fraud detection contact parts 408, 438 are provided on the outer peripheral side of the main control board 401, 431, the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and the fraud detection contact parts 408, 438 are located closer to the outer peripheral side of the main control board 401, 431 than the GND lines 405, 435 and the GND contact parts 407, 437. It is also possible to have a configuration provided in. GND lines 405, 435 and GND contact parts 407, 437 are arranged in parallel with fraud detection lines 406, 436 and fraud detection contact parts 408, 438, and conductive fraud jigs are installed on main control boards 401, 431. When a fraudulent act is performed, the fraud jig is connected to both the GND lines 405, 435 and the GND contact parts 407, 437, and the fraud detection lines 406, 436 and the fraud detection contact parts 408, 438. By having a configuration that allows a state of contact, it is possible for the main CPU 64 to grasp the fraudulent act.

(22) In the sixth embodiment, a power supply line for supplying operating power to the main CPU 64 may be provided in place of the fraud detection line 406. The periphery of the back surface 431f of the main control board 431 is doubly surrounded by an outer GND line 435 and an inner power supply line. The GND line 435 and the power supply line are provided close to each other and are covered with an insulating resist (not shown) so as not to be exposed on the surface.

On the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431, a large number of power supply contact parts are provided in place of the large number of fraud detection contact parts 438. All power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. The power supply contact portion includes a solder bulge that bulges out by approximately 1 mm from the solder surface 401f. All power supply contacts are electrically connected to the power supply line. Since the solder bulging portion of the power supply contact portion bulges out from the solder surface 401f, the possibility of contact with the tampering jig when the tampering jig is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e is increased. ing. While operating power is being supplied to the main CPU 64 through the power supply line, a conductive tampering tool such as a flathead screwdriver is inserted into the element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 to make one or more GND contacts. 437 and one or more power supply contact parts, the GND line 435 and the power supply line are electrically connected, creating a state in which operating power is not supplied to the main CPU 64. As a result, the operation of the main CPU 64 is stopped.

In this way, by providing a power supply line on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431 and a power supply contact portion on the element mounting surface 431e, it is possible to mount the elements on the main control board 431. If fraud is committed by bringing a fraud jig close to the surface 431e, the operation of the main CPU 64 can be stopped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in a state where fraud using the fraud jig is committed.

(23) In the sixth embodiment, the combination of the GND line 435 and the GND contact portion 437 and the fraud detection line 436 and the fraud detection contact portion 438 is provided at a location different from the peripheral portion of the main control board 431. A configuration may also be used. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a combination of a GND line and a GND contact part, and a fraud detection line and a fraud detection contact part are provided around the MPU 432. Specifically, on the back surface 431f of the main control board 431, a predetermined interval (for example, GND lines having a width of approximately 1.5 mm are provided at intervals of approximately 2 mm (approximately 2 mm intervals), and GND lines having a width of approximately 1.5 mm are provided from the GND line to the opposite side of the MPU mounting area at a predetermined interval (specifically, approximately 1 mm intervals). Fraud detection lines each having a width of approximately 1.5 mm are arranged in parallel to the GND line with an interval of 1.5 mm. The GND line and the fraud detection line are provided so as to surround the entire periphery of the MPU 432. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the GND line and the fraud detection line are provided only in a part of the periphery of the MPU mounting compatible area.

The element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 is arranged at a predetermined interval (for example, between the centers of adjacent GND contact parts) along the GND line provided on the back surface 431f of the board, which is the opposite side of the element mounting surface 431e. A plurality of GND contact portions are provided at intervals of approximately 3 mm. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the GND contact portion penetrates the main control board 431 in the board thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). It includes a through hole, a land circularly provided around the periphery of the through hole on the element mounting surface 431e and the back surface 431f of the substrate, and a solder bulge extending from the element mounting surface 431e. All GND contacts are electrically connected to the GND line by through holes. The solder bulge protrudes approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e, and when a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, the tampering jig will touch the solder bulge. The possibility of contact is increased.

The element mounting surface 431e of the main control board 431 is provided at a predetermined interval (for example, between adjacent fraud detection contact portions) along the fraud detection line provided on the back surface 431f of the board, which is the opposite side of the element mounting surface 431e. A plurality of fraud detection contact portions are provided at intervals of approximately 3 mm between centers. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the fraud detection contact portion penetrates the main control board 431 in the board thickness direction, and its inner peripheral surface is plated with a conductive metal (specifically, copper). A through hole is provided, a land is provided in a circle around the periphery of the through hole on the element mounting surface 431e and the back surface 431f of the substrate, and a solder bulge protrudes from the element mounting surface 431e. All tamper detection contacts are electrically connected to the tamper detection line by through holes. The solder bulge protrudes approximately 1 mm from the element mounting surface 431e, and when a conductive tampering jig such as a flathead screwdriver is brought close to the element mounting surface 431e, the tampering jig will touch the solder bulge. The possibility of contact is increased.

A wiring pattern for electrically connecting the MPU 432 and other inserted and mounted components mounted on the main control board 431 is formed through the gap between the GND contact part and the fraud detection contact part on the element mounting surface 431e. . If a fraudulent act is performed by inserting a conductive tampering jig into the element mounting surface 431e side of the main control board 431 and attempting to contact the terminals 441 to 443 of the MPU 432, the tampering jig will By coming into contact with both of the fraud detection contact parts, the GND line and the fraud detection line become electrically connected, and the voltage of the fraud detection line drops. As in the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 64 monitors the voltage of the fraud detection line and installs a conductive fraud jig on the main control board 431 when it detects that a drop in the voltage has occurred. Identify that fraudulent activity has occurred. This allows the main CPU 64 to identify that a fraudulent act of bringing a conductive fraud jig close to the main control board 431 has been performed.

In this way, by configuring the main control board 431 in which the combination of the GND line and the GND contact part, and the fraud detection line and the fraud detection contact part are provided around the MPU 432, the combination of the GND line and the GND contact part is provided around the MPU 432. Among the surface-mounted components, it is possible to detect fraudulent activities in which a conductive fraud jig is brought close to the MPU 432 in particular. In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment described above, in which a combination of a GND line 435 and a GND contact part 437, and a fraud detection line 436 and a fraud detection contact part 438 are provided around the main control board 431, this embodiment As in the above configuration, a combination of a GND line and a GND contact portion, and a fraud detection line and a fraud detection contact portion may be provided around the MPU 402.

(24) In the seventh to eighth embodiments, instead of the noise countermeasure surfaces 466, 485, the solder surfaces of the main control boards 451, 471 are attached to the element mounting surfaces 451a, 471a of the main control boards 451, 471. A part of the area corresponding to the formed reset signal wiring 464 and power outage signal wiring 465 (in the eighth embodiment, the reset side second wiring 476b and the power outage side second wiring 477b) is electrically connected to the ground. A configuration may also be adopted in which a plurality of noise countermeasure wirings are provided. Specifically, these noise countermeasure wirings are wirings having a width of approximately 1.5 mm and formed by etching metal foil (specifically, copper foil). A plurality of noise countermeasure wirings are formed between the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 and the game ball supply route. At least a part of the electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route is noise that exists on the front side of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 when viewed from the source of the noise (game ball supply route). It is absorbed by the noise countermeasure wiring and escapes to the ground electrically connected to the noise countermeasure wiring. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the reset signal and the power outage signal will be affected by electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route.

By adopting a configuration in which electrical noise generated in the game ball supply path is absorbed by a plurality of anti-noise wirings, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 formed on the solder surface of the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a are It is also possible to form wiring patterns other than the noise countermeasure wiring in the region corresponding to the noise countermeasure wiring. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in wiring design on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a while taking noise countermeasures against the reset signal and the power outage signal.

(25) In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465 (in the eighth embodiment, the reset side second wiring 476b and the power outage side second wiring 477b) are provided at separate positions, and a noise countermeasure pattern may be provided for each of the reset signal wiring 464 and the power outage signal wiring 465. Specifically, on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a, a reset-side noise countermeasure pattern is provided in a region corresponding to the reset signal wiring 464 provided on the solder surface. Further, on the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a, a power outage side noise countermeasure flat is provided in a region corresponding to the power outage signal wiring 465 provided on the solder surface. These noise countermeasure surfaces are formed by etching metal foil (specifically, copper foil), and are electrically connected to the ground provided on the main control boards 451 and 471.

The reset-side noise countermeasure pattern exists between substantially the entire reset signal wiring 464 and the game ball supply route. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route is absorbed by the reset side noise countermeasure layer that exists on the front side of the reset signal wiring 464 when viewed from the source of the noise (game ball supply route). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route will affect the reset signal.

The noise countermeasure pattern on the power outage side exists between substantially the entire power outage signal wiring 465 and the game ball supply route. The electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route is absorbed by the power outage side noise countermeasure layer that is present on the front side of the power outage signal wiring 465 when viewed from the source of the noise (game ball supply route). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route will affect the power outage signal. Note that in this configuration, only one of the reset side noise countermeasure plan and the power outage side noise countermeasure plan may be provided.

(26) In the seventh to eighth embodiments described above, instead of the configuration in which the power outage monitoring devices 461, 473 are mounted on the main control boards 451, 471, the power outage monitoring devices 461, 473 are installed on the main control boards 451, 471. It may also be configured to be mounted on a power outage monitoring board different from the above. Specifically, the main control boards 451, 471 and the power outage monitoring board are electrically connected by a plurality of signal lines. A male connector is provided at the end of the signal line on the main control board 451 side that connects the main control board 451 and the power outage monitoring board, and a female connector to which the male connector is attached is provided on the main control board 451. A type of power outage compatible connector is provided. The power failure compatible connector is electrically connected to a reset signal transmission terminal that is electrically connected to the reset signal terminals 461c and 473c of the power failure monitoring devices 461 and 473, and to power failure signal terminals 461d and 473d of the power failure monitoring devices 461 and 473. It is equipped with a power outage signal transmission terminal.

On the element mounting surface 451a of the main control board 451, a solder surface that is the opposite side of the element mounting surface 451a (in the eighth embodiment, on the element mounting surface 471a of the main control board 471, the solder surface Reset signal wiring, which is part or all of the wiring pattern that connects the reset signal transmission terminal of the power failure response connector and the reset signal reception terminal 462 of the MPU 452, is provided on the back surface of the board (the opposite side of the board). In addition, a power outage signal wiring is provided which is part or all of the wiring pattern connecting the power outage signal transmission terminal of the power outage response connector and the power outage signal receiving terminal 463 of the MPU 452.

On the element mounting surfaces 451a and 471a of the main control boards 451 and 471, the areas corresponding to the reset signal wiring and power outage signal wiring provided on the solder surface are reset by the influence of electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route. Noise countermeasures are provided to prevent signals and power outage signals from being affected. The noise countermeasure surface is formed by etching metal foil (specifically, copper foil), and is electrically connected to the ground provided on the main control boards 451 and 471.

The reset side noise countermeasure pattern exists between almost the entire reset signal wiring and power outage signal wiring and the game ball supply route. Electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route is absorbed by the noise countermeasure layer that is located closer to the reset signal wiring and power outage signal wiring when viewed from the source of the noise (game ball supply route). . Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the influence of electrical noise generated in the game ball supply route will affect the reset signal and the power outage signal.

(27) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the audio emission control device 70 based on the command sent from the main control device 60, the display control device 90 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 60. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 90 controls the audio emission control device 70. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 70 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of these control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Furthermore, the structure of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 70 and the structure of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 70 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, when a game is started based on the operation of a start lever, the results of the lottery processing of the winning combinations executed are recorded as history information. The history information may be used to calculate the actual winning probability of each role, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history information is stored as history information. The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using the information, or the ratio of the number of games staying in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may make notifications corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters.

Further, to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to eighth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configurations of the above-mentioned other embodiments may be applied in any combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A control board (main control board 61 in the first to third embodiments) that performs control related to the game,
A board box that accommodates the control board (front case body 121 and back case body 122 in the first embodiment, front case body 232 and back case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body in the third embodiment) 312 and back case body 313),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Predetermined connectors (first connector CN1, second connector CN2, third connector CN3, and fourth connector CN4) are mounted on a predetermined board surface (element mounting surface 61e) of the control board,
The board box has a connection opening (through which the predetermined connector is inserted) to enable connection of the signal transmission means (male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connector. The first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes in the third embodiment holes 362 to 365) are formed,
A predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector (the lower side surface of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a predetermined peripheral edge portion (the first In the embodiment, lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, In the third embodiment, the distance between the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 (lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b) of the predetermined connector is a specific side surface (the upper side surface of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b of the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) that is on the opposite side to the predetermined side surface with the terminals 111 to 116) therebetween, and the connection opening. (in the first embodiment, the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, and in the second embodiment, the first to fourth connector insertion holes) The distance is shorter than the distance between the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the holes 271 to 274, and in the third embodiment, the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365. A gaming machine characterized in that the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set.

According to feature A1, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined periphery is shorter than the distance between the specific lateral surface and the specific periphery, so that unauthorized use can occur between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined periphery. The possibility of fraudulent insertion of a jig can be reduced. Information regarding the player's interests among the wiring for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board on the predetermined side surface side where the distance between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening is shorter in the predetermined connector. By providing important wiring for transmitting information regarding the transition of gaming states, information regarding abnormal states, etc., it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts with respect to the important wiring.

Note that as long as the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge may be in contact with each other. The predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge may be separated from each other.

Feature A2. Predetermined connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board (one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the one end terminal 115 of the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4) ) extends along the predetermined plate surface between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral edge of the connection opening. Game machine.

According to feature A2, the connection opening has the configuration of feature A1 above, and the connection opening is configured such that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge. In the configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the section is set, the predetermined connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board is configured to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge along the predetermined plate surface. It extends to Because the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral edge, unauthorized use of conductive material such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral edge is prohibited. It is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a jig and bringing it into electrical contact with the predetermined connection means. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the signal transmitted by the predetermined connection means will be tampered with.

Feature A3. As the connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, there is no connection means extending between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that:

According to feature A3, the connection opening has the configuration of feature A1 above, and the connection opening is configured such that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge. In a configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the section is set, as a connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, the connector is configured to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion along the predetermined plate surface. There are no extended connection means. Although the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge is long compared to the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge, it is possible to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge along the predetermined plate surface. Since there is no connecting means that extends to the specified side surface, the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive tampering jig such as a wire between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion is reduced. I can do it.

Feature A4. The control means (MPU 63) provided on the control board receives a signal (receiving payout) related to the provision of a predetermined profit (provision of gaming media to the player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) through the predetermined connection means. Command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted. .

According to feature A4, in a configuration having the configuration of feature A2 above, in which the predetermined connecting means extends between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface, the method is related to imparting a predetermined benefit. The signal is transmitted through the predetermined connection means. Further, it has the configuration of feature A1 above, and the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, so that the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive tampering jig is inserted between the terminals and electrically contacts the predetermined connection means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a fraud jig is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge to fraudulently change the signal regarding the granting of the predetermined profit.

Feature A5. The specific connection means (the other end side terminal 112 of the first connector CN1, the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4) that electrically connects the predetermined connector and the control board is connected to the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge part. extending along the predetermined plate surface between the
The control means (MPU 63) provided on the control board receives a signal (receiving payout) related to the provision of a predetermined profit (provision of gaming media to the player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) through the predetermined connection means. Command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted, and the signals not related to the provision of the predetermined profit are transmitted through the specific connection means. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein: is transmitted.

According to feature A5, the connection opening has the configuration of feature A1 above, and the connection opening is configured such that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. In addition to having a configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the portion is set, the predetermined connecting means extends so as to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. In a configuration in which a signal regarding the granting of a predetermined profit is transmitted through a predetermined connection means, a conductive tampering jig such as a wire may be inserted between a predetermined side surface and a predetermined peripheral edge. It is possible to prevent unauthorized electrical contact with the predetermined connection means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the signal regarding the provision of a predetermined profit from being changed illegally.

Furthermore, a signal unrelated to the provision of a predetermined profit is transmitted through the specific connection means extending between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion so as to straddle the predetermined board surface. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraud jig such as a wire is inserted between a specific side surface and a specific peripheral part and comes into contact with a specific connection means, the prescribed profit will not be granted due to the fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent signals related to information from being changed illegally.

Feature A6. The predetermined connector includes engagement means (locking receivers 101h to 104h) that are provided on the predetermined side surface and engage with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector. Prepare,
The game according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the engaging means is located closer to the free end of the predetermined connector than the area facing the connection opening on the predetermined side surface. Machine.

According to feature A6, by providing the engagement means, when the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means are in a connected state, the state can be maintained. Since the engaging means is provided closer to the free end of the predetermined connector than the area facing the connection opening on the predetermined side surface, the presence of the engagement means causes the predetermined peripheral edge of the connection opening to It is possible to prevent the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined side surface from increasing, and it is also possible to prevent a fraudulent act of inserting a tampering jig between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge by the engaging means.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the specific side surface is not provided with the engaging means.

According to feature A7, the connection state between the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means can be maintained by having the configuration of feature A6 and having the engaging means provided on the predetermined side surface. It is possible. Due to the configuration in which the engagement means is provided only on the predetermined side surface of the predetermined side surface and the specific side surface, the predetermined connector is In order to allow the free end to be inserted into the connection opening, the play provided between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening can be made small. This makes it possible to reduce the play that exists between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening when the predetermined connector is inserted into the connection opening.

Feature A8. The board box is
A predetermined forming portion in which the connection opening is formed (the connector group corresponding plate portion 155a in the first embodiment, the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, and the connector group corresponding plate portion in the third embodiment) 361a) and
The relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is determined as the mounting position (in the first embodiment, the play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 156b to 159b is the upper upright wall part 101b). 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a, in the second embodiment, between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 271b to 274b. The position where the play that exists is smaller than the play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a, in the third embodiment, the position where the play exists between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c and the lower side The predetermined formation is performed at a position where the play existing between the peripheral edges 362b to 365b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall parts 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a. Blocking means for preventing relative movement of the control board with respect to the parts (front side first case fixing boss 183 to front side third case fixing boss 185 and back side first case fixing boss 186 to back side third case in the first embodiment) fixing boss 188, front side first case fixing boss 391 to front side third case fixing boss 393, and back side first case fixing boss 394 to back side third case fixing boss 396),
Equipped with
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is greater than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the distance is short.

According to feature A8, when the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge, the relative position of the predetermined control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is determined. This makes it easy to maintain this state by preventing any movement.

Feature A9. The blocking means is in a blocking state (in the first embodiment, in which the control board is prevented from moving relative to the predetermined formation part when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation part is the mounting position). The state in which the front side first case fixing boss 183 to the front side third case fixing boss 185 and the back side first case fixing boss 186 to the back side third case fixing boss 188 are fixed with screws, and in the third embodiment, the front side first case Feature A8 characterized in that fixing boss 391 to front side third case fixing boss 393 and back side first case fixing boss 394 to back side third case fixing boss 396 can be fixed with screws). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A9, by setting the control board in the blocking state using the blocking means, it is possible to maintain the state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. This can reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud jig such as a wire is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge.

Feature A10. The blocking state by the blocking means (in the first embodiment, the first case fixing boss 183 on the front side to the third case fixing boss 185 on the front side and the first case fixing boss 186 on the back side to the third case fixing boss 188 on the back side are fixed with screws) In the third embodiment, the first case fixing boss 391 on the front side to the third case fixing boss 393 on the front side and the first case fixing boss 394 on the back side to the third case fixing boss 396 on the back side are fixed with screws). In the released state, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is changed to the separation side position (in the first embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are connected to the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 In the second embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located in the vertical center of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274. In the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located at the center of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the vertical direction. It is a configuration that allows it to be in a position where it is in a state of
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the relation between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge part is greater than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. The gaming machine according to feature A8 or A9, characterized in that the distance between the two is long.

According to feature A10, in a configuration that includes the configuration of feature A8 and can make the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part the mounting position, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position. I can do it. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. Become. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, it is possible to facilitate the operation of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening. Thereafter, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part as the mounting position, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position. It is possible to create a situation where the distance is short.

Feature A11. The predetermined connector includes engagement means (locking receivers 101h to 104h) that are provided on the predetermined side surface and engage with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector. Prepare,
The engagement means is present on the predetermined side surface closer to the free end of the predetermined connector than the area facing the connection opening,
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is such that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion of the engagement means is directed toward the predetermined peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized in that the gaming machine has a dimension that is larger than or equal to a protruding dimension.

According to feature A11, by providing the engagement means, it is possible to maintain a state in which the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means are connected. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is equal to or larger than the dimension of the engagement means protruding from the predetermined side surface toward the predetermined peripheral edge portion. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, it is possible to facilitate the operation of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening.

Feature A12. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion is the separation side position, a space is created between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, and a space is also created between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, characterized in that the following occurs.

According to feature A12, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, a space is created between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, and a space is created between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral portion. A space may also be created between the specific peripheral portion. Thereby, in the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening, it is not necessary to finely adjust the relative position of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening, and the work can be made easier.

Feature A13. When the board box changes the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part from the separation side position to the mounting position, the board box is configured to move the control board or the control board so that the relative position becomes the mounting position. Any one of features A10 to A12 is characterized in that it includes a means for guiding an object integrated with the substrate (second guide part 182 in the first embodiment, second guide part 306 in the second embodiment) 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature A13, in the process of assembling the board box, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is directed from the separation side position to the mounting position by moving the control board or the integral part of the control board according to the guiding means. can be changed. This makes it easy to change the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part from the separation side position to the mounting position in the process, and also makes it possible to change the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part. The state of the mounting position can be created with good reproducibility.

Feature A14. The control board is located closer to the control board than the connection opening and narrows the range of the control board exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a shielding means (the connector cover 233 in the second embodiment, the connector compatible plate 314 in the third embodiment).

According to feature A14, by narrowing the range of the control board that is exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge, unauthorized use can be prevented in the gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge. If a fraudulent act of inserting a jig is performed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent jig will reach terminals, wiring patterns, etc. on the surface of the main control board. This makes it possible to prevent such fraudulent acts.

Feature A15. The shielding means includes a predetermined forming portion (a connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, a connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in the board box in which the connection opening is formed; The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that the game machine is interposed between the control board and a connecting part (fixing parts 111b to 116b) that electrically connects the predetermined connector to the control board.

According to feature A15, since the shielding means is located closer to the predetermined forming part than the connecting part, the shielding means can prevent the tampering jig from coming into contact with the connecting part. Since the shielding means is located closer to the control board than the predetermined formation portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding means from being illegally removed.

Feature A16. The shielding means includes a shielding side opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted (first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the second embodiment, first to fourth plate side openings in the third embodiment). Through holes 336 to 339) are formed,
The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the opening area of the shielding side opening is narrower than the opening area of the connection opening.

According to feature A16, the area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box around the predetermined connector on the control board is reduced compared to a configuration in which the shielding means is not provided and the predetermined connector is inserted only through the connection opening. can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud jig is brought into electrical contact with a region of the control board exposed to the outside of the board box.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to any one of features A14 to A16, wherein the shielding means is fixed to the control board.

According to feature A17, in a state where the shielding means is fixed to the control board, the shielding means moves following the control board. Therefore, it is possible to change the relative position of the connection opening with respect to the predetermined connector while preventing the relative position of the shielding means from changing with respect to the predetermined connector mounted on the control board.

Feature A18. The board box is
a predetermined forming portion (in the third embodiment, the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a) in which the connection opening is formed;
Preventing means for preventing relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part (a first case fixing boss on the front side in the third embodiment) when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. 391 - front side third case fixing boss 393 and back side first case fixing boss 394 - back side third case fixing boss 396),
Equipped with
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is greater than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is a configuration with a short distance,
In the state in which the blocking state by the blocking means is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is changed to the separation side position (in the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are - a position where the fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are located in the center in the vertical direction),
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the relation between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge part is greater than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. The gaming machine according to feature A17, characterized in that the distance between the two is long.

According to feature A18, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be set as the mounting position and can also be set as the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, it is possible to facilitate the operation of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening. Thereafter, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part as the mounting position, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position. It is possible to create a situation where the distance is short.

It has the configuration of feature A17 above, and the shielding means is fixed to the control board. Further, it has the configuration of feature A1 above, and the predetermined connector is mounted on the control board. The shielding means and the predetermined connector move following the control board. Therefore, while preventing the relative position of the shielding means from changing with respect to the predetermined connector, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion changes from the separation side position to the mounting position. can be done. By setting the relative position to be the mounting position, the distance between the specific side surface and the specific periphery becomes longer than the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined periphery. Even in the attached position, the relative position of the shielding means with respect to the predetermined connector does not change. By fixing the shielding means to the control board and making the relative position the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge can be shortened, and the predetermined connector on the main control board can be shortened. It is possible to reduce the area of the area exposed to the outside of the substrate box around a specific side surface of the substrate box.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of features A1 to A18, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A control board (main control board 61 in the first to third embodiments) that performs control related to the game,
A board box that accommodates the control board (front case body 121 and back case body 122 in the first embodiment, front case body 232 and back case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body in the third embodiment) 312 and back case body 313),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Predetermined connectors (first connector CN1, second connector CN2, third connector CN3, and fourth connector CN4) are mounted on a predetermined board surface (element mounting surface 61e) of the control board,
The board box is
A predetermined formation in which a connection opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted is formed to enable connection of a signal transmission means (a male connector corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connector. (first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 in the first embodiment, first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, first to fourth front side in the third embodiment) connector insertion holes 362 to 365),
The relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is determined as the mounting position (in the first embodiment, the play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 156b to 159b is the upper upright wall part 101b). 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 156a to 159a, in the second embodiment, between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 271b to 274b. The position where the play that exists is smaller than the play that exists between the upper standing walls 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a, in the third embodiment, the position where the play exists between the lower standing walls 101c to 104c and the lower side The predetermined formation is performed at a position where the play existing between the peripheral edges 362b to 365b is smaller than the play existing between the upper standing wall parts 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a. Blocking means for preventing relative movement of the control board with respect to the parts (front side first case fixing boss 183 to front side third case fixing boss 185 and back side first case fixing boss 186 to back side third case in the first embodiment) fixing boss 188, front side first case fixing boss 391 to front side third case fixing boss 393, and back side first case fixing boss 394 to back side third case fixing boss 396),
Equipped with
In the state in which the blocking state by the blocking means is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is changed to the separation side position (in the first embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are ~The position where the fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159 are located in the vertical center, for example, in the second embodiment, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are inserted into the first to fourth connectors. In the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are located at the center of the holes 271 to 274 in the vertical direction, for example, to the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. It is a configuration that allows it to be located at the center in the vertical direction of
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface (the first - the lower side surface of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c in the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a predetermined peripheral edge portion (in the first embodiment, the The lower peripheral edges 156b to 159b of the connector insertion holes 156 to 159, the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and the first to 274b in the third embodiment. A gaming machine characterized in that the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b of the fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 are located close to each other.

According to feature B1, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion can be set as the mounting position and can also be set as the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, it is possible to facilitate the operation of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening. Thereafter, by setting the relative position of the control board to the predetermined forming part as the mounting position, the predetermined peripheral edge facing the predetermined side surface becomes more stable than when the relative position of the control board to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position. It is possible to create a state where objects exist in close proximity.

Feature B2. The blocking means is in a blocking state (in the first embodiment, in which the control board is prevented from moving relative to the predetermined formation part when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation part is the mounting position). The state in which the front side first case fixing boss 183 to the front side third case fixing boss 185 and the back side first case fixing boss 186 to the back side third case fixing boss 188 are fixed with screws, and in the third embodiment, the front side first case Feature B1 characterized in that fixing boss 391 to front side third case fixing boss 393 and back side first case fixing boss 394 to back side third case fixing boss 396 can be fixed with screws). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature B2, by setting the control board to the blocking state using the blocking means, it is possible to maintain the state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. This can reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud jig such as a wire is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge.

Feature B3. The predetermined connector includes engagement means (locking receivers 101h to 104h) that are provided on the predetermined side surface and engage with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector. Prepare,
The engagement means is present on the predetermined side surface closer to the free end of the predetermined connector than the area facing the connection opening,
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is such that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion of the engagement means is directed toward the predetermined peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that the gaming machine has a dimension that is greater than or equal to a protruding dimension.

According to feature B3, by providing the engagement means, it is possible to maintain a state in which the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means are connected. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is equal to or larger than the dimension of the engagement means protruding from the predetermined side surface toward the predetermined peripheral edge portion. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, it is possible to facilitate the operation of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening.

Feature B4. When the board box changes the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part from the separation side position to the mounting position, the board box is configured to move the control board or the control board so that the relative position becomes the mounting position. Any of the features B1 to B3 characterized in that the device includes a means for guiding an object integrated with the substrate (the second guide portion 182 in the first embodiment, the second guide portion 306 in the second embodiment). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature B4, in the step of assembling the board box, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is directed from the separation side position to the mounting position by moving the control board or an integral part of the control board according to the guiding means. can be changed. This makes it easy to change the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part from the separation side position to the mounting position in the process, and also makes it possible to change the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part. The state of the mounting position can be created with good reproducibility.

Feature B5. Predetermined connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board (one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the one end terminal 115 of the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4) ) extends along the predetermined plate surface between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral edge of the connection opening. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature B5, when the structure of feature B1 is provided, and the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge are more closely connected to each other than when the relative position is the separation side position. In the configuration in which the connector and the control board are located close to each other, the predetermined connecting means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board extends so as to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge along the predetermined plate surface. By setting the relative position as the mounting position so that the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge are close to each other, a conductive tampering jig such as a wire is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a fraudulent act of electrically contacting the predetermined connection means will be carried out. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the signal transmitted by the predetermined connection means will be tampered with.

Feature B6. As a connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, a connecting means is provided on the opposite side of the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector across the main body portion (housing 101 to 104 and terminals 111 to 116) of the predetermined connector. The existing specific side surface (the upper side surface of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and the specific peripheral edge portion facing the specific side surface in the connection opening (the first embodiment In the embodiment, upper peripheral edges 156a to 159a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 156 to 159, upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment, and upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, there is no connecting means extending along the predetermined plate surface of the control board between the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that:

According to feature B6, when the configuration of feature B1 is provided, and the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge are more closely aligned than when the relative position is the separation side position. In a configuration in which the connectors are located close to each other, a connecting means for electrically connecting a predetermined connector and a control board extends across a specific side surface and a specific peripheral edge along a predetermined plate surface. does not exist. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position, the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral part is longer than when the relative position is the separation side position. Since there is no connecting means that extends along the predetermined plate surface between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge, there is no conductive material such as a wire between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge. The possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a fraudulent jig can be reduced.

Feature B7. The control means (MPU 63) provided on the control board receives a signal (receiving payout) related to the provision of a predetermined profit (provision of gaming media to the player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) through the predetermined connection means. Command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted. .

According to feature B7, in a configuration including the configuration of feature B5, in which the predetermined connecting means extends between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface, The signal is transmitted through the predetermined connection means. Further, when the structure of feature B1 is provided and the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge are closer to each other than when the relative position is the separation side position. Therefore, by setting the relative position as the mounting position, a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive tampering jig between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined periphery and electrically contacting the predetermined connection means can be carried out. It is possible to reduce the possibility of Therefore, by setting the relative position as the mounting position, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act may be carried out in which a tampering jig is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined periphery to fraudulently change the signal regarding the granting of the predetermined profit. can be reduced.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of features B1 to B7, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A control board (main control board 61) that performs control related to games,
A board box that accommodates the control board (front case body 232 and back case body 234 in the second embodiment, front case body 312 and back case body 313 in the third embodiment),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Predetermined connectors (first connector CN1, second connector CN2, third connector CN3, and fourth connector CN4) are mounted on a predetermined board surface (element mounting surface 61e) of the control board,
The board box has a connection opening (through which the predetermined connector is inserted) to enable connection of the signal transmission means (male connectors corresponding to the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) to the predetermined connector. The first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274 in the second embodiment and the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment are formed,
A predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector (the lower side surface of the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c in the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a predetermined peripheral edge portion (second In the embodiment, lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b of the first to fourth connector insertion holes 271 to 274, and lower peripheral edges 362b to 365b of the first to fourth front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the third embodiment. ) is the specific side surface (first to upper side surface of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b in the fourth connectors CN1 to CN4) and a specific peripheral edge portion facing the specific side surface in the connection opening (in the second embodiment, the upper side surface of the upper standing wall portions 101b to 104b) In the third embodiment, the distance between the upper peripheral edges 271a to 274a of 271 to 274 is shorter than the distance between the upper peripheral edges 362a to 365a of the first to fourth front side connector insertion holes 362 to 365. , a positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set;
This gaming machine is located closer to the control board than the connection opening, and a range of the control board is exposed to the outside of the board box through a gap between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge. A game machine characterized in that it is equipped with a shielding means (the connector cover 233 in the second embodiment, the connector compatible plate 314 in the third embodiment) that can narrow the area.

According to feature C1, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined circumferential edge is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the predetermined circumferential edge, so that unauthorized use can occur between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined circumferential edge. The possibility of fraudulent insertion of a jig can be reduced. Information regarding the player's interests among the wiring for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board on the predetermined side surface side where the distance between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening is shorter in the predetermined connector. By providing important wiring for transmitting information regarding the transition of gaming states, information regarding abnormal states, etc., it is possible to make it difficult to commit fraudulent acts with respect to the important wiring.

By using a shielding means to narrow the range of the control board that is exposed to the outside of the board box through the gap between the specific side surface and the specific periphery, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use in the gap between the specific side surface and the specific periphery. If a fraudulent act of inserting a jig is performed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fraudulent jig will reach terminals, wiring patterns, etc. on the surface of the main control board. This makes it possible to prevent such fraudulent acts.

Note that as long as the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge, the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge may be in contact with each other. The predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge may be separated from each other.

Feature C2. The shielding means includes a predetermined forming portion (a connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, a connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment) in the board box in which the connection opening is formed; The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the game machine is interposed between the control board and a connection part (fixing parts 111b to 116b) that electrically connects the predetermined connector to the control board.

According to feature C2, since the shielding means is located closer to the predetermined forming part than the connecting part, the shielding means can prevent the tampering jig from coming into contact with the connecting part. Since the shielding means is located closer to the control board than the predetermined formation portion, it is possible to prevent the shielding means from being illegally removed.

Feature C3. The shielding means includes a shielding side opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted (first to fourth cover side insertion holes 275 to 278 in the second embodiment, first to fourth plate side openings in the third embodiment). Through holes 336 to 339) are formed,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the opening area of the shielding side opening is narrower than the opening area of the connection opening.

According to feature C3, the area of the area exposed to the outside of the board box around the predetermined connector on the control board is reduced compared to a configuration in which the predetermined connector is inserted only into the connection opening without the shielding means. can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud jig is brought into electrical contact with a region of the control board exposed to the outside of the board box.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the shielding means is fixed to the control board.

According to feature C4, in a state where the shielding means is fixed to the control board, the shielding means moves following the control board. Therefore, it is possible to change the relative position of the connection opening with respect to the predetermined connector while preventing the relative position of the shielding means from changing with respect to the predetermined connector mounted on the control board.

Feature C5. The board box is
a predetermined forming portion in which the connection opening is formed (the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment);
The relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is determined as the mounting position (in the third embodiment, the play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge parts 362b to 365b is the upper upright wall part 101b). 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365a), the blocking means (third (front side first case fixing boss 391 to front side third case fixing boss 393 and back side first case fixing boss 394 to back side third case fixing boss 396),
Equipped with
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is greater than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is a configuration with a short distance,
The blocking state by the blocking means (in the third embodiment, the first case fixing boss 391 on the front side to the third case fixing boss 393 on the front side and the first case fixing boss 394 on the back side to the third case fixing boss 396 on the back side are fixed with screws) In the state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is released (in the third embodiment, for example, the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 are It is a configuration that allows it to be located at the center of the front connector insertion holes 362 to 365 in the vertical direction,
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the relation between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge part is greater than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the distance between the two is long.

According to feature C5, in a configuration where the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part can be set as the mounting position, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part can be set as the separation side position. When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral part is longer than when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. Become. Therefore, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, it is possible to facilitate the operation of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening. Thereafter, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part as the mounting position, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the separation side position. It is possible to create a situation where the distance is short.

Feature C6. Predetermined connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board (one end terminal 111 of the first connector CN1, the terminal 113 of the second connector CN2, the one end terminal 115 of the third connector CN3, and the fourth connector CN4) ) extends along the predetermined plate surface between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral edge of the connection opening. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature C6, the connection opening has the configuration of feature C1 above, and the connection opening is configured such that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. In the configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the section is set, the predetermined connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board is configured to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge along the predetermined plate surface. It extends to Because the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral edge, unauthorized use of conductive material such as a wire between the specified side surface and the specified peripheral edge is prohibited. It is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a jig and bringing it into electrical contact with the predetermined connection means. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the signal transmitted by the predetermined connection means will be tampered with.

Feature C7. As the connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, there is no connection means extending between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface. The gaming machine according to feature C6, characterized in that:

According to feature C7, the connection opening has the configuration of feature C1 above, and the connection opening is configured such that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. In a configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the section is set, as a connection means for electrically connecting the predetermined connector and the control board, the connector is configured to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion along the predetermined plate surface. There are no extended connection means. Although the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge is long compared to the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge, it is possible to straddle the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge along the predetermined plate surface. Since there is no connecting means that extends to the specified side surface, the possibility of a fraudulent act of inserting a conductive tampering jig such as a wire between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion is reduced. I can do it.

Feature C8. A signal (payout) related to the provision of a predetermined profit (provision of game media to the player, transition to a state advantageous for the player) is sent to the control means provided on the control board through the predetermined connection means. Reception command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection The game according to feature C6 or C7, characterized in that a detection signal of the sensor 43a, a detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and a detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a are transmitted. Machine.

According to feature C8, in a configuration including the configuration of feature C6, in which the predetermined connecting means extends between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge so as to straddle the predetermined plate surface, the method is related to imparting a predetermined benefit. The signal is transmitted through the predetermined connection means. Further, it has the configuration of feature C1 above, and the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion, so that the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion This reduces the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive tampering jig is inserted between the terminals and electrically contacts the predetermined connection means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a fraud jig is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge to fraudulently change the signal regarding the granting of the predetermined profit.

Feature C9. The specific connection means (the other end side terminal 112 of the first connector CN1, the other end side terminal 116 of the fourth connector CN4) that electrically connects the predetermined connector and the control board is connected to the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge part. extending along the predetermined plate surface between the
The control means (MPU 63) provided on the control board receives a signal (receiving payout) related to the provision of a predetermined profit (provision of gaming media to the player, transition to a state advantageous to the player) through the predetermined connection means. Command, payout transmission command, prize ball permission signal, detection signal of the first operating opening detection sensor 46a, detection signal of the second operating opening detection sensor 47a, detection signal of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the detection signal of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the detection signal of the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the detection signal of the gate detection sensor 49a) are transmitted, and the signals not related to the provision of the predetermined profit are transmitted through the specific connection means. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein: is transmitted.

According to feature C9, the connection opening has the configuration of feature C1 above, and the connection opening is configured such that the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge. In addition to having a configuration in which the positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the portion is set, the predetermined connecting means extends so as to straddle the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion along the predetermined plate surface. In a configuration in which a signal regarding the granting of a predetermined profit is transmitted through a predetermined connection means, a conductive tampering jig such as a wire may be inserted between a predetermined side surface and a predetermined peripheral edge. It is possible to prevent unauthorized electrical contact with the predetermined connection means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the signal regarding the provision of a predetermined profit from being changed illegally.

Furthermore, a signal unrelated to the provision of a predetermined profit is transmitted through the specific connection means extending between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral portion so as to straddle the predetermined board surface. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive fraud jig such as a wire is inserted between a specific side surface and a specific peripheral part and comes into contact with a specific connection means, the prescribed profit will not be granted due to the fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent signals related to information from being changed illegally.

Feature C10. The predetermined connector includes engagement means (locking receivers 101h to 104h) that are provided on the predetermined side surface and engage with the signal transmission means when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector. Prepare,
The game according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein the engaging means is located closer to the free end of the predetermined connector than the area facing the connection opening on the predetermined side surface. Machine.

According to feature C10, by providing the engagement means, when the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means are in a connected state, the state can be maintained. Since the engaging means is provided closer to the free end of the predetermined connector than the area facing the connection opening on the predetermined side surface, the presence of the engagement means causes the predetermined peripheral edge of the connection opening to It is possible to prevent the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined side surface from increasing, and it is also possible to prevent a fraudulent act of inserting a tampering jig between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge by the engaging means.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the specific side surface is not provided with the engaging means.

According to feature C11, the connection state between the predetermined connector and the signal transmission means can be maintained by having the configuration of feature C10 described above and having the engagement means provided on a predetermined side surface. It is possible. Due to the configuration in which the engagement means is provided only on the predetermined side surface of the predetermined side surface and the specific side surface, the predetermined connector is In order to allow the free end to be inserted into the connection opening, the play provided between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening can be made small. This makes it possible to reduce the play that exists between the predetermined connector and the peripheral edge of the connection opening when the predetermined connector is inserted into the connection opening.

Feature C12. The board box is
a predetermined forming portion in which the connection opening is formed (the connector group corresponding plate portion 267a in the second embodiment, the connector group corresponding plate portion 361a in the third embodiment);
The relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is determined as the mounting position (in the second embodiment, the play that exists between the lower upright wall parts 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edges 271b to 274b is the upper upright wall part 101b). 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 271a to 274a, in the third embodiment, between the lower standing wall portions 101c to 104c and the lower peripheral edge portions 362b to 365b. At a position where the play that exists is smaller than the play that exists between the upper upstanding wall portions 101b to 104b and the upper peripheral edge portions 362a to 365a), the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is determined. Blocking means for preventing movement (first case fixing boss 391 on the front side to third case fixing boss 393 on the front side and first case fixing boss 394 on the back side to third case fixing boss 396 on the back side in the third embodiment);
Equipped with
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is greater than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, characterized in that the distance is short.

According to feature C12, when the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge, the relative position of the predetermined control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is determined. This makes it easy to maintain this state by preventing any movement.

Feature C13. The blocking means is in a blocking state (in the third embodiment) that prevents relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part when the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming part is the mounting position. The first case fixing boss 391 on the front side to the third case fixing boss 393 on the front side and the first case fixing boss 394 on the back side to the third case fixing boss 396 on the back side are fixed with screws). The gaming machine according to feature C12.

According to feature C13, by setting the control board to the blocking state using the blocking means, it is possible to maintain a state in which the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion is the mounting position. This can reduce the possibility of a fraudulent act in which a conductive fraud jig such as a wire is inserted between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge.

Feature C14. In a state where the blocking state by the blocking means is released, the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion can be set to a separation side position,
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined formation portion is the separation side position, a space is created between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, and a space is also created between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. The gaming machine according to feature C12 or C13, characterized in that the following occurs.

According to feature C14, in the process of assembling the board box, by setting the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined forming portion to the separation side position, a space is created between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion, and a space is created between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion. A space may also be created between the specific peripheral portion. Thereby, in the work of inserting the predetermined connector into the connection opening, it is not necessary to finely adjust the relative position of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening, and the work can be made easier.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of features C1 to C14, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. In a gaming machine equipped with a control board (main control board 401 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, main control board 431 in the sixth embodiment) that performs control related to games,
The control board is
Grounding means (GND line 405 and GND contact part 407 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, GND line 435 and GND contact part 437 in the sixth embodiment) connected to the ground,
Power supplied means (fraud detection line 406 and fraud detection contact part 408 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, fraud detection line 436 in the sixth embodiment) that are arranged in parallel with the ground means and to which power is supplied and fraud detection contact part 438),
Equipped with
This gaming machine includes a conduction handling means (a step in the main CPU 64) that causes a specific state (a state in which abnormality notification processing is executed in step S903) when the ground means and the power supplied means are electrically connected to each other. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processes of S901, S903, and S904.

According to feature D1, the power supplied means is arranged in parallel with the grounding means. Therefore, if a fraudulent act is carried out in which a conductive tampering jig, such as a flat-head screwdriver, is brought close to the control board, there is a possibility that the grounding means and the power supplied means become electrically connected due to the tampering jig. is enhanced. A specific state occurs when the ground means and the power supplied means are electrically connected. Therefore, based on the occurrence of a specific state, it is possible to determine that a fraudulent act of bringing the fraudulent jig close to the control board has been carried out and the grounding means and the power supplied means have become electrically connected.

Feature D2. At least one of the grounding means and the power supply means includes a bulging portion bulging from the board surface of the control board (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, soldering of the GND contact portion 407 and the fraud detection contact portion 408). The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising bulging portions 407d and 408d (in the sixth embodiment, solder bulging portions 437d and 438d of a GND contact portion 437 and a fraud detection contact portion 438).

According to feature D2, since the bulge protrudes from the board surface of the control board, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the main control board, the tampering jig is prevented from collapsing into the bulge. The possibility of contact is increased. Since at least one of the ground means and the power supplied means is configured to include the bulge, when the conductive tampering jig is brought close to the main control board, the tampering jig is grounded. The possibility of electrical contact with at least one of the means and the power supplied means can be increased.

Feature D3. The ground means includes a ground-side bulge (fourth and fourth bulges) bulging from a predetermined plate surface of the control board (solder surface 401f in the fourth and fifth embodiments, substrate back surface 431f in the sixth embodiment). The fifth embodiment includes a solder bulge 407d of the GND contact portion 407, and the sixth embodiment includes a solder bulge 437d of the GND contact portion 437.
The power supply means includes a supply side bulge bulged from the predetermined plate surface of the control board (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the solder bulge 408d of the fraud detection contact section 408, the sixth In the embodiment, the solder swelling part 438d of the fraud detection contact part 438 is provided,
The game machine according to feature D1, wherein the ground side bulge portion and the supplied side bulge portion are arranged side by side on the predetermined board surface.

According to feature D3, since the ground side bulge portion bulges out from the predetermined plate surface, when the tampering jig is brought close to the predetermined plate surface, the tampering jig bulges on the ground side. The possibility of contact with other parts is increased. Since the bulging part on the supplied side protrudes from the predetermined plate surface, when the tampering jig is brought close to the predetermined plate surface, the tampering jig comes into contact with the bulging part on the supplied side. The possibility has been increased. By arranging the ground side bulge and the supplied side bulge in parallel on a predetermined plate surface, when a tampering jig is brought close to the predetermined plate surface, the tampering jig is placed on the ground side. There is a high possibility that the grounding means and the power receiving means will be electrically connected by contacting both the bulging portion and the supplied side bulging portion. This can reduce the possibility that the fraudulent act will be overlooked when a fraudulent act is carried out by bringing the fraudulent jig close to a predetermined board surface of the control board.

Feature D4. The grounding means is formed continuously over a predetermined range (periphery of the main control boards 401, 431), and is entirely connected to a grounding area (GND line in the fourth and fifth embodiments). 405a to 405d (GND lines 435a to 435d in the sixth embodiment), the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to feature D4, since the ground area is formed continuously over a predetermined range, the ground area is more conductive to the control board than a configuration in which the ground area is formed intermittently. When the tampering jig is brought close, it is possible to increase the possibility that the tampering jig will come into contact with the ground area. Since the entire ground area is connected to the ground, if the tampering jig comes into contact with the ground area and the power supplied means and the ground means and the power supplied means become electrically connected, the power It is possible to create at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power supplied means is decreased and a state in which the voltage in the power supplied means is decreased. This makes it easy to identify that the ground means and the power supplied means are in a conductive state.

Feature D5. The ground means is connected to the ground through the ground area, and includes a ground-side bulge portion bulging from the board surface of the control board (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, a solder bulge portion 407d of the GND contact portion 407, In the sixth embodiment, a solder swelling portion 437d of the GND contact portion 437 is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein a plurality of the ground side bulges are provided intermittently along the ground area.

According to feature D5, since the ground-side bulge protrudes from the board surface of the control board, there is a possibility that a tampering jig brought close to the board surface will come into contact with the ground-side bulge. It is elevated. Since a plurality of ground-side bulges are provided intermittently along the ground area, a tampering jig that is brought close to the board surface on which the ground-side bulges are provided on the control board is The possibility of contact with at least one of the ground side bulges is increased.

Since the ground-side bulge is connected to the ground through the ground area, the tampering jig comes into contact with the ground-side bulge and the power-supplied means, resulting in electrical continuity between the ground-side bulge and the power-supplied means. In this case, it is possible to create at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power receiving means is decreasing and a state in which the voltage in the power receiving means is dropping. This makes it easy to identify that the ground means and the power supplied means are in a conductive state.

Feature D6. The power supply means has a specific range (a range where fraud detection lines 406a to 406d are formed on the main control board 401 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, and a range where fraud detection lines 406a to 406d are formed on the main control board 431 in the sixth embodiment). The power supply area (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fraud detection lines 406a to 406d) is formed continuously over the range in which the detection lines 436a to 436d are formed, and the power is supplied to the entire area. , in the sixth embodiment, fraud detection lines 436a to 436d).

According to feature D6, since the power supplied region is formed continuously over a specific range, the power supplied region is formed intermittently. When a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the tampering jig, the possibility that the tampering jig comes into contact with the power supplied area can be increased. Since power is supplied to the entire power supplied area, if the tampering jig comes into contact with the power supplied area and the grounding means, the tampering jig will not be able to reach any part of the power supplied area. Even in the case of contact, the power receiving means and the grounding means are in a state of continuity, the amount of current flowing through the power receiving means is decreasing, and the voltage in the power receiving means is dropping. At least one of the following conditions can be created. This makes it easy to identify that the ground means and the power supplied means are in a conductive state.

Feature D7. The power supply means is provided with the power through the power supply region, and includes a supply side bulge portion (in the fourth and fifth embodiments, a fraud detection contact portion 408) that protrudes from the board surface of the control board. (in the sixth embodiment, a solder swelling portion 438d of the fraud detection contact portion 438),
The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein a plurality of the supply side bulges are provided intermittently along the power supply area.

According to feature D7, since the supply-side bulge protrudes from the board surface of the control board, a fraud jig brought close to the board surface can come into contact with the supply-side bulge. sex is enhanced. Since a plurality of supply side bulges are provided intermittently along the power supply area, the tampering jig is brought close to the board surface on which the supply side bulges are provided on the control board. The possibility of contacting with at least one of the plurality of supplied side bulges is increased.

Since power is supplied to the bulge on the supplied side through the power supplied area, the tampering jig comes into contact with the bulged part on the supplied side and the ground means, and the ground means and the power supplied means are electrically connected. In this case, at least one of a state in which the amount of current flowing through the power supplied means is decreased and a state in which the voltage in the power supplied means is decreased can be created. This makes it easy to identify that the ground means and the power supplied means are in a conductive state.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein each of the ground means and the power supplied means is provided along a peripheral edge of a board surface of the control board.

According to feature D8, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the control board from the peripheral side of the control board, the tampering jig is more likely to come into contact with electronic components mounted on the control board. It is possible to create a state in which the ground means and the power supplied means are electrically connected to each other using the tampering jig. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act at an early stage.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein each of the ground means and the power supplied means is provided over the entire circumference of a peripheral portion of the board surface of the control board. .

According to feature D9, compared to a configuration in which at least one of the grounding means and the power supply means is provided only on a part of the periphery of the board surface of the control board, illegal use of conductivity on the control board is prevented. When the jig is approached from the peripheral edge side of the control board, it is possible to increase the possibility that the grounding means and the power supplied means are brought into electrical continuity by the tampering jig. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act at an early stage.

Feature D10. Each of the ground means and the power supplied means has at least a plate surface (in the fourth and fifth embodiments The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized in that the soldering surface 401f in the sixth embodiment is provided on the substrate back surface 431f in the sixth embodiment.

According to feature D10, when a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the board surface where the various electronic components mounted on the control board and the control board are fixed by soldering, the tampering The possibility that the ground means and the power-supplied means will be in a conductive state can be increased by the use of the jig. If a fraudulent act is carried out in which a conductive tampering jig is brought into contact with the solder-fixed part and its surroundings, the signals sent from or received by various electronic components may be tampered with. There is a risk that you may be On the other hand, by having a configuration that can detect fraudulent activity in which a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the board surface where the solder fixing point exists, the fraudulent activity can be carried out without the amusement hall manager noticing. The possibility of this happening is reduced.

Feature D11. The conduction handling means is configured such that the grounding means and the power supplied means are electrically connected in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 402 in the fifth embodiment) provided on the control board is stopped. In this case, the above-mentioned specific state occurs,
This gaming machine is a means (a function of executing the processes of step S1001 and step S1002 in the main CPU 64) that executes a specific process (abnormality notification process in step S1002) based on the fact that the continuity response means is in the specific state. and,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D11, in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, a fraudulent act is performed in which a conductive tampering jig is brought close to the control board, and the tampering jig causes the grounding means and the power to become close to each other. When the supplied means is brought into electrical continuity, the specific process is executed. As a result, even fraudulent acts committed in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped can be grasped based on the execution of the specific process.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of features D1 to D11, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature A group, the above feature B group, the above feature C group, and the above feature D group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

These gaming machines are equipped with a control device that mainly controls the games, and the control device is equipped with a control board. The control board is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and connectors on a printed wiring board.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably suppress fraudulent acts against electronic components mounted on the board, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A control board (main control board 451 in the seventh embodiment, main control board 451 in the eighth embodiment) on which a control means (MPU 452 in the seventh embodiment, MPU 472 in the eighth embodiment) for controlling the game is mounted. substrate 471);
The control means uses a predetermined signal path (reset signal wiring 464 or power outage signal wiring 465 in the seventh embodiment, reset signal wiring 476 or power outage signal wiring 477 in the eighth embodiment) provided on the control board. A signal transmitting means (power outage monitoring device 461 in the seventh embodiment, power outage monitoring device 473 in the eighth embodiment) capable of transmitting a predetermined signal (reset signal or power outage signal) to the
Equipped with
The control means determines that the reception status of the predetermined signal through the predetermined signal path is in a specific situation (a situation in which a reset signal is lowered from a HI state to a LOW state, or a power outage signal is lowered from a HI state to a LOW state). This is a configuration in which the processing for advancing the game (main processing and timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 64) is not executed based on the situation).
The control board has a first plate surface (in the seventh embodiment, the solder surface of the main control board 451 opposite to the element mounting surface 451a, in the eighth embodiment, the main control board 471 (the back surface of the substrate opposite to the element mounting surface 471a), the second plate surface is a plate surface on the opposite side (the element mounting surface 451a in the seventh embodiment, the element mounting surface 471a in the eighth embodiment) Suppressing means capable of suppressing electrical noise from being added to the predetermined signal path from the second board surface side in a region opposite to the predetermined signal path across the control board ( A gaming machine characterized by comprising a noise countermeasure pattern 466 in the seventh embodiment and a noise countermeasure pattern 485 in the eighth embodiment.

According to feature E1, the control means enters a state in which processing for advancing the game is not executed based on the reception status of the predetermined signal becoming a specific status. Therefore, if the predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise and the reception status of the predetermined signal becomes a specific situation due to the noise, processing to proceed with the game in a situation where the game should normally proceed. will not be executed. In the control board, a suppressing means is provided in a region opposite to the predetermined signal path across the control board on a second board surface that is a board surface on the opposite side to the first board surface on which the predetermined signal path is provided. ing. Therefore, if electrical noise occurs on the opposite side of the suppression means from the predetermined signal path, the noise will affect the predetermined signal sent to the control means using the predetermined signal path. This can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation in which processing for advancing the game is not executed due to electrical noise.

Feature E2. The suppressing means is a circuit area (noise countermeasure pattern 466 in the seventh embodiment, noise countermeasure pattern 485 in the eighth embodiment) formed on the control board and connected to the ground. The gaming machine described in E1.

According to feature E2, in the control board, an area on the opposite side from the predetermined signal path across the control board on the second board surface, which is the board surface on the opposite side to the first board surface on which the predetermined signal path is provided. A circuit area connected to ground is provided as a suppression means. Therefore, electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the suppressing means from the predetermined signal path can be absorbed by the suppressing means located before the predetermined signal path and released to the ground. Thereby, it is possible to prevent electrical noise from affecting the predetermined signal transmitted to the control means using the predetermined signal path.

Feature E3. A location where the control means and the control board are fixed by soldering (reset signal receiving terminal 462 or power outage signal receiving terminal 463 in the seventh embodiment, reset signal receiving terminal 474 or power outage signal receiving terminal 475 in the eighth embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that the board surface on which is present is the first board surface.

According to feature E3, in a configuration having the configuration of feature E1, in which a predetermined signal path is provided on the first plate surface of the control board, the location where the control means and the control board are fixed by soldering is on the first board surface. exists in Therefore, in the control board, the entire signal path through which the signal transmitting means transmits a predetermined signal to the control means can be provided on the first board surface, and the control board can be provided with the control board on the second board surface sandwiched between the signal paths. In this case, the suppressing means may be provided in a region opposite to the entire signal path. As a result, before the electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the signal path across the suppression means reaches the signal path, the suppression exists in front of the signal path as seen from the source of the noise. The noise can be blocked by the means.

Feature E4. The plate surface on which the solder fixing point between the control means and the control board (reset signal receiving terminal 474 or power failure signal receiving terminal 475 in the eighth embodiment) is present is the second plate surface,
A signal path (reset signal wiring 476 or power outage signal wiring 477 in the eighth embodiment) through which the predetermined signal can be transmitted from the signal transmission means to the control means,
A specific signal path (third wiring on the reset side in the eighth embodiment) provided on the second plate surface and electrically connected to the control means using the fixing location between the control means and the control board 476c or power outage side third wiring 477c),
a conduction path (second through hole 482 on the reset side or second through hole 484 on the power outage side in the eighth embodiment) that is provided to penetrate the control board and connects the specific signal path and the predetermined signal path;
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E4, the part for fixing the control means and the control board by soldering is present on the second plate surface, and the first plate is used as a signal path for transmitting a predetermined signal transmitted from the signal transmitting means to the control means. A predetermined signal path on the surface, a specific signal path on the second plate surface that is electrically connected to the control means, and a conduction path that connects the specific signal path and the predetermined signal path. Equipped with the configuration of feature E1 above, in the control board, a suppressing means is provided in a region on the opposite side of the predetermined signal path across the control board on the second board surface, and a predetermined signal path is provided across the suppressing means. The influence of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the signal path is prevented from reaching the predetermined signal path. For this reason, compared to a configuration in which all of the signal paths for transmitting the predetermined signal transmitted from the signal transmitting means to the control means are provided on the second plate surface, this is on the opposite side of the predetermined signal path with the suppressing means in between. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the predetermined signal will be affected by the electrical noise generated in the above.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the control means is mounted on the second board surface side of the control board.

According to feature E5, a predetermined signal path having the configuration of feature E1 and feature E4 described above, which is a part of a signal path for transmitting a predetermined signal from the signal transmitting means to the control means, is provided on the first plate surface. In addition, in the control board, a suppressing means is provided in a region on the opposite side of the predetermined signal path across the control board on the second board surface. Therefore, the possibility that electrical noise will affect the predetermined signal while the predetermined signal is transmitted through the predetermined signal path is reduced. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the control means is mounted on the second plate surface side, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the predetermined signal will be influenced by electrical noise.

Feature E6. The signal transmitting means transmits the predetermined signal when the operating power becomes compatible with a power outage,
The specific situation is a situation where the predetermined signal is being received,
The control means is a means for executing power outage response processing (power outage information storage processing) for subsequently stopping the operation based on reception of the predetermined signal (execution of the processing of steps S1101 to S1104 in the main CPU 64). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of:

According to feature E6, the control means executes the power outage response process based on receiving the predetermined signal. By executing the power outage response process before the supply of operating power is completely stopped, the operation of the control means can be safely terminated. Further, after the power is restored, the operation of the control means can be appropriately started.

If a predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise and the control means mistakenly realizes that a specific situation has occurred due to the noise, it may be possible that the operating power is not designed to handle power outages. Regardless, the power outage response process is executed by the control means. On the other hand, the control board is provided with the configuration of feature E1, and the suppression means is provided in a region on the second board surface on the opposite side of the predetermined signal path across the control board, and The influence of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the device from the predetermined signal path is prevented from reaching the predetermined signal path. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the control means from executing a power outage response process due to the influence of noise even though the operating power is not compatible with a power outage.

Feature E7. The signal transmitting means stops transmitting the predetermined signal when the operating power becomes compatible with a power outage,
The specific situation is a situation where the predetermined signal is not received,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the control means stops the operation based on a situation in which the predetermined signal is not received.

According to feature E7, the control means stops the operation based on a situation in which the predetermined signal is not received. Thereby, when the supply of operating power is stopped, the operation of the control means can be appropriately stopped.

If the predetermined signal is affected by electrical noise and the control means is not receiving the predetermined signal due to the noise, the operating power may not be compatible with power outages. Regardless, the operation of the control means stops. On the other hand, the control board is provided with the configuration of feature E1, and the suppression means is provided in a region on the second board surface on the opposite side of the predetermined signal path across the control board, and The influence of electrical noise generated on the opposite side of the device from the predetermined signal path is prevented from reaching the predetermined signal path. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operation of the control means from stopping due to the influence of noise even though the operating power is not compatible with power outages.

Note that even if any one or more of features A1 to A18, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C14, features D1 to D11, and features E1 to E7 are applied to the configurations of features E1 to E7, good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

These gaming machines are equipped with a control device that mainly controls the games, and the control device is equipped with a control board. The control board is configured by mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and connectors on a printed wiring board.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably suppress the influence of noise on signals, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

10... Pachinko machine, 42a... 1st winning opening detection sensor, 43a... 2nd winning opening detection sensor, 44a... 3rd winning opening detection sensor, 45a... special electric detection sensor, 46a... 1st operating opening detection sensor, 47a... th 2 operating opening detection sensor, 49a...gate detection sensor, 61...main control board, 61e...element mounting surface, 63...MPU, 64...main side CPU, 101-104...housing, 101b-104b...upper standing wall section, 101c ~104c...lower standing wall part, 101h~104h...locking receiver, 111...one end side terminal, 111b~116b...fixing part, 112...other end side terminal, 113...terminal, 114...terminal, 115...one end side Terminal, 116...Other end side terminal, 121...Front case body, 122...Back case body, 155a...Connector group corresponding plate part, 156 to 159...First to fourth connector insertion holes, 156a to 159a...Upper peripheral edge part, 156b to 159b...Lower peripheral edge part, 182...Second guide part, 183...Front side first case fixing boss, 184...Front side second case fixing boss, 185...Front side third case fixing boss, 186...Back side first case fixing Boss, 187... Back side second case fixing boss, 188... Back side third case fixing boss, 232... Front case body, 233... Connector cover, 234... Back case body, 267a... Connector group corresponding plate part, 271-274... No. 1 to 4th connector insertion holes, 271a to 274a...upper peripheral edge, 271b to 274b...lower peripheral edge, 275 to 278...first to fourth cover side insertion holes, 306...second guide part, 311...board box , 312... Front case body, 313... Back case body, 314... Connector compatible plate, 336 to 339... First to fourth plate side insertion holes, 361a... Connector group compatible plate part, 362 to 365... First to fourth Front side connector insertion hole, 362a to 365a...Upper peripheral edge, 362b to 365b...Lower side peripheral edge, 391...Front side first case fixing boss, 392...Front side second case fixing boss, 393...Front side third case fixing boss, 394 ...Back side first case fixing boss, 395...Back side second case fixing boss, 396...Back side third case fixing boss, 401...Main control board, 401f...Soldering surface, 402...MPU, 405...GND line, 405a to 405d... GND line, 406... Fraud detection line, 406a to 406d... Fraud detection line, 407... GND contact part, 407d... Solder bulge part, 408... Fraud detection contact part, 408d... Solder bulge part, 431... Main control board, 431f...Solder surface, 435...GND line, 435a-435d...GND line, 436...Fraud detection line, 436a-436d...Fraud detection line, 437...GND contact part, 437d...Solder bulge part, 438...Fraud detection contact part , 438d...Solder swelling portion, 451...Main control board, 452...MPU, 461...Power failure monitoring device, 462...Reset signal receiving terminal, 463...Power failure signal receiving terminal, 464...Reset signal wiring, 465...Power failure signal wiring, 466... Noise countermeasure solid, 471... Main control board, 472... MPU, 473... Power outage monitoring device, 474... Reset signal receiving terminal, 475... Power outage signal receiving terminal, 476... Reset signal wiring, 476c... Reset side third wiring, 477... Power outage signal wiring, 477c... Third wiring on power outage side, 482... Second through hole on reset side, 484... Second through hole on power outage side, 485... Noise countermeasure solid, CN1 to CN4... First connector to fourth connector.

Claims (1)

A control board that performs control related to gaming;
a board box that accommodates the control board;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A predetermined connector is mounted on a predetermined board surface of the control board,
The board box is formed with a connection opening through which the predetermined connector is inserted to enable connection of a signal transmission means to the predetermined connector;
The distance between the predetermined side surface of the predetermined connector and the predetermined peripheral edge opposite to the predetermined side surface of the connection opening is on the opposite side of the predetermined side surface across the main body of the predetermined connector. The positional relationship of the predetermined connector with respect to the connection opening is set so that the distance is shorter than the distance between the existing specific side surface and a specific peripheral portion facing the specific side surface in the connection opening. has been
The predetermined connector is provided on the predetermined side surface so as to be located closer to the free end of the predetermined connector than the area facing the connection opening, and when the signal transmission means is connected to the predetermined connector, the predetermined connector comprising engagement means for engaging the signal transmission means;
The board box is
a predetermined portion in which the connection opening is formed;
a blocking means for preventing relative movement of the control board with respect to the predetermined portion while the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined portion is set as the mounting position;
Equipped with
When the relative position of the control board with respect to the predetermined portion is the mounting position, the distance between the predetermined side surface and the predetermined peripheral edge portion is shorter than the distance between the specific side surface and the specific peripheral edge portion. It is a configuration that is a distance,
The board box includes a facing portion facing the predetermined board surface,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the engaging means is located closer to the predetermined board surface than a part of the opposing portion that is farthest from the predetermined board surface.

Images